Home

TM 11-6625-3245-40 HEADQUARTERS

1. TOP VIEW CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY BOTTOM VIEW ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD HANA NCAA ama Tan ENT PIII ttt FIAT Ee it TEES EEE SSE So SSS Pees Eo oe 9 DA I cA TM zi E Em E 1 A28 gt meom E 3 8 OS 1 25 2 5 EE B a REFERENCE E A w e DESIGNATOR NOMENCLATURE i HIS 25 4 1 eu CE E A 1 CHASSIS z 2 A2 REAR PANEL Eu 7 MONITOR cd AS ANALYZER LOG IF zm A5 ANALYZER RF o AG RECEIVER A7 3RD LO DMM A9 90 MHz GENERATOR c c 10 1STLO E E PAE 11 2ND LO e RM A12 RECEIVE IF A13 GENERATOR IF A14 POWER TERMINATION e 15 CRT o 16 POWER SUPPLY A17 FRONT PANEL O 1 A19 PROCESSOR Bi A20 MEMORY 1 1 A21 VIDEO CONTROLLER Q m A22 RF VO So A23 COUNTER 24 FUNCTION GENERATOR Bii
2. CUT PATH DETAIL BOTTOM 12 781A15 CHT Assembly 7005 7840 600 Component Locator and Schematic Diagram Sheet 1 of 3 Figure FO FP 33 FP 34 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 COLOR DIVIDER NETWORK MSI WV ie n REA RE wenn Tw u qa im amp gh meri mi lt SW E m i SE Henr L _ RED COLOR AMP GREEN COLOR AMP BLUE COLOR AMP p ES D i
3. ua Ea OQ Di r Se a 5 Clg TEE 5 aul TTT ir aH ij E um LS fo FL Zus zip TERT TE TE pc ii 05787 127 00 E tk 0 1 a 1 A MN mi y T 1 E na 1 4 E 50 o iL M oo a e a 920 A d po E CNS AI PO ofa a EO oaee g ugi a 1 Ie L Hir 4 ib EUCTH ta dl Z _ mne MT M 5 Gi Ba 3 n 1 p 9 i ERR fo gS E E En UM 9 5 7 P2 t ra ooo na UBER A TEE Eee SAS OSO nono pa nogcoooocoosocoooooog3w i EEE E m A27 External VO A26 Monitor Control 25 Digitizer Figure FO 16 78A1A19 7841420 78A1A21 7841422 78A1A23 7841424 7841425
4. Hi x El Tue THO F 5 SJ a El EN EI J i 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 E139 mg F Ai DMM Relay A2 DMM Digital Figure FO 5 78A1A8 DMM Assembly Component Locator Diagram FP 19 FP 20 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 J3 RO 000 on C2 AM MOD ADJ FM MOD ADJ a AAA A9J3 H AS 90 MHz Generator CE2FO239 Figure FO 6 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator Assembly Component Locator Diagram FP 21 FP 22 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 LA A Af w CAUTION N CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES 6 amp 69 E J SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY t ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD CONNECTION WIRE COLOR FUNCTION DESTINATION FL1 REC RED 15V W1P1 PIN 5 FL2 REC BLACKWHITE STATUS A W1P1 PIN 10 FL3 RED WHITE DATA PIN 12 1 FL4 REC VIOL
5. SPEAKER BACK VEN ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD KEYBOARD isi rd ff D d Y M a 1 N f T 6 E n Mim cs mim 18 BA 7 N E TY 1O Tp A Ill wal X omas c PME i 1 iN L al y Lih n N i ee Vi N INTENSITY Hoe illo LO 3 um BA Al ij i BC i i eb 7 Bro BR 0 DEOD LAA A PRA OO Vi er QW VW Y WI QS v E i 4241082 N 2 AES A CONNECTOR FUNCTION KEYBOARD PN PNI vera B DETAIL A Figure 15 78A1A17 Front Panel Assembly Component Locator Schematic Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 FP 45 FP 46 blank Ri POWER APPLIED EFELZTITITTE
6. I ver KEY COLUMN 4 POWER 4 T 89 KEY ROWS bers E110 1 E640 ARES 5 34 EWTXAAS20258 Kn KEY 5004 ET E m ps 184 S fS ete oue eS HS ao o en su e Eu SPINA J t KEY ROWS en if H EJ Les es 1658 om vro erro E Lao N TER ans ses mom 5 ms EM mo pw 5 55 nn te ee 00 on LA 1661 papa a pap su MEME ss sm 7 sm 0 94 96 a s ran 007 102 rep Pates pete m M eet bah Eid Ba HAGO 225 Te EN gem mem m El E65 i 5 L2 1 te ES E Em EH FENER iE IC SPEAKER RETURN Se lesas sooner sen e g 9 SPEAKER TA AT FRONT PANEL RIRI Mua PUEA SPEER RETURN Figure FO 15 MAD INKL TERA HERD aonan DEMOD AJO 0 6 3 cal Edd AKT MOTHERBOARD x 4 gt Am MNS BAD BER ANDO OUT
7. 70 ei Figure 16 78AIA19 78AIA20 78A1A21 FP 51 FP 52 blank 3 J TI H 5050 ls 88 1 0004 4 o a i ESL 3 00 gt i NIE y lt gt fi 4 dm nign O i iud 5 H E y E 3 E 3 JTB1 E OR O O E 5 a D Ina 03 i O AT NM D APANARARARE RAP NAS 16 E cara Eo SERERE A22 RF 1 0 A23 Counter LI P2 cEzFO185 A24 Function Generator 78A1A22 78A1A23 78A1A24 78A1A25 78A1A26 and 78A1A27 PC Board Assemblies Component Locator Diagrams Sheet 2 of 3 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A y CAUTION CONTAINS PANTS AND ABSEMBLIES SUSCEPTELE TO DAMAGE BY 17 Sc mestanensennor eso
8. zn e sa DODO Oo o0ob00000000000020202000u02 1 A21 Video Controller A19 Processor A20 Memory Figure FO 16 78A1A19 78A1A20 78A1A21 78A1A22 78A1A23 78A1A24 78A1A25 78A1A26 and 78A1A27 PC Board Assemblies Component Locator Diagrams Sheet 1 of 3 FP 49 FP 50 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 5 PARTS AND ASSEMBLES ELECTORSTATC DISCHARGE ESO 5 a 0000000 y 5
9. 2 183 RE Null Adjustmont 1 e an a ene ye 2 188 SCOPE EE 2 201 Signal Meter Adjustment citaciones 2 188 Sinad Meter rrt citer iia 2 197 Spectrum Analyzer 2 203 a 2 183 B Sequence Test lid ica estat f da daa 2 31 Common Tools and 2 5 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank 8 1 1 GBT Abnormality e en 2 33 D Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use 1 2 Detailed Functional 1 3 Deviation Meter AE cnn nace rre eren 2 191 Digital Multimeter 2 205 Distortion Meter 2 196 DMM NIME 2 56 ENVIO Muir E 2 216 Equipment Bri 1 3 Equipment Deseription u seen exe tert esi ter ere ax nsn x er re n E ved Ee na n 1 3 Equipment napeto iiaa nn ettet
10. Locator Diagram FO Replace Procedure ee te ee EP ig eet Schematic Diagram iter nen put 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 56 Functional Description 44 AO Locator Diagram 18 Replace Procedure Schematic Diagram 18 sse enne 78A1A30 Rear Panel Connector Replace Procedure ita A a Schematic Diagram 19 78A1G1 osi sug as ia 78A1J1A 78A1J1B Replace Procedure een 78A2 Top Case Replace Procedures rt ee kenn 78A3 Bottom Case Replace Proce duress edidit id dd er te ris 83A1 Test Adapter Remove nara 83A1A1 Bottom Case Replace Procedure Dev elite es INDEX 4 TM 11 6625 3245 40 1 21 UMP 1 20 DEED FP 51 DUET 2 100 1 17 EROR 1 16 FP 51 DERE 2 108 AAA 1 43 1 42 FP 53 ET 2 99 1 19 1 18 TET FP 53 2 107 1 55
11. Nomenclature Cross Reference List eene 1 Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR 1 Safety Care and Handling NE TO ceo Warranty Information 1 1 a b 1 N Section GENERAL INFORMATION SCOPE Type of Manual General Support Maintenance Manual Equipment Name and Model Number Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B Purpose of Equipment The Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B is a general purpose communications test set for testing radios and related equipment 1 2 CONSOLIDATED ARMY PUBLICATIONS AND FORMS INDEX Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 25 30 to determine whether there are new editions changes or additional publications pertaining to the equipment Change 2 1 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 1 3 MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTS a Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory Equipment Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance are prescribed in DA Pam 750 8 as contained in The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Users Manual b Report of Item and Packaging Deficiencies Fill out and forward SF 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD as prescribed in AR 735 11 2 DLAI 4140 55 SECNAVINST 4355 18A AFJMAN 23 215 c Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR SF 361 Fill out and forward SF 361 Report of Discrepancy ROD as prescribed in D
12. CONNECTION WIRE COLOR FUNCTION DESTINATION 201 __ BLACK _ GND A12W1P1 PIN 1 12 11 _ RED 1 _ At2W1P1 PIN 2 A12FL2 GREEN WHITE ANT TR _A12W1P1 PIN 6 222 12 BLUE WHITE 20dB 1 A12WIP1 PIN 3 12 14__ ORANGE WHITE 208 2__ A12W1P1 PIN 4 A12FL5 GRAY WHITE ALARM A12W1P1 PIN 5 12 16 _ RED 15V PIN2 A12NC NA NA A12W1P1 PIN 7 12 12 1 1 8 as gt CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES t SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY A12W1P1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD W5P2 A12J9 A1237 A12J6 A12J3 A12J1 A12J2 WSP1 A12J8 A12J4 A12J5 CE2F0086 Figure FO 9 78A1A12 Recieve IF Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram FP 27 FP 28 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 aZ WP CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD CONNECTION WIRE COLOR FUNCTION DESTINATION FL D 15V W1P1 PIN 2 FL RED 15V W1P1 PIN2 FL3 YELLOW 15 W1P1 PIN 3 FLS BROWN WHITE GEN LVL DET WiP1 PIN 4 GND W1P1 PIN 1 W2P1 J5 W2P2 J Figure FO 10 78A1
13. DEFLECTION CE2FO295 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORSS WITH 78A1A15 Figure FO 13 78A1A15 CRT Assembly 7005 8644 300 Component Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 FP 39 FP 40 blank e 04 RIO O TM 11 6625 3245 40 CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD Deflection Sub oi E Ir 000 f Ri RED RID 2 x Figure FO 13 78 15 CRT Assembly 7005 8644 300 Component Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 FP 41 FP 42 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 As CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY t ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD A2J2 A2J3 DC IN TEST ADAPTER TEST SET 3 3 DC POWER 4 2 000 CABLE foooY AO AO 2 080 Figure FO 14 78A1A16 Power Supply Assembly Component Locator Diagram FP 43 FP 44 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 A CAUTION
14. 2 162 Remove 83A1A3A1 2 a 2 16 Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel nennen 2 164 Remove 83A1A5 Rear 100 0 2 85 2 169 Repair Parts Bene teeth 2 3 2 5 Replace 78A1A1A1 nnne emend 2 155 Heplace 78A TA2 Bear icai tert tatnen ao 2 13 Replace RI 2 31 2 106 Replace 78A1A4 Analyzer 2 101 Replace 78A1A5 Analyzer 2 10 Replace Receiver daa 2 30 2 105 nz e te NA VARIOS NS 2 28 2 103 Replace 78A1A8A1 2 141 Replace 7 2 DMMI Digital 2 22 ente tette e 2 140 Replace 78A1A8F2 78A1A8F3 and 78 2 139 Replace 78 1 9 90 MHz 2 29 2 104 Replace 78A1A10 1st EO c iere ia hand Reb an dani 2 143 Replace 78A1A TO Wi ee else RR 2 64 2 144 aaa 2 142 Replace 78 2 Receive 545 een
15. Schematic Diagram 22 83A1A5 Rear Panel Replace Procedure 5 Real Panel 2 idad 1 Rear Pae rana 2 ans T mE 83A1A6 Memory Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 32 seem Functional Locator Diagram FO 23 Sheet 1 Replace Procedure eese essen eene nennen nnne nnns 83A1A7 UUT Interface Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 29 Functional DESPON Locator Diagram FO 23 Sheet Replace Procedure O ba 83A1A8 Processor Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 33 Functional Locator Diagram FO 23 Sheet 2 Replace Procedure scott ini 8 1 9 External I O Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 54 Functional Description rca Locator Diagram FO 23 Sheet 2 Replace Procedure iie e ere INDEX 5 TM 11 6625 3245 40 disk ela re Eee FP 67 rt exe 2 164 MEME 2 167 TERR 2 168 A ROT FP 69 DE 2 169 2 170 2 171 TT 2 172 1 65 1 64 ia ri FP 71 TEE 2 176 PET 1 59 1 58 FP 71 2 174 1 67 1 66
16. 98 3H tratt 9e NC Lazo LADO 108 Lazo Lazo 108 LAZO 108 Lazo Lazo 108 Lazo 2 118 rare 118 nose 18012 118 NC Lats AS LA19 12819 Lars 128 LAYS 128 NG 12Bj A AN 128 Lata 138 18 tare 138 198 ins as Lata E taa Nc DARKO 148 ORKA 4B JN nao NC j LAI 158 LA17 LAI 158 NE 158 1188 Lat f 9800 168 NC 0800 468 168 NC 18014 4178 NC 18014 176 NC 478 18014 18084 578 NC DAKS DACKs 188 NC DACKS 198 188 DACKS DACKS 108 NC ROIS 18035 198 18015 18015 198 NC 198 IRQ15 18015 1196 NC 0805 0806 208 NC DROS 208 208 DROS DROS 208 NC 808 808 4218 508 808 218 NC 21B 608 508 21B 508 809 809 22B 809 809 228 NC 228 09 809 22B 809 8010 5010 236 5010 8D50 23B 238 5010 238 8010 rtt 5011 248 6011 8031 248 248 8011 1248 8011 012 268 6012 5012 258 soe 5012 015 8013 268 5013 3013 268 258 8013 125B 5013 MASTER N MASTER 278
17. 0000000000 DUPLEX IN 30 dB 10 W ATTENUATOR SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER CE2F0183 8 Connect external test equipment as shown 2 90 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RF AMPLIFIER Continued Set Signal Generator for 35 MHz signal at 0 dBm with no modulation Press Debug F2 F6 and Key Fl Verify 6 dBm i1 dB at 35 MHz on Spectrum Analyzer Record level Set Spectrum Analyzer to 70 MHz Verify 2nd Harmonic at lt 20 dBc from level in Step 11 on Spectrum Analyzer Press Unkey F2 and Exit F5 Disconnect external test equipment TEST ADAPTER TEST PLUG NAO 10 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press MTRS MODE Key Press AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 External Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 RS 232 Press ENTER Key Set following Fields Operation Mode Host Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Xon Xoff Echo Off Press ESC F6 twice and TERM F5 Connect Serial Interface Cable Assembly Tool Code 10 il Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 between Test Set RS 232 Connector and Test Adapter RS 232 Connector Connect Test Plug Adapter TF 119 Tool Code 23 in Appendix B of TM 11 6625 3245 12 to Test Adapter Press SHIFT T E S
18. 31 Figure FO 20 83A1A2A1 Motherboard Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 SPARE TM 11 6625 3245 40 A h CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ASSEMA V CARRIES SERIES 1 0 9 41 15 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 83A1 CE2FO128 Sl af ws M A Riz 2 us RO RE R46 Bis 2 0 e 5 gt ge Boe m Isla 025088 esl Bs 4 EL R38 ci s HH e in LIS LH ORTS u n I o Ey a cse A Ame LS NE a gf 8 ee 99 a2 en B Y sen a 0 a ES 5 5 7 Bon NOJ 16 i Y Q Q E re 2 I Bam P2 c28 85 025 0 a SU un M y 22 Be Es E n O 4 Lo 7 Ls gt leg 2018 pis sus zB A EN BE e a afl E 8 3 8 Lum 1 C HE H 84 Sa 117 09 g a 8 FRE gt us 2 Br AN O DIT Ts
19. 40 to 158 40 to 70 Relative Humides ai 0 95 sisi ida 0 to 40 000 ft 0 to 12 192 m Meri ec lt 2 09 lt 40 9 TM 11 6625 3245 40 APPENDIX A REFERENCES A 1 SCOPE This appendix lists all forms field manuals technical manuals and miscellaneous publication references in this manual A 2 FORMS Equipment Control Record nennen tnnt nennen Form 2408 9 Product Quality Deficiency enenatis Form SF 368 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Form 2028 Report of Discrepancy Form SF 364 Transportation Discrepancy Report enne Form SF 361 A 3 TECHNICAL MANUALS Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools for Test Set Radio TS 4317 GRM NSN 6625 01 309 2825 EIC 9 6625 3244 24P Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools for Test Adapter J 4843 GRM 114B NSN 6625 01 309 2827
20. ERRE gt ALARM CUR OVERLOAD STATUS 1 4 PWA TEAM TEMP IP RF PWR LVL 2 9 Rae sacr GE2FO106 DECODER 2 RR e ud un DETAIL 7 17 use I Ja 164 E bd R 16 1 3248 9 T 10 84 3248 Er r 54 7 E Bl H i GENERATOR IF POWER TERMINATION DIRECT CONNE S DIRECT CONNECT Figure FO 17 78A1A28 Attenuator Assembly Component Locator and Schematic Diagram FP 55 FP 56 blank 202 16 POWER SUPPLY AF RFGNO AF 15V TCXO PWR STATUS 2ND a a STATUS ISTA a LATCH TSTA a STATUS 1STB a a LATCH 18TB CLOCK 15 DATA ANALOG GND 2 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 78 1 29 LATCH ATTEN BEN LVL DET ALARM POWER MODE PWR TERM TEMP AF PWR LVL Figure FO 18 3 MOTHERBOARO TM 11 6625 3245 40 CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESO CAUTION 17 FP 57 FP 58 blank 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply Assembly Compone
21. Principles of Operation een let Radio Test Set Assembly and Cable Locator Diagram FO 2 Sheet 1 Functional Block Diagram FO 1 sss Interconnect Diagram FO 2 Sheet 4 References dii dose cete di daa He a tidad Repair x etie ada Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR RF Null Adjustment INDEX 7 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 216 2 66 2 195 2 180 2 28 2 206 2 183 2 5 2 216 1 3 FP 3 1 9 2 5 1 2 2 188 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Safety t tte ade 1 3 O ML T EUR 1 1 Scope Adjustment etie t oae Ad 2 201 Self Test Failure e thee e 2 37 Service Upon Receipt of 2 5 Signal Meter 2 188 Sinad Meter Adjustment siini arisera iai ia 2 197 Special Tools TMDE and Support 2 5 Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment aine reta reed tet et d e nei eie 2 203 Symptom NOK 2 6 T Troubleshooting Guidel
22. I Ir A3 Monitor 16 1 B A3P1 RE gt 909 9 400 MHz 300 3KHz KHz J2 J4 ANLZR A4J2 A5J4 A5J2 A6J3 65 A6J4 A6J2 A4 Analyzer Log IF Figure FO 4 78 78A1A 78A1A6 and 781A7 Assemblies Component Locator Diagram A5 Analyzer RF FP 17 FP 18 blank A6 Receiver 16 1 A A6P1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 a CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD Y Oe A7J2 A7J4 A7J3 _ RAE A7 3rd LO 10 1 A A7P1 CE FOC78 TM 11 6625 3245 40 AL CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES J SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE 650
23. 200 DV 11 6625 3245 40 SMCOTHFILTER 1018 n VERTICAL YOKE RETURN HORIZONTAL SYNC IN 5 S PULSES AT A15A104 GATE ATSATTP1 8 200 ID 200 my OY 1 5 DV TYPICAL RIPPLE AT A1541C60 19 TYPICAL RIPPLE 15 1042 HORIZONTAL SYNC AT A15A1UB PIN 1 S NOTER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALLOBCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORMS TAKEN WITH A TEKTRONICS 24304 SCOPE USING A 10 PROBE 2 ALL WAVEFORMS ARE TYPICAL UNDER NORMAL OPERATION 8 ALLWAYEFORMS TAKEN WITH MODULE CONNECTED TO COMPOSITE UNIT AND COMPOSITE UNIT SERVED AS POWER SOURCE 4 VOLTAGE SPINES ON WAVEFORMS 12 AND 19 WERE INDUGED INTO THE BGOPE PROBE BY THE FLYBACK TRANSFORMER CURING MEASUREMENT THIS WILL BE NORMAL 5 PREFIX ALL REFERENGE DESIGNATORS WITH 7841 Figure FO 12 78 1 15 CRT Assembly 7005 7840 600 Component Locator Schematic Diagram Sheet 3 of 3 FP 37 FP 38 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 z AR m 2 amp 2 R DEFLECTION SUR 55 N i 3 DERECTON SOCKET B wh AIRE HARNESS sspw HH 07 4 5
24. 25 ada 2 52 23 RECEIVER SELECTIVITY nenn er naue nixa ence enn eterne eee 2 53 24 AUXILIARY BOX anne nenne a decias 2 53 2 TIME OF DAY CLOCK Replace A19 2 36 NOTE Failure Indications F for Self Tests 3 through 6 do not appear on the Self Test Menu Failures for Self Tests 3 through 6 are catastrophic failures which are detected during the Power Up Beep Sequence 2 37 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 7 VOLTAGE 1 Run Self Test 7 in Extended Mode until failure is detected 2 Locate A26 Monitor Contrdl fig FOJ2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 3 3 10 1 with DMM at A26J2 Pin 47 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 e incorrect perform Steps 3 6 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 3 Remove A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 in Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 4 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 for failed test 5 VOLTS TEST FAILURE A26J2 Pin 18 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 5 Vdc 0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 Vdc 0 5 A26J2 Pin 22 5 Vdc 0 5 15 VOLTS TEST FAILURE A26J2 Pin 18 0 Vdc 0 5
25. MACS RG 2 fa 2 WIG AUDIO 1 zi Ael 1 WIC SWITCH im is la U Lowe Tee AR us FP 47 FP 48 blank epa Coma 78A1A17 Front Panel Assembly Component Locator and Schematic Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 ALTA CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE Ev ELECTROSTATIC DIECHARGE 560 NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES ag REIS ARI fog At IS 17 1 1 C og 4119 A1ZAZI2 D 7 e g JU ALL RESISTORS ARE 1 84 1 TOLERANCE ALL RESISTANCE 6 EXPRESSED IN OHMS ALL CAPACITANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MIGROFARADS ALLINDUGTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MICROHENRYS D SWITCHES ARE NUMBERED IN THE FOLLOWING MANNER 51118 CONNECTED TO KEY ROW 1 AND KEY COLUMN 1 51215 CONNECTED TO KEY ROW 1 AND KEY COLUMN 2 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 7841 TM 11 6625 3245 40 a Ganj B a 8 rl hd do i ES 5
26. EN sc amena E eros ES AZS MONITOR ONTROL 2 Es Ao tac 34 NETHID EFEAKERGRD 15A an Lu a oe Ex 424 FUNCTION GEN 130 E7 COMA 164 FRONT PANEL 2 HE E 225 VO e u es MY a 28 GENERATOR E DIGITAL I ROUTED ANALOG SV 7A E12 ESB EMOD 28 2 PA SHUTDOWN 2 FH MEA mao 8 asta A mem fas A20 MEMORY 5 Wc ra in nr am Arme A19 PROCESSOR os 63 DS EIE E 7 F3 A21 VIDEO CONTROL HIY Esc REIP E12 meno ak wow EAE APT EXTERNAL VO ame N 8 Eis a joo ES Hs mx en Ada urate S po IJ uses mja NAT BUS SPARE sus IN Accu fe acon ce AI 7 J 4 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 7841 EN E enon S SA ir xa codi N toa mem E fron man le HEY COLUMN 2 AT FRONT PANEL SCOPE
27. 0 ETA 2 cy 0 A 0 FP 58 0 C2 0 0 Index 1 through Index 8 0 FP 60 blank 0 Aet 0 gud mee ee 0 FP 2 blank cesse 0 FP 62 0 0 63 m 0 FP 4 0 FP 64 0 0 P565 cia 0 6 0 FP 66 0 0 xy EN 0 FP 8 0 FP 68 0 du m 0 xg ER 0 FP 10 0 FP 70 2 22 2 0 ara ee 0 gram 0 FP 12 2 0 FP 72 01 0 dum 0 gar 0 FP 74 esses 0 Zero in this column indicates an original page B Change2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TECHNICAL MANUAL HEADQUARTERS NO 11 6625 3245 40 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON D C 05 April 1994 GROUND SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR RADIO TEST SET AN GRM 114B NSN 6625 01 309 2824 KN2 REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way
28. 2 66 2 146 Replace 78A1A12W1 inicie 2 147 Replace Generator IF rn oe treat 2 148 Replace 78AIAT5AA2E eene dee epi peint ea een Replace 78A1A15V1 7005 7840 600 Replace 78A1A15V1 7005 8644 300 2 124 2 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Para Page Replace Wilco ae ee anne 2 120 Replace 78A TAT JTA 78ATATZJITB osito a ANAE d ERE sh 2 129 Replace 78 1 17 2 78 1 1790 2 51 2 130 Replace 7 8 A1A JB nid ia 2 132 Replace 7BAIAT 7 2 13 Replace 78 19 ProGeSson 2 111 Replace 78A1A20 Memo comino ER 2 35 2 110 Replace 78AIA21 Video Controller sse enne entente nnns 2 112 Replace 2 2 nadan 2 109 Replace 78A TA29 Counter een en nennen a 2 100 Replace 78A1A24 Function 2 33 2 108 Replace 78 1 25 Di a dc 2 99 Replace 78A1A26 Monitor Control nennen trennen nnne rre 2 10 Replace 78A1A27 qst I 2 38 2 113 Replace 78A1A28 2 70 2 150
29. Reh B 11 R ES TOP VIEW A3A1 Preamp PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 8341 11 6625 3245 40 A Ww CAUTION BOTTOM VIEW 2 Amplifier Figure FO 21 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Assembly Component Locator and Schematic Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 FP 65 FP 66 blank CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESO CE2F0109 2 109 avs E u E INPUT FROM GEN Po DRAIN CURRENT am uw
30. DATA TO DMM SERIAL TO PARALLEL RELAY DRIVER A8J3 FRONT PANEL VOLTAGE RANGE SELECT FRONT PANEL VOLTS RMS TODC OHMS CONVERTER A8J1 FRONT PANEL SELECT CONTROL CURRENT SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTER RANGE SELECT V OHMS AMPS SELECT AC DC SELECT OHMS TO VOLTAGE CONVERTER CONTROL ASW2P1 MOTHERBOARD PARALLEL TO SERIAL DATA CONVERTER FROM DMM 1V 1 REF SELECT VOLTS OHMS SELECT OHMS 31 2 OHMS DIGIT SELECT A D CE2FO219 Figure 1 28 A8 DMM Functional Block Diagram 1 57 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 27 ab 83A1A7 UUT Interface fig 1 29 The A7 UUT Interface provides the interface between the Test Set and the UUT The Digital section interfaces Address Data and Control signals from the A8 Processor to each individual test section Each test section is designed to perform a specific test for a specific radio module or LRU The Digital Section also provides control data to the A3 RF Amplifier 1 58 A7J2 UUT CONNECTOR AUDIO FILL CONTROL 724 UUT CONNECTOR TO DMM AUDIO DATA GNDTST POWER Ad SYSTEM MOTHERBOARD ADDRESS gt A7J3 UT DIGITAL SECTION COMSEC RETRANSMIT A7J5 CNTLMON PA AND RF AMPLIFIER D AI FRONT PANEL MUXDEMUX KO Figure 1 29 A7 UUT Interface Functional Block Diagram 1 59 TM 11 6
31. nenn DATA TO DUM ae 24 Eon A20 MEMORY TAN E Zh por 2 M19 PROCESSOR ATARI Eo A wa x Ex E aller UM Me mmn d DOLUS ay dian aio Date sv O 22 AW go FEL Diem eh gom m u Dia ab 27 EXTERNAI nes au Aa den ms m PEL quon asm ROURE E MAGOS Hi NAT BUS SPARE gt por s m 4 peed Er En ALL PINS ARE COMMON TO THESE CONNECTORS md A ne momo ahn amoan welt DIGITAL BOURCE 2 12 PIN 5 CONNECTED TO ALL OTHER i Fed Y x 2 amade PRIA EEN ti PINS 1A EXCEPTIONS ARE LISTED IN FLAG NOTE 3 E Paten P E EIE Perg ie E gt Diarra sv SUPPLY 6 OIVIDED INTO z SEPERATE LINES COLUNAS Ei ANALOG m p re ns Ed E fu So E DISTAL 2 A EE ES 2 4 sans A ES EN pim Ec Ip tcr En DIGITAL SY IS ROUTED E pe ges Em 25 DIGITIZER m ATETESTO Rd su 12 E A23 COUNTER e Ww A EE d EEI
32. Step 5 15 3 A22P2 Pin 3C 5 0 5 Step 6 15 4 A22P2 Pin 12C 5 0 5 Step 7 15 5 A22P2 Pin 14C lt 0 4 Step 8 e f correct replace 22 RF I O para 2 34 4 Disconnect W20 fig 2 Sheet 2 of 5 A9 90 MHz Generator fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Fre quency Counter to W20 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 1 MHz 0 5 Hz e If incorrect perform Step 9 If correct replace A9 90 MHz 2 29 5 Disconnect W1H fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A10 1st LO FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Frequency Counter to W14 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 10 MHz 5 Hz e If incorrect perform Step 9 e If correct replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 6 Disconnect W16 fig FOJ2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A10 1st LO FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Frequency Counter to W15 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 10 MHz 5 Hz e f incorrect perform Step 9 e f correct replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 2 45 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 15 PHASELOCK LOOPS Continued 7 Disconnect W1B fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A7 3rd LO FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Frequency Counter to W19 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 1 MHz 0 5 Hz e If incorrect perform Step 9 e f correct replace A7 3rd LO 2 28 Disconnect W18 fig Sheet 2 of 5 from A5 Analyzer RF 2 S
33. 1 ws wies wie nective wort x Q GJO Q gt Omar Q wi i wor wo mas Oh i S 1 wap wor i wo a E o wap E 5 h 5 ware X wi s ADA 2 3 8 Xr om ATTENUATOR POWER TERMINATION GENERATOR A ARE Qua 5 wm T 1 1 Sw wiapz vas qa 3 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY MAIWP naO 5 1 FRONT PANEL gt Y me a m Q 1 8 5 2302 Mn u Am 9 Ol 1 6 N o El 5 COUNTER ANALYZER LOG F Eos E MTS 1 B lame MANS maa d mana p 5 E ANALYZER RF w we wa o wipe 7 P A OS 7 7 wg mQ Mo ves E 5 Ea y E T E WIPT wieP2 ml me NE oh 5 ABM ANS APB
34. SINAD B e ER A17A6 a AUDIO OUT ie aa lt A17A7 e DEMOD OUT du aw dcc A178 MIC ACC MIC ACC CONNECTOR SIGNALS n a p A17J2A DUPLEX OUT POWER TERMINATION RECEIVE IF A17W2P1 ze MOTHERBOARD SCOPE 1 COMM A17J1A ANTENNA IN A17J8 SCOPE IN CE2FO160 POWER ON LED POWER APPLIED ON _ INDICATOR x 244 POWER SWITCH APPLIED INDICATOR SCROLL N SPINNER INTENSITY INT TOP POT FUNCTION KEYBOARD A17A2A1 FUNCTION KEYBOARD SPEAKER SPEAKER RETURN A17A2 KEYBOARD Figure 1 11 A17 Front Panel Functional Block Diagram 1 23 7 MOTHERBOARD TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 10 78A1A14 Power Termination fig 1 12 The primary purpose of the A14 Power Termination is to isolate the signal coming into the T R Connector W2J1 from the rest of the TEST SET Additionally the A14 Power Termination is used to pass the RF Signal from the A28 Attenuator out through either the T R Connector W2J1 or the DUPLEX OUT Connector A17J2A Switching between the DUPLEX OUT Connector A17J2A and the T R Connector W2J1 for Duplex Operation is performed in the A14 Power Termination If the T R Connector W2J1 is selected for input then the signal is processed by the A14 Power Termination before being passed to the A12 Receive IF T
35. T y a 1 rem cpm Ly zu J E gt ED GE2F0027 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK 2 109 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 35 REPLACE 78 20 MEMORY DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Case para 2 22 REMOVE Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A20 Memory 1 INSTALL Install 78A1A20 Memory 1 in guides and close card ejectors 80 L PS ASE Tei Q 2 28 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Upload Interface Software Procedure para 2 94 Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78 2 Top 2 22 END OF TASK 2 110 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 36 REPLACE 78A1A19 PROCESSOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A19 Processor 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A19 Processor 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 m MINE E CE2FO029 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK 2 111 2 37 REPLACE 78A1A21 VIDEO CONTROLLER
36. 0 FP 28 0 exui M DUE 0 FP 30 0 EP diia 0 FP 32 0 0 FP 34 0 5 0 FP 36 0 ele 0 FP 38 0 522 ee a 0 40 424 4 2 2 2 0 0 FP 42 0 0 FP 44 0 0 FP 46 0 EM 0 FP 48 0 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 161 through 2 185 0 ebrei et 0 2 186 and 2 187 1 FP 50 0 2 188 through 2 190 0 0 DIN 1 52 blank t 0 2 192 through 2 201 0 Frodo 0 1 FP 54 0 2 203 through 2 216 0 A E 0 1 and 2 2 FP 56
37. 2 1 Section Repair Parts Special Tools TMDE and Support l Service Upon Receipt eee I Troubleshooting V Preparation for Storage or REFERENCES ec EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS MONITOR MONITOR CONTROL EXTENDED RIBBON CABLE C 1 INDEX clio r de INDEX 1 ii Change 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This manual tells you about the Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B and contains instructions on how to test and maintain it When the Radio Test Set is first received start at the front of the manual and go all the way through to the back Become familiar with every part of the manual and the Radio Test Set Change 2 iii TM 11 6625 3245 40 CE2FO130 Figure 1 1 Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B 1 0 Consolidated Army Publications and Forms Index TM 11 6625 3245 40 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Detailed Functional Description Equipment Data coito nina 1 3 Equipment Description iia ae 1 3 General Functional Maintenance Forms Records and
38. BLUE i gi 1 Pa BLUE E KH s i ay 1 SYNG INVERTER ro COLOR ELANKING Wow VERTICAL DEFLECTION CONTROLLER g 1 qid ST go sia 7 1 T II ETT EA pn d CAUTION o 1 p v CONTAINS PARTS ANO ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE UY se ap 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD m ba 7 ces imme E worm P ox UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIGO POWER FILTERS 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ABSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES L inl A 6 Was og A1 IS ANBAR 0 9 R1 IS A15A2R1 2 ALL AESISTORS ARE 1 4W 8 TOLERANCE ALL RESISTANCE 18 EXPRESSED IN OHMS secet y 4 ALLCAPAGITANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MOROFARADS uL TU TE 00 0 1 14 77 m 5 ALLINDUCTANCE 16 EXPRESSED IN MOROHENRYS DAMAGE COMPONENTS WILL RESULT IF SPRING WIRE IS NOT CONNECTED AYSEZ l on 7 SETTING BRIGHTNESS CONTROL A15A2R29 WILL ALTER CATHODE Rav TUBE ION VOLTAGE UNE SET FOR 17 4 a p A son mi aca 8 MUL VOLTAGES TAKEN WTH UL AND 7 mw f an 1 dic i pm No DEGAUSS nn Aaa Ta PEA FAK Pz qu Ys iw BIO D THIS SYMBOL CORREL
39. adio 8 90 MHz GENERATOR E i WISP wi4P ATUS 11 2nd LO AH AUS wWi7Pl wort Wi9Pi w20P1 ug AB RECEIVER MOTHERBOARD wier2 on man wen Qna a us 5 jw E 2 a Amd Mert Gi Gi BES Q Q Y w2 wa XA a m6 420 E JONITOR MONITOR CONTROL FUNCTION GENERATOR REO MEMORY PROCESSOR VIDEO CONTROLLER EXTERNAL VO AM 72 en AIC jon s i isis har MAD juae MATO MATIS lense Figure 2 Radio Test Set 78 1 and 83A1 Assembly and Cable Locator Interconnect Diagram Sheet 4 of 5 FP 9 FP 10 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 622 A16 POWER SUPPLY Ala x wart 4 3 5 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR 8 ss CE2FO117 TD x A4J4 gt 2 6 gt E DAA MOHO A4J9B OO W2Pi U A4 FRONT PANEL A410 W3P1 PAWS AW w1P1 25 2 6
40. enne nnne inten nnns 9 6625 3246 24P Operator s and unit maintenance manual for Radio Test Set AN GRM 114 NSN 6625 01 309 2824 EIC 11 6625 3245 12 Procedures for Destruction of Electronics Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use Electronics Command sees TM 750 244 2 A 4 TECHNICAL BULLETINS Interactive Electronic Technical Manual IETM for Calibration and Repair Requirements for the Maintenance of Army TB 43 180 Safety Requirements for Maintenance of Electrical and Electronic Equipment riii imperii eine un TB 385 4 Change2 A 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 APPENDIX A REFERENCES Continued A 5 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS Common Table of Allowance Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items CTA 50 970 Consolidated Army Publications and Forms DA Pam 25 30 ESTA Mi ia dts 4 25 11 Reporting of Supply 735 11 2 The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Abbreviations and ASME 14 38 The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Users DA Pam 750 8 A 2 Cha
41. 1 54 MEER FP 53 dicto dae estt cine Peers EI 2 113 1 49 1 48 AO FP 55 a 2 150 55 2 97 2 98 2 96 HERD 2 159 83A1A2A1 Motherboard Locator Diagram FO 20 Sheet 1 sse Replace Procedure eese nennen nnne nnne nns Schematic Diagram FO 20 Sheet 2 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure uit ee aset do tip auto a Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 30 Functional Description nennen nennen nnns Locator Diagram FO 21 Sheet 1 Replace Procedure RF Amplifier ee 2 Amplifler ee een rei ertet nern nn Schematic Diagram FO 21 2 Troubleshooting Fest ic 83A1A4 Front Panel Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 Functional Description nennen nnnm nnns Locator Diagram FO 22 rra Replace Procedure 83A 1A4 Front Panel nr ae ette eret certe eed 83A1A4A1 UUT Connector 83A1A4A2 Audio 8 1 4 1 8 8 1 4 9 8 1 4 9
42. 2 Frequency Level Accuracy eene 2 14 17 GEN 2 Distortion Threshold 2 14 18 External Modulation 2 15 19 MIC ACC IN OUT Connector Modulation nns 2 15 20 RE GEN Eevel Rl tness Falllfe iia arena arena 2 15 21 GEN Frequency Accuracy 2 17 22 Level Accuracy 2 18 23 RF GEN Residual FM 2 19 24 jBF GEN AM Eailute oia Rai ren eas ae Rage ER 2 19 25 occitano lara 2 20 26 RF GEN Harmonic Non Harmonic Level 2 21 27 Frequency Frequency Error Meter 2 21 ceri HM EE 2 22 29 Receiver Sensitivity irent rp ea ec toda ttt el edge cer reds 2 22 30 Receiver Selectivity beet tet p tet En n rn Ee a dte P E Et eec nuda 2 22 31 ANTENNA IN or DUPLEX OUT Connector Overload Protection 2 23 32 BER Meter Fall te 5 KEA
43. RF AMPLIFIER w4 RAW3PT A7J3 AawaP ATJ W3P2 A7J4 E E A7 55 53 UUT INTERFACE A735 wap2 2 2 1 g MOTHERBOARD lt 9 Een L d x H lt AS 5 x MEMORY 8 3 9 EXTERNAL 1 0 AB PROCESSOR E M 5 REAR PANEL Figure FO 2 Radio Test Set 78A1 and 83A1 Assembly and Cable Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 5 of 5 FP 11 FP 12 blank 11 6625 3245 40 CE2FO118 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A 3 CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD 1 xn xi2 X14 x16 xi7 x18 x19 x21 5 W2P1 E EE ge Ex 1 38 1 a 2 o 7 o waP2 a wap wert o WIR 5 7 n e s 4 or cexowr
44. Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 7 coaxial cable connectors 1 2 Disconnect wire cable connector 2 3 Loosen 4 captive screws 3 4 Remove 78A1A12 Receive IF 4 INSTALL Install 78A1A12 Receive IF 4 Tighten 4 captive screws 3 Reconnect wire cable connector 2 Reconnect 7 coaxial cable connectors 1 PAE 2 EE SH CE2F0045 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 146 2 67 REPLACE 78A1A12W1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A10 Receive IFl para 2 66 REMOVE Unsolder 5 wires from 5 feedthrus 1 Unsolder wire from ground lug 2 Remove screw 3 Remove 78A1A10W1 4 INSTALL Install 78A1A10W1 4 Install screw 3 Solder wire to ground lug 2 Solder 5 wires to 5 feedthrus 1 REONT FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 73A1A12 Receive IF 2 66 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 147 A 2 gt gt CE2FO136 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 68 REPLACE 78A1A13 GENERATOR IF DESCRIPTION This pro
45. 11 6625 3245 40 TECHNICAL MANUAL GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL RADIO TEST SET AN GRM 114B NSN 6625 01 309 2824 EIC 2 WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App 2401 et seq Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230 25 DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT Distribution authorized to Department of Defense and DoD contractors only to protect critical technical data on systems or hardware This determination was made Oct 1986 Other requests shall be referred to Program Manager TMDE ATTN SFAE CS FT T TEMOD Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE PAGE 2 66 INDEX PAGE INDEX HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 5 APRIL 1994 TM 11 6625 3245 40 SAFETY STEPS TO FOLLOW IF SOMEONE IS THE VICTIM OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT TRY TO PULL OR GRAB THE INDIVIDUAL IF POSSIBLE TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER IF YOU CANNOT TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER PULL PUSH OR LIFT THE PERSON TO SAFETY USING A DRY WOODEN POLE OR A
46. Clicker 1 5000 300 Ousidiv Press F1 Disconnect external test equipment 2 93 2 20 FREQUENCY AGILITY TEST Continued 18 Connect external test equipment as shown ANTENNA IN TM 11 5826 313 13 SIGNAL GENERATOR DO 0000 ofo oo 0 0000 O 0000000 0000000 0000000 00 es 0 MIC ACC DEMOD OUT MIC ACC TEST CABLE OSCILLOSCOPE 19 Set Signal Generator for 30 000 MHz signal at 30 dBm with 4 kHz deviation and 1 kHz tone 20 Set Oscilloscope controls Channel 1 Vertical Scale 5 V Div Channel 2 Vertical Scale 5 V Div Horizontal Sweep 2 ms Div Trigger Channel 2 Trigger Type Normal Trigger Slope Negative Trigger Coupling AC Channel 1 Coupling DC Channel 2 Coupling DC Bandwidth 20 MHz 21 Press RF GEN MODE Key and SETUP Key 22 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 RF Gen Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys 23 25 26 27 to move cursor to 1 RF Gen Freq Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 87 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 RF Gen Level Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 30 dBm Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 Press REC VR MODE Key and SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Set Rcvr Freq Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 30 MHz Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5
47. Feromg pgoaoopbBbpbp BadoeaaoaoaaagaBgaaaad gas 2 Melsat u Eo um Kom Jam Ju Jrs Low Jun Je a a Ceecaaaooaaoaggagoogogoaagooguaumuumuadgooadgauss Deere cae erre reee eel A8 Processor s comaaaogongoaanooonaaooooanggaoapnoggagwx A9 External I O Figure FO 23 83A1A6 83A1A7 83A1A8 and 83A1A9 PC Board Assemblies Component Locator Diagrams Sheet 2 of 2 FP 73 FP 74 blank By Order ol ihe Secretary of the Army Official REN ma H HAMILTON Administrative Assistant to tha Secretary af the Army 05553 Distribution GORDON SULLIVAN General United States Army Chief of Staff To distributed in accordance with DA Form 12 32 E Block 3318 requirements for 11 6525 3245 40 1 5 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1994 533 22 80195 These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028 The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028 The subject line must be exactly the same and all fields must be included however only the following fields are mandatory 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 15 16 17 and 27 From Whomever lt whomever wherever army mil gt To 2028 redstone army mil Subject DA Form 2028 From Joe Smith Unit home Address 4300 Park City Hometown St MO Zip 77777 Date Sent 19 OCT 93 Pub no 55 2840 229 23 Pub Title TM
48. If correct replace 1 7A2 Keyboardl para 2 55 Step 5 Disconnect power source from Test Set Locate A17 Front Panel fig FOJ2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 100 resistance with DMM between A17A2A1E1 Pin 13 fig FO 15 Sheet 1 of 2 and Chassis Ground when POWER Switch is pressed e f incorrect replace A17A2 Keyboard para 2 55 e If correct replace A16 Power Supply para 2 48 2 9 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION 6 TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION Fan does not work Check Fan for obstructions If obstructions are present remove obstructions If obstructions are not present replace A16 Power Supply para 2 48 Beep Sequence does not occur Verify Logo Screen is displayed on CRT e f incorrect perform Beep Sequence Test para 2 1 1 If correct perform Malfunction 11 Speaker Inoperable Blows Fuses Step 1 Fuse blows when Radio Test Set is connected to external power source e Replace A16 Power Supply 2 48 Step 2 Fuse blows when POWER Switch is pressed Perform Power Faults Test para 2 10 CRT is blank or display ganarmally exists Perform CRT Abnormality Test para 2 12 7 Replace faulty assembly INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment Inoperable Step 1 Rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully ccw Step2 Locate A1A1WP fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify resistance changes from approximately 10 to _ lt 1 with DMM bet
49. MASTER 278 NC in Nc E S014 A 288 S014 5014 288 NC H 5015 8015 308 5015 5015 308 3 308 5015 318 ATETESTO AYETESTD 318 ATE TESTO ATE TESTO NC ______82 328 ATETESTB ATE TEST 328 ATE TESTS 32B ATE TESTB 10 CHCLK UOCHCLK 1 NC 1 NC VOTHTIR 10 NC l 7 N 07 26 1607 20 807 IO 807 807 507 26 507 506 506 30 1506 806 506 606 806 505 30 506 GO os 46 805 505 c sos 805 305 ac 505 304 sc spa 504 sc A 804 804 sc 504 Esos 308 sc 5 3 sos sc aps 603 803 803 502 602 802 802 502 802 502 802 76 502 Esos 01 sor 501 se ES ec 501 1 600 300 500 500 500 800 00 600 9 800 H AN OGRRDY 100 Ne TORY VOCHRDY VO CHRDY NC VOCHROY TOTHROY 100 NC MR AEN ri I AER AEN E sata 120 ac sais 120 sms SR NC eL 8 18 130 NC SAIS 130 130 5418 130 NC 8417 140 NC SA17 140 SA17 NC 140 c 5417 NC pr 5415 4150 816 SAIS 150 j SAt6 152 8 16 8 16 350 SAIS sats S N 15 160 8815 sats
50. Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment Digital Multimeter Adjustment Power Meter Adjustment 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Adjustment 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Adjustment 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment para 2 116 WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with covers removed CAUTION Do not disconnect or remove any board assemblies in Radio Test Set unless instrument is unplugged NOTE The adjustments required after repair replacement of specific assemblies are shown in Table 2 2 Do not adjust components unless instructed to do so in the procedures All indications and waveforms are referenced to chassis ground unless otherwise noted If internal cal factors change when performing the Radio Test Set Adjustment Procedure a Backup Data Submenu appears A key sequence reply Y Yes N No must be initiated in order to proceed with the procedure 2 179 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 2 Post Repair Replace Adjustments REPAIRED REPLACED ASSEMBLIES 78A1G1 ADJUSTMENT Gen Output Level para 2100 RF Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment 2105 Phase Meter Adjustment Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment para 2 108 Gen Modulation Adjustment 2 109 Scope Adjustment para 2 110 Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment para 2 111 Power Meter Adjustment para 2 113 78A1A1A1 Motherboard 78A1A
51. FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 7842 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK CE2FO025 2 107 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 33 REPLACE 78A1A24 FUNCTION GENERATOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top Case 2 22 REMOVE Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A24 Function Generator 1 INSTALL Install 78A1A24 Function Generator 1 in guides and close card ejectors Al a i 27 9 Es Eum EEE CE2FO026 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK 2 108 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 34 REPLACE 78A1A22 I O DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Casel para 2 22 REMOVE Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A22 RF I O 1 INSTALL Install 78A1A22 RF I O 1 in guides and close card ejectors
52. JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0710103 Distribution To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 323318 requirements for TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 09419A 40 2 C1 Change DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY AND HEADQUARTERS MARINE CORPS No 1 Washington DC 1 August 1996 General Support Maintenance Manual For RADIO TEST SET AN GRM 1 14B NSN 6625 01 309 2824 EIC KN2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 09419A 40 1 dated 5 April 1994 is changed as follows 1 Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the illustration identification number or by a miniature pointing hand Remove Pages Insert Pages 2 21 and 2 22 and 2 22 2 63 through 2 70 2 63 througH 2 70 2 73 through 2 76 2 73 througH 2 76 2 83 and 2 84 and 2 84 2 91 and 2 92 2 92 and 2 92 2 113 and 2 114 2 113 and 2 114 2 117 and 2 118 2 117 and 2 118 2 159 and 2 160 2 159 and 2 160 2 185 through 2 188 2 185 through 2 188 2 191 and 2 192 2 191 and 2 192 2 201 and 2 202 and 2 202 FP 29 FP 30 blank FP 29 FP 30 blank 2 File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes Distribution authorized to US Government agencies and their contractors for official use or for administrative or
53. Location Key Location Key A23P2 Pins 14B and 9C F1 A23P2 Pins 14B and 14C 8 A23P2 Pins 12B and 9C F3 A23P2 Pins 12B and 14C 2 A23P2 Pins 10B and 9C F5 A23P2 Pins 10B and 14C CE A23P2 Pins 14B and 10C RF GEN A23P2 Pins 14B and 15C 9 A23P2 Pins 12B and 10C DPLX 3 A23P2 Pins 11B and 10C A23 P2 Pins 1 1 B and 15C A23P2 Pins 10B and 10 SCOPE ANLZ A23P2 Pins 10B and 15C T SQLCH A23P2 Pins 9B and 10C MTRS A23P2 Pins 9B and 15C SQLCH A23P2 Pins 14B and 11C AUTO A23P2 Pins 14B and 16C 2 2 Pins 13B and 1 1C SGL STEP A23P2 Pins 13B and 16C A23P2 Pins 12B and 11C GO A23P2 Pins 12B and 16C K m A23P2 Pins 11B and 11C STOP A23P2 Pins 11B and 16C ENTER A23P2 Pins 10B 11C PRINT SCRN A23P2 Pins 10B and 16C T VOL A23P2 Pins 9B and 11C HOLD SCRN A23P2 Pins 9B and 16C 1 VOL A23P2 Pins 11B 12C A23P2 Pins 16 15 FIELD SELECT A23P2 Pins 10B 12C gt FIELD SELECT A23P2 Pins 9B and 12 DATA SCROLL A23P2 Pins 14B and 13C lt DATA SCROLL A23P2 Pins 13B and 13C lt FIELD SELECT 2 2 Pins 12B and 13C J FIELD SELECT A23P2 Pins 11B and 13C A23P2 Pins 10B and 13C J DATA SCROLL DATA SCROLL A23P2 Pins 9B and 13C SETUP A23P2 Pins 15C and 15B STORE A23P2 Pins 14C and 15B 7 A23P2 Pins 13C and 15B 4 A23P2 Pins
54. Press SETUP Key AUX F6 and S R Fl 2 94 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 20 FREQUENCY AGILITY TEST Continued 28 Select Channel 2 only for Oscilloscope Display Adjust trigger level until Oscilloscope is triggered by clock pulse 29 Set Oscilloscope to view both Channel 1 and 2 as shown CH V ce LETTRE N m ane ps 1 TRIGGER lt 1 5ms DEMODULATED SIGNAL lt 2 MINOR DIVISIONS 30 Verify demodulated signal level varies lt i2 Minor Divisions within 1 5 ms of trigger 31 F1 32 Disconnect external test equipment 2 95 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 21 REMOVE 83A1 TEST ADAPTER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with case assemblies removed CAUTION Do not disconnect or remove any assemblies in Radio Test Set unless instrument 1 unplugged PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Perform required Adjustments para 2 95 REMOVE Disconnect do power cable 1 and SCSI cable 2 Remove 4 screws 3 Slide 83A1A5 Rear Panel 4 to rear and remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 5 Remove 4 screws 4 lock washers and 4 flat washers 6 Remove 83A1 Test Adapter 7 PON INSTALL Install 83A1 Test Adapter 7 Install 4 screws 4 lock washers and 4 flat washers 6 Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case 5 and slide 83A1A5 Rear Panel 4 to front Install 4 screws 3 Reconnect SCSI cable 2 and do power
55. Reconnect W12 Disconnect fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W1 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 4 dBm e incorrect replace All 2nd LO 2 62 e If correct replace A13 Generator IF para 2 68 17 ANALYZER LEVEL 1 4 10 11 12 Disconnect W4 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A12 Receive IF 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Spectrum Analyzer to W4 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Spectrum Analyzer Frequency to 10 MHz Run Self Test 17 in Extended Mode and verify level is 20 dBm 3 dB e f incorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 Reconnect W4 Disconnect W9 from A5 Analyzer fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Spectrum Analyzer to W9 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 37 dBm i10 dB RF Power and Frequency for failed test 10 MHz 90 MHz 45 Hz 64 MHz 90 MHz 45 Hz 578 MHz 88 0001 MHz x45 Hz 918 MHz 89 9875 MHz 45 Hz If any frequency is incorrect perform Step 17 Reconnect W9 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Analyzer Operation Screen Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Scan Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 0 kHz
56. Section II for this information 1 9 EQUIPMENT DATA Refer td TM 11 6625 3245 14 Chapter Section II for this information 1 10 SAFETY CARE AND HANDLING Observe all WARNINGS CAUTIONS and NOTES in this manual This equipment can be extremely dangerous if these instructions are not followed SECTION PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 1 11 GENERAL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Refer tc TM 11 6625 3245 12 Chapter Section for this information 1 12 DETAILED FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The Radio Test Set Functional Block Diagram fig FO 1 shows the relationship of all assemblies The following is a detailed description of the Radio Test Set assemblies 1 3 TM 11 6625 3245 40 1 78A1A16 Power Supply fig 1 2 When ac power is applied it is passed to the PWR APPLIED CIRCUIT where It is regulated to form the PWR APPLIED LED Signal to activate the POWER APPLIED Indicator When dc power is applied it is passed to the 15 V REG Regulator The 15 V Regulator provides 15 V to the PWR APPLIED CIRCUIT to generate the POWER APPLIED LED Signal to activate the POWER APPLIED Indicator Once the POWER Switch is pressed the PWR ON SW Signal is sent to the PWR ON CIRCUIT This Circuit activates the POWER ON LED Signal to illuminate the POWER ON Indicator If ac power is used the POWER ON CIRCUIT also passes a signal to the RELAY DRIVER to activate the RELAY DRIVER closing the AC IN RELAY The ac voltage is passed to the LINE RECTIFIE
57. Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 2 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 32 Press ENTER Key Press MTRS MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 SINAD Meter Press ENTER Key 2 197 2 108 2 109 TM 11 6625 3245 40 SINAD METER ADJUSTMENT Continued Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Readout Res Press ENTER Key to select 1 dB Press Ret F5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPUT Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select SINAD BER Press ENTER Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 Filter Select Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 4 000 kHz Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 Verify SINAD reading is within 11 dB Digit of Distortion Analyzer If out of tolerance perform Steps 14 18 If in tolerance perform Step 18 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 6 SINAD Meter Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Distortion Analyzer Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment GEN MODULATION ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the RF Generator modulation levels gt Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Set Measuring Receiver Measurement to Low Pass Fi
58. WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App 2401 et seq Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230 25 DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D Distribution authorized to Department of Defense and DoD contractors only to protect critical technical data on systems or hardware This determination was made Oct 1986 Other requests shall be referred to Program Manager TMDE ATTN SFAE CS FT T TEMOD Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document TM 11 6625 3245 40 dated 5 April 1994 is changed as follows 1 Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page Remove Pages Insert Pages A through D None i ii blank iii and 1 0 1 1 and 1 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 2 5 and 2 6 2 5 2 6 A 1 A 2 blank and 2 B 1 and B 2 2 DA Forms 2028 2 DA Forms 2028 Cover Cover 2 File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes By Order of the Secretary of the Army GEORGE W CASEY JR General United States Army Official Chief of Staff 2
59. in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 6 Verify 5 0 0 5 with DMM at A26J2 Pin 23 Sheet 3 of 3 e If incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 e correct replace Monitor para 2 31 7 Remove 9 90 MHz Generatof para 2 29 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 9 in Appendix Blof TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set 8 Verify 0 8 VAC 0 04 with DMM at A9P1 Pin 1A fig FO 6 e If incorrect replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 9 Disconnect W1B fig FOJ2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A9 90 MHz Generator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Signal Generator to W13 fig 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Signal Generator for 90 MHz at 25 dBm with 30 AM 10 Verify 2 5 1 with DMM at A9P1 Pin 2B FO 6 lf incorrect replace A13 Generator IF 2 68 e f correct replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 19 SYNTHESIZER RESPONSE NOTE Failures for Self Test 19 are detected as multiple failures Failures for Self Test 19 are indicated and cleared on previous Self Test procedures 20 RF COUNTER 1 Disconnect W24 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A23 Counter FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Frequency Counter to W24 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 2 Run Self Test 20 and verify 425 kHz 50 Hz e If incorrect replace Receiverl para 2 30 e If correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 2 50 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14
60. ue TER BU EA puerta 24 HOETONE DISABLE B eg REIS MAIRI 18 CIPHER TEXT SEL Ga 25 TEXT SEL 1 SPARE SPARE 88 SAE TA MAZ 0 9 R1 IS MAZAI 2 MUX OVRD pogre 26 2 ALL RESISTORS 1 8W 5 TOLERANCE p SPARE 3 ALLRESISTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN OHMS A1 UUT CONNECTOR T E ial h7 ap 4 CAPACITANCE IS EXPRESSED IN SNAP OUTPUT i PRIM BATTSENSEA FAM sar sens MICROFARADS FULT KF ELS 2WIREVO 2 Le 33 2MRE vo 2 8 ALLINDUCTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN TELS ila i i Bod 2 io rinm MICRCHENRYS 8 M7 A2 AUDIO CONNECTOR S 6 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS AL R2 CM OUTPUT ME 37 CM IN WITH 8341 18 dci Is 1 bul RTN 15 40 ZNAE UO RTN 41 ZARE VO ro RTN lU 3g En 10 10 CONNECTOR SPARE pa 4a SPARE x a TWGATE 4 ete 4 TWGATE 1 E SPARE 7 45 SPARE Ig SPARE PB 48 ware Rs GND WS 48 OND 10 10 GND PS 50 GND mae 5 T TH DATA E c i tj DR Ja gt nc 7 413VDC IN P2 2 13 DCIN d i stivocour PWR RTN 4 PWA RAT PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH
61. 0s S sa hc OWS NC ows 088 _ DRY RESETDRV 2 RESET RESET DAV RESET DRY 2A RESET DAY NC ey Jj NC ria MENW 4 NC A MENA m 058 NG 4 ORD 44A 086 NG 4 N 18A DACKS DROS 16A DROS NG TTA 17A 4 ORAI 18A cu NC 1 REFRESH 19A NC 18A REFRESH REFRESH FE 204 BOK 20 NC 21A ARQ 214 1207 9 NC 22 IROG 224 IRQS NC 23 254 IROS NC 24 IRGA 244 ROS 254 RG 25 Rota NC NC 2A DACKE NC 27 2 Ne 28 20A BALE BALE 30 NC ATETESTC 324 ATE 32 ATE TESTC I SPKDATA SPKDATA 1B NC 18 BPRDATA 1b mu LL SEHE 2B NC SEHE 28 MEM GST MEN 2915 28 CETE CSI E QUAS 48 La la 48 1429 0586 VOCS16 58 NC 00 6516 5B NC 55 1053516 VOCIS sb NC E um Lazz eb 1452 LAR NC 1422 Lae 69 Rare ore 5 NC 78 1 010 78 ROO NC 21 1421 BB 21 UI 88 Laat NC 8 LA21 Ut 88 un Firat
62. 10 Hz with lt 0 25 distortion with Frequency Counter and Distortion Analyzer at A24P2 Pin 2B Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Disconnect W13 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A9 90 MHz Generator fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect T Connector between W13 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 ara of 5 and A9J3 f and connect Measuring Receiver to T Connector Set Measuring Receiver Low Pass Filter to 15 kHz and High Pass Filter to 300 Hz Set Test Set for 1 kHz with 90 modulation tone Verify 1 kHz 10 Hz at 90 5 modulation with Measuring Receiver e If incorrect replace A9 90 MHz Generator 2 29 correct replace A13 Generator IF 2 68 25 RF GEN FM Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Remove A24 Function Generator para 2 33 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 irj Appendix off TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to AF FREQ Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1000 0 Hz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DEVIATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 5 0 kHz Press ENTER Key Set Test Set for 1 kHz with 5 kHz deviation Verify 0 67 0 03 with DMM at A24P2 Pin fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Verify 1 kHz 10 Hz with lt 0 25 distortion with Freque
63. 2 135 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 56 REPLACE 78A1A30 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 78A2 Top 2 22 Remove 78A1A19 Processor para 2 36 Remove 78A1A21 Video Controller para 2 37 Remove 78A1A27 External I O para 2 38 REMOVE 1 Remove ESD Covers from connectors 2 Remove 8 shell nuts 1 3 Remove 78A1A30 Rear Panel Connector 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A30 Rear Panel Connector 2 on 78A1A2 Rear Panel 3 2 Install 8 shell nuts 1 with Loctite 290 Appendix 3 Install ESD Covers on connectors FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Remove 78A1A27 External I O para 2 38 Remove 78A1A21 Video Controller para 2 37 Remove 78A1A19 Processor para 2 36 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 136 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 57 REPLACE 78A1A2 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE 1 Remove 4 screws 1 2 Loosen 4 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A2 Rear Panel 3 INSTALL il 1 Install 78A1A2 Rear Panel 3 2 Tighten 4 captive screws 2 3 Install 4 screws 1 UA 5 SS EN xS NS SOS 5 S N N
64. 2 144 78A1A11 2nd LO Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 1 31 Functional Description one REP dn EH URP RN Te UD eye t 1 30 Locator Diagram E 8 5 materni eine zog FP 25 Replace Procedure ERE 2 142 78A1A12 Receive IF Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 33 enn 1 27 Functional D scriptiOn x ort rite 1 26 Locator Diagram FQ 9 data dtd iret FP 27 Replace Procedure 8ATAT2 neto ete e edu 2 146 ZOATATA2WI Gs cer ntc dU 2 147 78A1A13 Generator IF Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 23 1 47 Functional Description MEE 1 46 Locator Diagram FO 10 eite idc ere eet det ai ee FP 29 Replace Procedure TOATAT9 Generator IE rd pene eee vetoed vn eee 2 148 a ais 2 149 78A1A14 Power Termination Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 2 1 25 Functional Description 1 24 Locator Diagram iiien iai AA E a FP 31 Replace Procedure TERTATA Power TerminatiOn itu rei 2 151 2 152 78 1 15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Adjustment Procedure eee nene 2 209 Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 6 1 13 Functional Description nerea aiea di dd 1 12 Locator Diagra
65. 2 54 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 24 AUXILIARY BOX Continued 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Install PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 in TS 4317 GRM MAC in spare Test Adapter memory slot Connect Logic Analyzer channels O through 15 to NAT BUSS SDO through SD15 Connect Logic Analyzer channels 16 through 39 to NAT BUSS SAO through SA19 and LA20 through LA23 Trigger on active low of memory write signal at Pin 11 MEMW connected to channel 41 Set Logic Analyzer to Asynchronous Clock at 100 ns rate Using Logic Analyzer verify pattern of hex is written to Memory triggered at address 250000 hex when A8 Processor initializes at power on e If incorrect replace A8 Processor para 2 91 Trigger on active low of memory read signal at Pin 12A MEMR connected to channel 40 Using Logic Analyzer verify pattern of AAAA hex 1 read from Memory triggered at address 250000 hex when A8 Processor initializes at power on e f incorrect replace Memory para 2 92 2 55 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 15 DMM TEST DESCRIPTION This test determines fault in the A8 DMM by measuring the response to known voltage current and resistive loads NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from fable 2 1 another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain condit
66. 22 Verify 1 1100 on Digital Multimeter Adjust ABA2R8 as required 23 Perform Steps 16 19 until no further adjustments are required 24 Set Calibrator to 20 kHz sine wave at 7 VRMS _ k _ 2 205 2 112 25 2 113 TM 11 6625 3245 40 DIGITAL MULTIMETER ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select ACV Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 V Press ENTER Key Verify 7 VAC 1 on Digital Multimeter Adjust A8A1C11 as required Set Calibrator to 20 kHz sine wave at 1 VRMS Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 2 V Press ENTER Key Verify 1 10 1 on Digital Multimeter Adjust ABA1C10 as required Perform Steps 24 through 30 for best overall response Disconnect test equipment Install DMM Relay and A8A2 DMM Digital para 260 Step 36 Install A8 DMM para 258 POWER METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the parameters of the Power Meter Bom e Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Locate A14 Power Termination FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect DMM positive lead to A14FL9 fig FO 11 and
67. A26J2 Pin 19 0 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 20 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 Vdc 0 5 A26J2 Pin 22 5 Vdc 0 5 15 VOLTS TEST FAILURE A26J2 Pin 18 5 Vdc 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 Vdc 0 5 A26J2 Pin 22 5 Vdc 0 5 voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 5 Install A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Remove Monitor para 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 in Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix Q in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 6 Verify voltages with DMM at A3P1 FO 4 A3P1 Pin 5A 15 1 0 Vdc A3P1 Pin 7A 5 0 5 A3P1 Pin 4B 15 1 0 e f any voltage is incorrect replace A16 Power Supply 2 48 e f all voltages are correct replace Monitor 2 31 2 38 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 8 TEMPERATURE 1 Run Self Test 8 in Extended Mode and verify 8 1 Ambient Test displays lt 100 e lfincorrect perform Steps 2 4 f correct perform Steps 5 6 2 Locate A26 Monitor FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 3 0 10 5 with DMM at A26J2 Pin 34 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 e lf incorrect replace A26 Monit
68. ATTENUATOR ALARM ANTENN OVERLOA STA TUS ANTENNA T R SEL 20 dB 1 SEL 20 dB 2 SEL A12J7 2nd LO A12J5 3rd LO 0771300 MHz LEAKAGE CANCELLATION NULL CIRCUIT 3 dB POWER SPLITTER ANTENNA T R 0 OR 20 dB SELECT ATTENUATOR 0 OR 20 dB ATTENUATOR 1st MIXER AS 3 dB ATTEN A PROTECT D 2nd MIXER A12J6 ANALYZER RF 3rd MIXER A12J4 RECEIVER 9 737 3 MHz 100Hz STEPS 2 236 Figure 1 13 12 Receive IF Functional Block Diagram 1 27 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 12 m 78A1A10 1st LO fig 1 14 The A10 1st LO is passed the frequency information from the A22 RF 1 0 through the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply The data signals originate in the A19 Processor and are passed to the A22 RF through the NAT BUS The A22 RF I O converts the parallel format data to serial format and passes the data to the appropriate section of the A10 1st LO The received data is converted back to parallel format in the SERIAL DATA INTERFACE In the parallel format this data represents the frequency of the required LO Signal and is used to set the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR and the DIGITAL PLL LOOP FILTER frequencies The LO signal is based on a VCO which is tuned by DC TUNE and AC TUNE Signals The DC TUNE Signal provides the coarse tune while the AC TUNE Signal is used to fine tune the VCO The data from the A19 Processor
69. Figure FO 3 78A1A1A1 Motherboard Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 FP 13 FP 14 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 ALT CAUTION CT wee eee py CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES AR l ocur fia amp t SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY nmu RETOR 2A ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD fas hen ne MNA ei en RA TS ACTAS A ha MSCRT i wn i ELEM 4 WHE Harness i E 2 f m EPA Be 1 ASTISONT QUO or Mieten seo win une o 2 E ma mamone Ear moriam us ECT m Pe 1 a P EROR picis n pe AD athe m s i p CE E Fa
70. TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM INDEX Symptom Page 1 APPLIED Indicator does not hoM 2 9 2 Indicator does not 2 9 3 Fan does not wOrk A 2 10 4 Sequence does not 2 10 DY BlowsS Euses us ee tei 2 10 6 CRT is blank or display abnormality 2 10 7 INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment Inoperable essent nennen nens 2 10 8 CRT Error Messages are 2 11 9 Keyboard Keys 4 4 0224441 nnne nnns nnns entras 2 12 10 DATA SCROLL Spinner 2 12 11 Speaker piene ue eode eL nee eet Dee 2 12 12 Self ettet Rete tl 2 13 13 Squelch Inoperable Squelch 2 13 14 GEN 1 Frequency and Level Accuracy 2 13 15 GEN 1 Distortion Threshold instr 2 14 16
71. Tighten 2 captive screws 6 Install spacer 3 Reconnect 2 wire cable connectors 5 and 3 ribbon cable connectors 4 Lower cardcage 2 600 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Lower cardcage 2 until cardcage latch locks FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 174 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 91 REPLACE 83A1A8 PROCESSOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 REMOVE Release cardcage latch and raise cardcage 2 30 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Raise cardcage 2 60 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 3 Remove 2 screws 4 and PC Board retainer 5 Raise card ejectors and remove 83A1A8 Processor 6 gt INSTALL Install 83A1A8 Processor 6 in guides and close card ejectors Install 2 screws 4 and PC Board retainer 5 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 3 Lower cardcage 2 60 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Lower cardcage 2 until cardcage latch locks Go FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 175 2 92 REPLACE 83A1A6 MEMORY DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE Release cardca
72. amp amp amp e X8 AAA ADA 1232 AAA AA AA AAA DLADADDADOSADA 10000010000 10101010 10 000 20 O 22 T3 12 O E xs DEMASIADA SINO Aaa za DADAS 1 g X7 2 EE 71 73 27 Em Pein betta 29 0303 C0 En 29 29 73 pera aerea FT TD ED A ED IO IU LU 3 CQ DU VU EDT LU ZU TO CX TT Wu iS 2 z2121322727113 T3203 E ED CD DES E22 EL E C0 22 12 Z2 E EL CZ CO E E2 E E38 Z2 00 2 11 772 20 L2 23 Z2 2 1 DL E2 LI E E 01770771710 02 9 70 E2073 003 CD LE E PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATIORS WITH 83A1A2A1 Figure FO 20 83A1A2A1 Motherboard Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 FP 61 FP 62 blank CE
73. ecd tete rea Test CNET Ee Service Upon Receipt of nnne trennen nennen 2 5 Signal Meter Adjustment 2 102 12 188 Sinad Meter Adju strrierit dd oi tada 2 197 Special Tools TMDE and Support 2 2 2 5 Spectrum Analyzer 1 000 eene nennen ennt nenne nnn rns 2 203 Troubleshooting 2 7 2 7 Troubleshooting 2 8 Storag E nu 2 216 Upload Interface Software Procedure 2 94 12 178 VCXO A AO 2 4 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section I REPAIR PARTS SPECIAL TOOLS TMDE AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 2 1 COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Common tools and equipment required for Maintenance Instructions of Radio Test Set are listed in Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC of Operators and Unit Maintenance Manual TM 11 6625 3245 12 2 29 SPECIAL TOOLS TMDE AND SUPPORT QUIPMENT There are no special tools TMDE or support equipment required 2 3 REPAIR PARTS Repair parts are listed and illustrated in the Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists TM 9 6625 3244 24P TS 4317 GRM TM 9 6625 3246 24P J 4843
74. gt CE2FO018 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 100 2 26 REPLACE 78A1A4 ANALYZER LOG IF TM 11 5826 313 13 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 78A2 Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A1A5 Analyzer RF para 2 27 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 3 coaxial cables 1 2 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF 3 2 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 3 Reconnect coaxial cables 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 7841 A5 Analyzer RF 2 27 Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 101 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 27 REPLACE 78A1A5 ANALYZER RF DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 78A2 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 6 coaxial cables 1 2 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A5 Analyzer RF 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A5 Analyzer RF 3 2 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 3 Reconnect 6 coaxial cables 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 102 2 28 REPLACE 78A1A7 3rd LO TM 11 6625 3245 40
75. 0 Publication Date 04 JUL 85 11 Change Number 7 12 Submitter Rank MSG 13 Submitter FName Joe 14 Submitter MName 15 Submitter LName Smith 16 Submitter Phone 123 123 1234 17 Problem 1 18 Page 2 19 Paragraph 3 20 Line 4 21 NSN 5 22 Reference 6 23 Figure 7 24 Table 8 25 9 26 Total 123 27 Text This is the text for the problem below line 27 Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and Spe DATE RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND cial Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply Catalogs BLANK FORMS Supply Manuals SC SM For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is ODISC4 8 3 0 02 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code Commander U S Army Aviation and Missile Command MSG Jane Q Doe ATTN AMSAM MMC MA NP 1234 Any Street Redstone Arsenal 35898 Nowhere Town AL 34565 PART 1 ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE Organizational Direct Support And General Support Maintenance Manual for Machine Gun 50 TM 9 1005 433 24 16 Sep 2002 caliber M3P and M3P Machine Gun Electrical Test Set Used On Avenger Air Defense Weapon System ITEM PAGE PARA LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON NO NO GRAPH NO NO NO 0005 Test Corrective Action column should identify a different WP number 3 Refe
76. 150 Sats 150 16 sats 160 SAIS E 1 sma 9414 175 984 NC 7G sata nc E sais sata 180 313 NC 186 sas 1186 3213 sar sate sc 6432 Sate 190 Satz 196 AS 196 sare san 0 206 6411 SAT 206 Jaossa o AN aac tc 210 san 2 smo 5410 1 122 SAD SAS 220 SAS 879 220 SAS 528 220 SAS Hass INT sm oac sas sag 1230 sas m 230 sas 1286 SA 240 SAT SA 240 SAT 246 240 57 A 250 SAS 250 SAB 250 846 250 SAG E sas JN zit sas SAS aec SAS sas 250 sas I SAS rel saa 276 _ PIC 5 sm a 543 280 343 280 SA3 280 H 280 SA w A 1296 542 542 290 SA2 542 290 SAZ 542 290 BAZ JO 200 SAT 506 306 SAT 306 saws SADUSBLE 310 SAO SAOOISBLE 310 SADOISBLE p sap SAO0SBLE NC NC NC 32C NC ATETESTA 1320 NC 222
77. 78A1A26 and 78A1A27 PC Board Assemblies Component Locator Diagrams Sheet of 3 FP 53 FP 54 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 A13 GENERATOR IF REGNO A A29 AUXILIARY pm POWER SUPPLY O RO 1 O GEN LVL DET GEN LVL DET mA Cee ALARM OVERLOAD STATUS PWA TERM TEMP AND RE PWR LVL 412 RECEVEIA RAO wey CAUTION ien ES CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES neo USED SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY LL rav DECODER 1 ALARM ANTENNA 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD um i ARRA E 32a REF 326 REF EM UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 64 MINES 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES DATA THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES 32 1 2 4 8 16 GND m 5 AB eg 4518 Az ner POWER TERMINATION 2 ALL RESISTORS ARE 17 1 TOLERANCE gt TM s gau 3 RESISTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN OHMS 4 ALL CAPACITANCE EXPRESSED IN loa MIGROFARADS TE 9s REV 5 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS 233053300 o or WITH TRAS
78. A25 DIGITIZER 15 A26 MONITOR CONTROL O AU A27 EXTERNAL I O 28 ATTENUATOR ME EE 5 A29 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY i A30 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR GO 2 eA 2 E 3 e e E ceo cen S AH i ra PU LIII amie E cc e i i ae a a a a a ITI E CE u u nn rM rl u SE Figure FO 2 Radio Test Set 78A1 and 83A1 Assembly and Cable Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 1 of 5 FP 3 FP 4 blank TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW wis Wi4 Alawi A29W1 12 1 Wi 11 6625 3245 40 A M CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES t SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE E80 we ASOW2 A30W2 AW 22 wis AIWA wa Wi NO wis
79. Auxiliary Power Supply Sheet 1 of 5 11 Verify 2500 Q at A1A1W3P1 Pins 1 and 8 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall assembly if reading is correct Disconnect If incorrect replace A3 Monitor para 2 31 A3 Monitor A22 RF I O para 2 34 A22 RF I O para 2 34 A4 Analyzer Log IF para 2 26 A4 Analyzer Log IF para 2 26 A7 3rd LO A7 3rd LO A9 90 MHz Generator A9 90 MHz Generator A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer Receiver para 2 30 Receiver para 2 30 12 Verify gt 1 at A1A1W3P1 Pins 7 and 14 with DMM when A14W1 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 is disconnected from A28 Attenuator fig 2 Sheet 1 of 5 e f incorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 2 30 2 10 POWER FAULTS TEST Continued TM 11 6625 3245 40 13 Locate A16 Power Supply fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and disconnect DC Power Cable from A16J4 fig FO 14 Verify readings with DMM at following locations on DC Power Cable DC Power Cable Pins 1 and 2 DC Power Cable Pins 3 and 4 DC Power Cable Pins 5 and 6 e If incorrect replace 83A1A9 External I O 2 89 20 9 lt 1kQ lt 1 14 Pull following assemblies and verify faulty assemblies with DMM on DC Power Cable Location DC Power Cable Pin 1 DC Power Cable Pin 1 DC Power Cable Pin 1 DC Power Cable Pin 1 DC Power Cable Pin 1 DC Power Cable Pin 3 DC Power Cable Pin 3 DC Power Cable Pin 3 DC Power Ca
80. DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A21 Video Controller 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A21 Video Controller 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 na Py D eonun o FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK CE2FO030 2 112 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 38 REPLACE 78A1A27 EXTERNAL 1 0 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 78 2 Top 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 2 ribbon cable connectors 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A27 External I O 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A27 External I O 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect 2 ribbon cable connectors 1 ec DT DE AN O 2 9 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 113 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 39 REMOVE 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter Remove 7842 Top Ca
81. FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Run Self Test 9 in Extended Mode and verify 1 Vdc 0 1 with DMM at A26J2 Pin 47 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 e If incorrect perform Steps 2 5 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Connect Distortion Analyzer to AUDIO OUT Connector Set Distortion Analyzer to measure SINAD Verify 10 dB 1 dB with Distortion Analyzer e incorrect replace A24 Function Generator 2 33 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 18 0 10 5 A26J2 Pin 19 0 f0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 5 10 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 0 5 e voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Loop Self Test 9 and verify signals with Oscilloscope are not stuck at 7 5 Vdc or 7 5 Vdc at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 8 A26J2 Pin 9 A26J2 Pin 10 A26J2 Pin 11 A26J2 Pin 12 A26J2 Pin 13 A26J2 Pin 14 A26J2 Pin 15 A26J2 Pin 16 A26J2 Pin 17 If any signal is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e Ifall signals are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 2 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 10 2 SCOPE PERIOD AND LEVEL Remove Monitor para 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 ih Appendix of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Run Sel
82. FRONT 11 125MHz 558 COUNTER AUDIO 1 MHz PLL gt REF FMDATA 2 KEYBOARD DET R 2nd LO 784146 accLeveL gt MONITOR 7 N RECEIVER gt 7 POWER TERMINAFION i 7 ETDS gt ena Lo 1 ROT P OR Lo CONTROL RF POWER a 7 gt SPEAKER F __ __ AUX PWR POWER FUNCTION AUDIO di 2 SUPPLY SPKR DATA gt 7 9 200900000000000900000 CONTROL 200000000000000000006 Z 2 lt 4 EXTSINADIBER RF E 2 lt AUDIO OUT 250kHz 1GHz R 2 lt DEMOD AUDIO 0 t Tm monton a lt 4 EGMOD METERING DVM 2300MHz 1210MHz VIDEO REVO BUS 7 BaAIAS 7 EXTERNAL PROCESSOR 5 7 cepere oo S 5 ond Lo Y 2 20 2 S 2 DETECTOR SOMH AMMOD EM 2 zu 2 78 1 28 a MONITOR 2 ATTENUATOR lt TS00MNZIE GENERATOR CONTROL 2 0 127dB RF 88 90 O Y 250kHz 16H2 GENERATOR IF MHz 2 LEVELING 1 ZS 4 a 4 aN 2 2 2 7841419 gt 2 e WANDS 9 TOD PWR Z oe E wmo ponas Sup m 49 Y TEALAQO TOMAR ss d Ec pum REF gt VIDEO gt CRT ONLY MEMORY CONTROLLER 78 1 15 PROCESSOR CONTROL CE2FO067 CE2F0067 TM 11 6625 3245 40
83. If constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U 1 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR3 Verify signals switch high and low with Oscilloscope at A28AT1 Pin 16 when Test Set attenuation is varied from 16 to 15 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U 1 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot 2801 and A28CR4 Set Test Set to generate 100 MHz at 0 dBm Disconnect W2d fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A9 90 MHz Generator Sheet 1 of 5 connect Oscilloscope to W20 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 0 4 V square wave at 1 MHz slightly distorted Replace All 1 2nd LO para 2 62 Reconnect W20 Disconnect W14 from A10 1st LO fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Power Meter to W14 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 7 dBm i2 dB Replace All 2nd LO para 2 62 Reconnect W14 Disconnect W11 from A13 Generator IF Sheet 1 of 5 connect Power Meter to FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 20 dBm Replace All 1 2nd LO 2 62 Reconnect W11 Disconnect W12 from A13 Generator IH fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Power Meter to W12 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 7 dBm Replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 Reconnect W12 Disconnect W13 from A9 90 MHz FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect T Connector W13 fig 2 Sheet 2 of 5 connect Power Meter to T Connector connect T Connecto
84. N otra nse na ets EXT AUDIOIN Em OS AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY EE oce pun Nabe ee ze wmm s 41114 ee i SER que me 8 4 ii pn N 3 sve ix KEY COLUMN 7 x m S MT AL M ANALOG GHD z bd PH E d SALO recen un 8 SE Woo m aC sue TAE ekkraron 1 E 1 te 2 ERST l ES ww eel PURON SW atiam 3 mer nc 1 pan ix oe lt pe as ES COMM E nc PR ND El 1 sweat e gu AS Ene s ac 2 Te avai Figure FO 3 78A1A1A1 Motherboard Assembly Component Locator and wiring Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 FP 15 FP 16 blank W31P2 II A3J2
85. Press TX F1 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to ANT Press ENTER Key to select T R 10 Press More F6 until Decode F2 appears Press Decode F2 11 Press GO Key 12 Verify 123456789 0 appears on screen and repeats 13 Press STOP Key Change 1 2 84 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued DMM TM 11 5826 313 13 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect external test equipment as shown 4 Press MTRS MODE Key 0000 oo 0 DD OOOO O 0000000 0000000 s 0000090000 CALIBRATOR 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Digital Multimeter DMM Press ENTER Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER select DCV Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select DCV ranges and verify values on DMM Set Range to Set Calibrator for DMM displays 200 mV 150 mVdc 150 mVac i2 1 mVdc 2V 1 5 Vdc 1 5 121 mVdc 20V 15 15 10 21 200 V 150 150 12 1 2000 V 500 500 121 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER select ACV Press ENTER Key 2 85 Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORM
86. REMOVE 1 Remove screw 3 2 Unsolder 10 wires from 10 feedthrus 1 3 Unsolder 2 wires from 2 ground lugs 2 4 Remove 78A1A10W1 4 INSTALL Install 78A1A10W1 4 Install screw 3 Solder 2 wires to 2 ground lugs 2 Solder 10 wires to 10 feedthrus 1 2 CE2FO137 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 78A1A10 1st LO para 2 63 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 144 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 65 REPLACE 78A1A29 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE Disconnect 3 wire cable connectors 1 Remove 2 ribbon cable retainers 2 Disconnect 2 ribbon cable connectors 3 Remove 4 screws 4 Remove 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply 5 guid o m INSTALL Install 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply 5 Install 4 screws 4 Reconnect 2 ribbon cable connectors 3 Install 2 ribbon cable retainers 2 Reconnect 5 wire cable connectors 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 145 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 66 REPLACE 78A1A12 RECEIVE IF DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
87. Ret F5 and AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment 2 195 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 107 DISTORTION METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Distortion Meter for the Receive function 1 Connect external test equipment O oo 0000 oo oooo 0 0000 O 0000000 0000000 00 0000000 o ee DOPP000000 SINAD BER IN AUDIO OUT DISTORTION ANALYZER PELOS Set Distortion Analyzer to DIST and Low Pass Filter to 80 kHz Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF MODE Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 AF Output Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 Proportional Output Press ENTER Key to select On Press AF MODE Key 0 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 100 Press ENTER Key 11 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 10 Press ENTER Key 12 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 AF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 2400 0 Hz Press ENTER Key 2 196 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 107 DISTORTION METER ADJUSTMENT Continued 13 Use FIELD
88. SS xS SR IR N lt lt lt N e AM SS S S 5555 55 RL SII ER DOS 559 ORO IE SS SS SS XS es SS SS AM 552 SS SS SS CE2FO039 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 137 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 58 REMOVE 78A1A8 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE 1 Disconnect wire cable connector 1 2 Remove 2 spacer nuts and 2 washers 2 3 Slide 78A1A8 DMM 3 to rear and remove INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A8 DMM 3 and slide forward until tight against 78A1A17 Front Panel 2 Reconnect wire cable connector 1 3 Install 2 spacer nuts and 2 washers 2 2 040 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 138 2 59 REPLACE 78A1A8F2 78A1A8F3 AND 78A1A8A1F1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom para 2 23 Remove 78A1A8 2 58 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 Remove 2 fuse caps
89. The Latch Decoder is used to decode the upper byte D8 D15 of data from the processor to determine the specified I O device The Parallel To Serial Converter passes the serial data to the Latch Decoder to place on the RF I O Bus The second function of the A22 RF I O is to provide a return path to the A19 Processor from the assemblies attached to the RF BUS Status signals provided to the 22 RF I O through the RF I O BUS by the separate assemblies are assembled and latched to the NAT BUS as 16 bit word Status lines returned to the A22 RF I O include STATUS IstA 1st LO Receive STATUS IstB 1st LO Generate STATUS 3rd 3rd LO STATUS 2nd STATUS GEN ANLZR LOCK Analyzer Phase Lock ALARM POWERMODE SPR DC DET A16 Power Supply MIC SW 1 2 The A22 RF I O receives inputs from both the NAT BUS and the I O BUS The signals provided by the NAT BUS that are used by the A22 RF include Address Lines SAO SA11 Data Lines SDO SD15 1 0 Read IORD Upper Byte Enable SHBE Address Latch Enable Write IOWR The EXTERNAL D A Converter creates the EXT signal for the Receiver The VCXO D A Converter provides the digital information needed to create the analog VCXO Signal The FAN OPTO COUPLER provides the FAN ON HIGH Signal The PS SHUTDOWN OPTO COUPLER provides the PS SHUTDOWN Signal 1 50 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A22P1 A22P2 MOTHERBOARD MO
90. The PULSE GENERATOR uses the 2 MHz signal from the REFERENCE DIVIDER as a reference The sampled signal is then amplified by the SAMPLER ERROR AMPLIFIER The signal is then amplified by the SAMPLER LOOP GAIN Amplifier The GAIN BAND CONTROL Signal sets the Amplifier according to the frequency of the required signal This signal is the AC TUNE SIGNAL The signal from the SAMPLER LOOP GAIN Amplifier is also passed through the PHASE ERROR DETECT Circuitry which controls the Reference Phase Shift The Reference Phase Shift adjusts the phase of the 1 MHz Reference to match the phase of the AC TUNE Signal and the DC TUNE Signal 1 28 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A10WIP1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY MURS DATA AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY SERIALDATA E JT INTERFACE LATCH STATUS 1ST LO REC GAIN BAND CONTROL DIGITAL PLL 256 272 m FREQUENCY IN DIVISER SCALER lt MOD CONTROL COMPARATOR DIGITAL PLL d LOOP FILTER PHASE SHIFTED DC TUNE 1024 A10J5 REF REFERENCE 1 MHz PHASE PHASE CONTROL GENERATOR IF DIVIDER ERROR RECEIVE IF DETECT PULSE H 2 MHz GEN gt A10J2 2ND LO VCO TO SAMPLER 2 7 VCO TO DIVIDER Figure 1 14 A10 1st LO Functional Block Diagram 1 29 TM 11 6625 3245 40 13 78A1A11 2nd LO 1 18 The All 2nd LO is used to generate the 1210 MHz signal used by the A12 Receive IF and A13 Generator IF The All 2nd LO is passed a 10 MHz signal for a referen
91. Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Sine Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to WAVE GEN 2 Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Sine Repeat Steps 9 through 19 Press AF GEN MODE Key Verify VRMS Meter matches 1096 DMM incorrect perform Steps 3539 If correct perform Step 39 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 8 VRMS Meter Press ENTER Key twice Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter DMM VRMS reading Press ENTER Key Press AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment and install A24 Function Generator para 233 2100 GEN OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the output of the RF Generator Press POWER Switch to and allow 5 minute warm up period Change 1 2 186 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 100 GEN OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Continued 2 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 3 Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 4 Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector 5 Press RF GEN MODE Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key 7 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 8 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu 9 UseFIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 14 Gen Output Level Press ENTER Key 10 Perform Steps 1116 for following ranges RANGE LOW FREQUENCY H
92. Wand 2 2 EE 2 1 3 through 1 69 0 1 7 0 blank eR 0 2 1 through 2 4 eee 0 2 2 6 through 2 21 0 2 22 eG e eei tea 1 2 23 through 2 62 0 2 63 through 2 65 1 2 66 steel 0 2 NON 1 2 68 0 2 69 1 2 70 and 2 72 0 Dl E 1 22 0 2 b A esu 1 Dl 0 2 77 through 2 83 sss 0 HIE 1 2 85 through 2 90 0 1 2 92 through 2 113 0 2 114 ioi eate oie exe 1 2 115 through 2 117 0 A p eie PO dene 1 2 119 through 2 159 0 2 100 een 1 Change No No FP 14 1 EP ou en eure 0 FP 16 0 0 FP 18 0 0 FP 20 0 du RAS 0 FP 22 0 nu A TAS 0 FP 24 0 MC E 0 FP 26 0
93. on Measuring Receiver Disconnect external test equipment RF GEN RESIDUAL FM PILES Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Set Measuring Receiver to measure FM Deviation Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 10 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Enter frequencies and verify readings on Measuring Receiver 80 MHz 45 Hz RMS 500 kHz 140 Hz RMS 500 MHz 140 Hz RMS Disconnect external test equipment Change 1 2 75 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RF GEN AM POD Da Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Set Measuring Receiver to measure AM on Positive Peak and activate 15 kHz Low Pass Filter Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOURCE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select AM Press ENTER Key 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MODULATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 90 Press ENTER Key 9 Use FI
94. 1 FO 5 2 58 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 15 DMM TEST Continued 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCV Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Key to select 200 mV Connect DMM to DMM V Q Connector and A8A1W1E1 Pin 31 FO 5 Verify 120 Q 12 Q on DMM e lf incorrect replace A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 If correct replace 2 DMM Digitall para 2 60 Remove A23 Countef para 2 25 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Enter RANGE Field values and verify TTL pulses or pulse trains are present with Oscilloscope at A23P2 fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 when cycling through ranges pressing ENTER Key at each range A23P2 Pin 1c A23P2 Pin 2C A23P2 Pin 3C A23P2 Pin 4C If any reading is incorrect replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Enter RANGE Field values and verify TTL pulses or pulse trains are present with Oscilloscope at A23P2 Pin 1B when cycling through ranges pressing ENTER Key at each range e If incorrect perform Steps 32 37 e If correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Remove A8 DMM para 2 58 Remove A8A2 DMM Digita para 2 60 and A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 Reconnect ABA1W2Pil fig FO 5 Use FIELD SELECT
95. 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Enter frequencies in RF Field and verify levels on Measuring Receiver 0 dBm 2 dB for 250 kHz 499 kHz 500 kHz 999 kHz 1 MHz 49 MHz 50 MHz 124 MHz 125 MHz 199 MHz 200 MHz 399 MHz 0 dBm 13 5 dB for 400 MHz 599 MHz 600 MHz 799 MHz 800 MHz 999 MHz 7 Disconnect external test equipment Change 1 2 73 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RF GEN FREQUENCY ACCURACY Oo m Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Frequency Counter to T R Connector Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Enter frequencies and verify readings on Frequency Counter 50 MHz 50 MHz 25 Hz 200 MHz 200 MHz 100 Hz 400 MHz 400 MHz 200 Hz 600 MHz 600 MHz 300 Hz 800 MHz 800 MHz 400 Hz 6 Disconnect external test equipment RF GEN LEVEL ACCURACY QUE OQ M o Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DA
96. 100 Hz 15 VAC 1 01 VAC 200 V 150 VAC at 100 Hz 150 10 1 2000 V 500 VAC at 100 Hz 500 101 VAC e df any reading is incorrect replace ABA2 DMM Digital para 2 60 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Ohm Press ENTER Key 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select Ohm ranges and verify values on DMM Range If incorrect replace perform 200 OHM 1000 Perform Step 15 2K OHM 1000 Q A8A2 DMM Digital 20 KOHM 10KQ A8A2 DMM Digital 200 K OHM 100 A8A2 DMM Digital 2 M OHM A8A2 DMM Digital 20 MOHM A8A2 DMM Digital 10 Connect external test equipment as shown ooooooo OO 0000000 2 Doooon 00000009900 CALIBRATOR CE2FO170 11 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCC Press ENTER Key 2 57 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 15 DMM TEST Continued 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select DCC ranges and verify values on DMM Range Calibrator DMM Value incorrect replace perform 20 mA 15 mA 15 mA 1 01 mA Perform Steps 16 20 200 mA 150 mA 150 mA 1 0 1 mA A8A1 DMM Relay 2A 15A 1 5 A 101 mA A8A1 DMM Relay Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys
97. 11 6625 3245 40 16 q 78A1A3 Monitor 1 1B The Monitor acts as a switching network to switch audio and analog signals through selected filters to desired outputs The A26 Monitor Control provides control of the A3 Monitor in selecting the required path Input Signals accepted by the A3 Monitor include AM DEMOD FM DEMOD PM DEMOD SSB DEMOD FM DATA PWR LVL SINAD BER IN Connector Function Generator Audio EXT MOD IN Connector IN Analog Signals After filtering amplifying and or attenuating the input signal is switched to the selected output Outputs available include DVM Digital Voltmeter on 26 Monitor Control DATA A26 Monitor Control DTMF OUT 26 Monitor Control SPEAKER DEMOD AUDIO OUT DEMOD OUT Connector Al 7J7 SCOPE AUDIO A25 Digitizer COUNTER AUDIO A25 Digitizer AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT Connector A17J6 The switching within the A3 Monitor is done with Crosspoint Switches which form a SWITCH MATRIX The SWITCH MATRIX sets routings that pass signals straight to outputs listed above or through one or more of the following PEAK DETECTOR PEAK DETECTOR C MSG BPF C Message Weighted Bandpass Filter NBF Notch Band Filter LPF Low Pass Filter HPF High Pass Filter The DVM Selector chooses the DVM input signal Sole output is to the DVM on the A26 Monitor Control DVM Selector inputs include PEAK LEVEL Analog Signals PEAK LEVE
98. 37 890 kHz 40 Hz signal with Frequency Counter at A3P1 Pin 3A fig FO 4 e f incorrect replace A24 Function Generator 2 32 Verify 37 890 kHz i40 Hz signal with Frequency Counter at A3P1 Pin 3B e If incorrect perform Steps 5 6 f correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Install Monitor para 2 31 Remove A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 in Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix Q in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Loop Self Test 11 and verify signals with Oscilloscope are not stuck at 7 5 or 7 5 at A26J2 fig 16 Sheet 3 of 3 A26J2 Pin 8 A26J2 Pin 9 A26J2 Pin 10 A26J2 Pin 11 A26J2 Pin 12 A26J2 Pin 13 A26J2 Pin 14 A26J2 Pin 15 A26J2 Pin 16 A26J2 Pin 17 e signal is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e Ifall signals are correct replace Monitor 2 31 2 42 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 12 LP FILTER 1 Locate A26 Monitor Controll fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Run Self Test 12 and verify signal with Oscilloscope and x10 Probe at A26J2 Pin 47 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 as shown 2 Verify level of Region 1 is 1 Vdc 0 2 V e incorrect perform Step 5 3 Verify level of Region 2 is 50 to 90 of level in Region 1 e If incorrect
99. 4 Verify level of Region 3 is lt 10 of Region 1 e If incorrect perform Step 5 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 5 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 18 0 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 19 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 5 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 0 5 e voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 2 44 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 14 HP FILTER Continued 6 Loop Self Test 12 and verify signals with Oscilloscope are not stuck at 7 5 or 7 5 at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 8 A26J2 Pin 9 A26J2 Pin 10 A26J2 Pin 11 A26J2 Pin 12 A26J2 Pin 13 A26J2 Pin 14 A26J2 Pin 15 A26J2 Pin 16 A26J2 Pin 17 e If any signal is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 7 Verify frequency is 300 kHz 15 kHz with Frequency Counter at A26J2 Pin 6 e If incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e f correct replace Monitor 2 31 15 PHASELOCK LOOPS 1 Remove A22 RF 2 34 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 Appendix of 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set 2 Run Self Test 15 in Extended Mode until failure is detected 3 Verify voltage for failed test with DMM at A22P2 fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of Failed Test Voltage If incorrect perform 15 1 A22P2 Pin 11B 5 Vdc 0 5 Vdc Step 4 15 2 A22P2 Pin 2C 5 0 5
100. 78A1A15 CRT para 2 39 Remove 78A1A15A1 CRT H V para 2 40 Remove 78A1A15A2 CRT Oolor para 2 40 REMOVE Remove 6 screws 6 lock washers and 6 flat washers 1 2 Remove 78A1A15V1 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78 1 15 1 2 2 Install 6 screws 6 lock washers and 6 flat washers 1 utm CE2FO138 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A15A2 CRT Color para 2 40 Install 78AIA15A1 CRT H V para 2 40 Install 78AIA15 CRT para 2 39 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 117 2 42 REMOVE 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP TM 11 6625 3245 40 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter e Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 e Remove 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 REMOVE 1 Remove 2 screws and 4 washers 1 2 Remove 4 screws and 8 washers 2 3 Disconnect wire cable connector 3 4 Slide 78A1A15 CRT 4 toward rear 5 Raise handle 5 and remove 78A1A15 CRT 4 INSTALL 1 Perform Adjustments para 2 95 2 Install 78 1 15 CRT 4 on chassis aligning screw holes 4 Slide 78A1A15 CRT 4 toward front until guide pins 6 are seated in grommets 4 Disconnect wire cable connector 3 5 Install 4 screws and 8 washers 2 6 Install 2 screws and 4 washers 1 BOTTOM VIEW TOP VIEW CE2FO
101. A13 Generator IF is responsible for taking the 88 90 MHz IF Signal from the A9 90 MHz Generator and transforming it into the final RF Signal Signals from the A10 1st LO 1 3 2 298 GHz LO and the All 2nd LO 1210 MHz LO are used to transform the signal The 88 90 MHz IF Signal passed from the A9 90 MHz Generator is presented to the GEN IF 1st Mixer The GEN IF 1st Mixer adds the 1210 MHz LO Signal All 2nd LO with this signal to produce a 1300 2298 MHz IF signal The 1298 1300 MHz IF Signal is passed to the second mixer where it is combined with a 1300 2298 MHz LO A10 1st LO This mixer converts the signal to the final output frequency 0 250 1000 MHz The RF Signal is amplified for 10 20 dBm level required and passed to the A28 Attenuator The RF Signal also passes through a coupler where the output level is detected This circuit produces the GEN LVL DET Signal and is routed through channels to the A9 90 MHz Generator where it is used for setting the Attenuator 1 46 TM 11 6625 3245 40 GEN IF MECH eS lt 1332 2nd Lo A13J3 90 MHz GENERATOR A13J1 1stLO A13W1P1 ATTENUATOR GEN LVL DET AM DETECTER A13P6 a AA eee CE2FO238 Figure 1 23 A13 Generator IF Functional Block Diagram 1 47 11 6625 3245 40 22 78A1A28 Attenuato fig 1 24 The A28 Attenuator distributes 115 and 5 from the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply to the A13 Generator IF A12 Receive IF and A14 P
102. A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR2 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and replace A28AT1 If correct remove A28 Attenuator and replace A28AT1 23 RF GEN Residual FM Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Disconnect W12 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Measuring Receiver to W12 Sheet 2 of 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 kHz Press ENTER Key Verify 70 Hz RMS on Measuring Receiver Replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 Reconnect W12 Disconnect W11 from A13 Generator IF 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Measuring Receiver to W11 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Verify 70 Hz RMS on Measuring Receiver e If incorrect replace All 2nd LO para 2 62 e If correct replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 24 RF GEN AM Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Remove A24 Function Generator para 2 33 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 Appendix of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Set Test Set for 1 kHz with 9096 modulation tone Verify 0 10 mVdc with DMM at A24P2 Pin 4A fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 2 19 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 24 RFGEN AM Failure Continued Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Verify 1 kHz
103. AM reading recorded in Step 10 Modulation setting is out of tolerance and adjustment range is 175 or gt 180 perform Steps 18 27 If AM Modulation setting is in tolerance perform Steps 20 27 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 180 Press ENTER Key Locate A9 90 MHz Generator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and adjust MOD ADJ fig FO 6 to set modulation reading on Measuring Receiver to 90 plus Residual AM recorded in Step 10 Press RF GEN MODE Key Set Measuring Receiver to measure FM and set Low Pass Filter to 3 kHz Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOURCE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select OFF in MOD 1 Press ENTER Key Record Peak Residual FM on Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM in MOD 1 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DEVIATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 5 kHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to AF FREQ Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 905 Hz Press ENTER Key 2 199 2 109 27 TM 11 6625 3245 40 GEN MODULATION ADJUSTMENT Continued Verify 5 kHz deviation reading on Measuring Receiver is within 5 of deviation setting less Peak Residual FM elf deviation is not in tolerance perform Steps 28 32 If deviation is in tolerance perform Steps 41 46 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys
104. Clock signals for the GPIB CONTROLLER are provided by a clock within the assembly Interrupt and DMA requests for GPIB are passed through the NAT BUS INTERFACE to the NAT BUS DMA Acknowledge signals are returned along the same path in reverse The SCSI Connector uses the SCSI PROCESSOR as the controlling device for remote operation 1 68 9 1 MOTHERBOARD DATA ADDRESS CONTROL SCSI IRQ11 SCSI ACK DACK1 SCSI REQ DRQ1 NAT BUS INTERFACE LCA TM 11 6625 3245 40 A9J2 REAR PANEL ADDRESS DATA TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER GPIB CONTROL GPIB CONTROL THANSVIINER GPIB CONTROL ADDRESS SCSI INT SCSI ACK SCSI REQ SCSI PROCESSOR CONTROL CE2F0231 Figure 1 34 A9 External 1 0 Functional Block Diagram 1 69 1 70 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 CHAPTER 2 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Para Page 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Adjustment 78 1 15 CRT 7005 7840 600 daas EM cler aor ptt 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Adjustment 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure sse nennen 8 1 RF RN E O 1 2 18 2 63 lios 2 95 2 179 Frequency Agility 44 21 4 1 01000 tentem 2 20 2
105. Connector Set Signal Generator output frequency to 121 1 MHz at 40 dBm with no modulation Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Analyzer Press ENTER Key to select Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 4 Setup Analyzer Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Frequency Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 121 1 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 6 Scan Width Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 20 kHz Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Locate A5 Analyzer RF Sheet 1 of 5 and adjust ANLZR CENTER fig FO 4 to center trace on Analyzer Operation Screen Press More F6 until Scan F3 appears Press Scan F3 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to alternate Scan Width between 20 kHz and 200 kHz making adjustments to ANLZR CENTER to minimize centering error 2 203 TM 11 6625 3245 40 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ADJUSTMENT Continued Use DATA SCROLL Keys to set Scan Width to 1 kHz Press ENTER Key Verify trace is centered on center graticule i1 Minor Division If trace out of tolerance perform Steps 16 19 If trace in tolerance perform Steps 20 27 Press SETUP Key Press AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 16 Anlz Horz Offset Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to increase or decrease value by 1 Press ENTER Key 27 28 Press SCOPE ANLZ MO
106. DEGAUSSING COIL TM 11 6625 3245 40 CE2FO234 CE2FO234 TM 11 6625 3245 40 6 g 78A1A24 Function Generator fig 1 8 The A24 Function Generator synthesizes the audio signals and serial data that the TEST SET generates The A24 Function Generator is microprocessor controlled with an interface to the A19 Processor The microprocessor a Zilog Super 8 serves as slave processor to the A19 Processor The A24 Function Generator processes the following signals GEN1 Output GEN Output Serial Data EXT MOD IN Connector input MIC ACC Connector input DTMF The two audio generators use a procedure that encompasses both analog and digital processes The A19 Processor passes requirements to the Super 8 Microprocessor The Super 8 Microprocessor passes information to the XILINX concerning wave shape frequency and required synthesizer for generating audio tones The XILINX instructs the proper PROM one for each audio generator which wave shape to write and provides the clock for the selected frequency The output from the PROM is processed by a D A Converter as the first step of the analog process The resulting signal is then filtered by a Wave Shaping Filter selected by the Super 8 Microprocessor The signal level is 5 Vp p The Generator Attenuator attenuates the signal to the required output level The final output location for this signal is selected by the Audio Switching Matrix Both EXT MOD IN Connector signals and MIC ACC Conne
107. DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Case 2 22 Remove 78A1A5 Analyzer RF para 2 27 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 5 coaxial cables 1 2 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A7 3rd LO 3 INSTALL Install 78AIA7 3rd LO 3 1 2 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 3 Reconnect 5 coaxial cables 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A5 Analyzer RF para 2 27 Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Perform Frequency Agility Test para 2 20 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 103 2 29 REPLACE 78A1A9 90 MHz GENERATOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install TM 11 6625 3245 40 INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top para 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 4 coaxial cables 1 2 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator 3 2 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 3 Reconnect 4 coaxial cables 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustmentsl para 2 95 Perform Frequency Agility Test 2 20 Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK 2 104 2 30 REPLACE 78A1A6 RECEIVER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Casel para 2 22 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 Dis
108. DMM negative lead to A14GL 1 Set Signal Generator RF output to 150 MHz 2 206 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 113 POWER METER ADJUSTMENT Continued TM 11 6625 3245 40 6 Connect external test equipment as shown 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 0000 polo oo oooo 0 0000 O 0000000 0000000 00 0000000 00 0000000000 MEASURING RECEIVER SIGNAL GENERATOR COAXIAL COUPLER 10 dB ATTENUATOR AMPLIFIER CE2FO257 Use following formula to calculate and record power level at 0 2 1400 2000 and 10000 mW Log milliwatts X 10 Coupler Attenuation dBm Power Level Reference Measuring Receiver RF Power reading to TRUE attenuation of 10 dB Attenuation Set Signal Generator RF output to OFF Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 137 dBm Press ENTER Key Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 150 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to ANT Press ENTER Key to select T R Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to PWR Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 mW Press ENTER Key Verify O V 1 mV DMM Remove aluminum tape from A14 Power Termination and adjust A14A1R21 as required Pre
109. DRY ROPE OR SOME OTHER INSULATING MATERIAL SEND FOR HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER THE INJURED PERSON IS FREE OF CONTACT WITH THE SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK MOVE THE PERSON A SHORT DISTANCE AWAY AND IMMEDIATELY START ARTIFICIAL RESUSCITATION Change 2 a TM 11 6625 3245 40 WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Never work on electronic equipment unless there is another person nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment and who is competent in administering first aid When technicians are aided by operators they must warn them about dangerous areas Whenever possible the power supply to the equipment must be shut off before beginning work on the equipment Take particular care to ground every capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential When working inside the equipment after the power has been turned off always ground every part before touching it Be careful not to contact high voltage connections of 115 volt or 220 volt ac input when installing or operating this equipment Whenever the nature of the operation permits keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through vital organs of the body WARNING Do not be misled by the term LOW VOLTAGE Potentials as low as 50 volts may cause death under certain conditions For First Aid refer to
110. F4 appears Press Meters F4 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 SINAD Press ENTER Key 10 Verify SINAD Meter reads gt 10 dB 2 80 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RECEIVER SENSITIVITY Continued 11 Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 5 tiV with FM Modulation 1 kHz tone 3 kHz Deviation 12 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM2 Press ENTER Key 13 Verify SINAD Meter reads gt 10 dB 14 Disconnect external test equipment RECEIVER SELECTIVITY 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 60 dBm with no modulation Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN Connector 4 Press RCVR MODE Key 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 80 MHz Press ENTER Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM4 Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Deviation Meter Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 kHz Press ENTER Key 8 Press Ret F6 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to OdB Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 10 11 13 14 15 dB Press ENTER Key A
111. FM 4 25 11 b Change 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Af gt gt Wi CAUTION Wy THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SENSITIVE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD USE ESD PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN TOUCHING REMOVING OR INSERTING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ESD CLASS 1 NOTE The symbol for static sensitive devices in military inventory is as depicted in the caution block above GENERAL HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR ESD ITEMS e USE WRIST GROUND STRAPS OR MANUAL e PERIODICALLY CHECK GROUNDING PROCEDURES CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE OF GROUNDING SYSTEM e KEEP ESD ITEMS IN PROTECTIVE COVERING WHEN NOT IN USE e USE ONLY METALIZED SOLDER SUCKERS e GROUND ALL ELECTRICAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT e HANDLE ESD ITEMS ONLY IN PROTECTED AREAS MANUAL GROUNDING PROCEDURES e MAKE CERTAIN EQUIPMENT IS e TOUCH PACKAGE OF REPLACEMENT ESD POWERED DOWN ITEM TO GROUND BEFORE OPENING TOUCH GROUND PRIOR TO REMOVING ESD TOUCH GROUND PRIOR TO INSERTING ITEMS REPLACEMENT ESD ITEMS ESD PROTECTIVE PACKAGING AND LABELING e INNER COVERING OF ANTISTATIC MATERIAL WITH OUTER WRAP OF EITHER TYPE 1 ALUMINIZED MATERIAL OR CONDUCTIVE PLASTIC FILM OR HYBRID LAMINATED BAGS HAVING AN INTERIOR OF ANTISTATIC MATERIAL WITH AN OUTER METALIZED LAYER e LABEL WITH SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC SYMBOL AND CAUTION NOTE Change2 c TM 11 6625 3245 40 CAUTION Devices such as CMOS MNOS NMOS VMOS HMOS thin film resistors PMOS and
112. FP 73 2 175 1 69 1 68 73 2 173 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A anne 2 179 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Alignment 2 209 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Alignment Procedure 2 211 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Alignment 2 4 000 2 213 Deviation Meter Adjustment 2 191 Digital Multimeter Adjustment 2 205 Distortion Meter Adjustment skinsa EER E EA A E E aA TA E TAEA E AESA 2 196 EM Adjustment am ae el E 2 189 Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment sse ener enne 2 184 Gen Modulation 2 198 Gen Output Level 2 186 Metering DVM tenens en trn a nnn nns 2 184 Modulation Meter 2 194 Phase Meter 22444224 2 195 Power Meter Ee des 2 206 Power Supply
113. GRM 1 14B Section Il SERVICE UPON RECEIPT 2 4 SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIEL a Unpacking Special design packing material inside this shipping carton provides maximum protection for Radio Test Set Avoid damaging carton and packing material during equipment unpacking Use the following steps for unpacking Radio Test Set Cut and remove sealing tape on carton top and open carton Grasp Radio Test Set firmly while restraining shipping carton and lift equipment and packing vertically CAUTION Two people are required to lift and or carry Radio Test Set Place Radio Test Set and end cap packing on a suitable flat clean and dry surface Remove protective plastic bag from Radio Test Set Place desiccant bags back inside protective plastic bag Place protective plastic bag and end cap packing material inside shipping carton Return shipping carton to supply system b Checking Unpacked Equipment Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment If equipment has been damaged report damage on SF 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD Check equipment against packing slip to see if shipment is complete Report all discrepancies in accordance with instructions of DA Pam 750 8 Check to see whether equipment has been modified 2 5 PRELIMINARY SERVICING AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT Refer to TM 11 6625 3245 12 Chapter 3 Section 2 for this information Change 2 2 5 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section
114. LO Functional Block Diagram 1 33 TM 11 6625 3245 40 15 78A1A6 Receiverl fig 1 17 The 10 7 MHz IF Signal passed to the Receiver from A12 Receive IF is initially filtered by an IF Bandpass Filter The filter is selected by control signals from the A22 RF that are enabled by the 19 Processor If no filter selection signal is active the 10 7 MHz Signal passes through a 500 kHz Bandwidth Bandpass Filter The control signals select either a 30 kHz Bandwidth Bandpass filter with the 30 kHz BANDWIDTH CONTROL Signal or a 3 kHz Bandwidth Bandpass Filter with the 3 kHz BANDWIDTH CONTROL Signal Once filtered the 10 7 MHz IF Signal then sent to a Mixer and mixed with an 11 125 MHz Phase Locked Oscillator to obtain a 425 kHz IF Signal The 425 kHz signal is passed to the A25 Digitizer and A23 Counter as well as Demodulation Circuitry The Demodulation Circuitry produces the following signals Demod FM Demod SSB Demod FM Data Demod Signal Strength Signal 1 34 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A6J3 COUNTER 30 kHz BPF x 1 I MOTHERBOARD I nass 500 kHz BPF AMDEMOD RECEIVE IF FM DEMOD DEMOD DEMOD SSB DEMOD 1 FM DATA MOTHERBOARD SIG LVL METER 30 kHz BANDWIDTH 3 kHz BANDWIDTH CONTROL 6 5 DIGITIZER AGJA 2ND LO CE2FO210 11 125 MHz Figure 1 17 Receiver Functional Block Diagram 1 35 TM
115. MHz 450 Hz with Frequency Counter Ifincorrect perform Steps 915 If correct perform Step 15 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu 2 183 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 97 VCXO ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 12 VCXO Calibration Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to least significant digit Use DATA SCROLL Keys to adjust for 900 MHz on Frequency Counter Press ENTER Key Press AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment 2 98 METERING DVM ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the parameters for the internal DVM AIN 5 Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Locate 26 Monitor Control fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 4 0960 Vdc 10 002 Vdc with DMM negative lead at A26TP3 fig FO16 Sheet 3 of 3 and positive lead at A26TP2 Adjust A26R18 as required Disconnect test equipment 2 99 FUNC GEN LEVEL AND VRMS METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the output of the Audio Function Generators and the VRMS Meter on the Audio Function Generator screen 1 Remove A24 Function Generator para 233 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 ir Appendix 116625324512 in Test Set Press POWER Switc
116. MOSFET used in many equipments can be damaged by static voltages present in most repair facilities Most of the components contain internal gate protection circuits that are partially effective but sound maintenance practice and the cost of equipment failure in time and money dictate careful handling of all electrostatic sensitive components The following precautions should be observed when handling all electrostatic sensitive components and units containing such components STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 8 CAUTION Failure to observe all of these precautions can cause permanent damage to the electrostatic sensitive device This damage can cause the device to fail immediately or at a later date when exposed to an adverse environment Turn off and or disconnect all power and signal sources and loads used with the unit Place the unit on grounded conductive work surfaces Ground the repair operator using a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 1 M series resistor to protect the operator Ground any tools including soldering equipment that will contact the unit Contact with the operator s hand provides a sufficient ground for tools that are otherwise electrically isolated All electrostatic sensitive replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in the original shipping container until installed When these devices and assemblies are removed f
117. Power Test Set for reference Verify Test Set Power Meter reading matches Power Meter reading 20 Disconnect external test equipment OSCILLOSCOPE VERTICAL ACCURACY 1 2 3 gt Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect external test equipment as shown O 0000 oo oooo 0 OO 0000 O o 0000000 D000000 OO Oooooa 000000000 SCOPE IN CALIBRATOR Press AF MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Oscilloscope Operation Screen 2 88 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued OSCILLOSCOPE VERTICAL ACCURACY Continued 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPUT Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 GND Press ENTER Key Press More F6 until Scale F1 appears Press Scale Fl Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 2 V Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to VERT Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to center trace Press ENTER Key Set Calibrator for 4 Vdc reading Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPUT Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move c
118. RS 232 Monitor Screen Press RF GEN MODE Key Press each FIELD SELECT Key and verify cursor moves with each key pressed Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 MHz Press ENTER Key Press each DATA SCROLL Keys and verify cursor moves with each key pressed Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Oscilloscope Operation Screen Change 1 2 67 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued KEYBOARD Continued 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Press HOLD SCRN Key and verify Trace stops all motion and HOLD Window appears over F3 and F4 definitions Press MTRS MODE Key and AUX F6 Press STORE Key and verify Store Parameters Menu appears Press AUX F5 Press RCL Key and verify Recall Parameters Menu appears Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults Press ENTER Key and verify 10 Factory Defaults Recall prompt appears Press ENTER Key and AUX F5 DATA SCROLL SPINNER Press RF GEN MODE Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key 3 Rotate DATA SCROLL Spinner cw and ccw and verify value increases and decreases SQUELCH 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN Connector 4
119. Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 A28AT1 Pin 32a Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 A28AT1 Pin 32b Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 Locate A14 Power Terminatior fig FO P Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 13 5 1 Vdc with DMM at A14FL2 FO 11 e incorrect replace A22 RF I O para 2 34 Remove A28 Attenuatof 2 70 Reconnect A28J1 A28J2 A28J3 and A28J4 FO 17 Locate A13 Generator fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify level is 11 5 dBm 2 dB with Measuring Receiver at A13P6 fig FO 10 If incorrect replace A13 Generator IF 2 68 Connect coaxial cable between A13P6 and A28J5 FO 1 7 Verify level is 8 to 11 dBm with Measuring Receiver at A28J6 e If incorrect remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and replace A28AT1 e f correct replace A14 Power Termination 2 71 Disconnect W13 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W1J fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 20 dBm e f incorrect replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 2 47 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 16 POWER METER Continued 18 19 Reconnect W13 Disconnect 12 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W12 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 5 dBm e If incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63
120. Replace 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power 2 145 Replace 78A1A30 Rear Panel 2 136 Replace 78 an nee 2 153 Replace SATITA78 AMB er eR Di pecans 2 75 2 158 Replace 8A2 Top Case entstehen 2 97 Replace 78A3 Bottom 2 23 12 98 Replace 83A1A1 Bottom rica Replace 83AIA2A1 nn 2 93 2 177 Replace 83A1A4A1 UUT inneren rre 2 165 Replace 83 1 4 2 Audio CONNECHOT oe ioci een 2 166 Replace 83A TAA4JTA SSATAAJTB a Replace 83A1A4J9A 83A1 A4J9B tents sess nist nn nnns Replace 83A1A5A1 Rear Panel 2 oia rra aaa 2 170 A An 2 171 Replace SSA TAS WS Replace 8 Replace 83A1A7 Interface sense Replace 83A1A8 PEIOCeSSOF atada ralla o 2 3 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Para Page Replace 83A1A9 External RE Null Adj strrignt na ea Scope Adjustment
121. Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 40 dBm with FM Modulation 1 kHz tone 2 5 kHz deviation 5 Press RCVR MODE Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 80 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to OdB Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 40 dB Press ENTER Key 8 Press SQLCH Key and verify Squelch Indicator Bar appears with white inner bar indicating amount of rejection 9 Turn DATA SCROLL Spinner ccw until white bar disappears and verify readings are present for Receiver Operation Screen 2 68 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued SQUELCH Continued 10 Turn DATA SCROLL Spinner cw until white bar extends from limit to limit and verify readings are replaced by 11 Turn DATA SCROLL Spinner ccw until white bar disappears Press ENTER Key 12 Disconnect external test equipment AF GEN 1 FREQUENCY AND LEVEL ACCURACY 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Press AF MODE Key 4 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Press ENTER Key to select On 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 7070 V Press ENTER Key 6 Connect external test equipment as shown 0000 900
122. Signal Enable and DATA TO DMM Signal This data is passed to the Serial To Parallel Relay Driver and the Serial To Parallel Converter Both sets of circuitry convert the serial data into parallel format This data is used to control CURRENT RANGE SELECT Switch V OHMS AMPS SELECT Switch VOLTS OHMS SELECT Switch OHMS OHMS SELECT Switch VOLTAGE RANGE SELECT Switch OHMS TO VOLTAGE CONVERTER AC DC SELECT Switch VOLTS OHMS SELECT Switch 1V 1V REF SELECT Switch The path taken by the signal to be measured is dependent on the SELECT Switches Different paths are taken based on whether the measurement is voltage current or resistance The path for measuring current starts at the DMM AMP Connector Signals then pass through the CURRENT RANGE SELECT circuitry where the current signal is passed through a fixed resistance and a voltage level is extracted The V OHMS AMPS SELECT Switch passes the analog voltage The analog voltage then has two paths available If the measurement to be made is for ac current measurement the RMS voltage passes through the RMS TO DC CONVERTER converting the RMS voltage to a dc voltage If the analog voltage is already a dc voltage dc current measurement is required then the RMS TO DC CONVERTER is bypassed The AC DC SELECT Switch passes the required analog signal This analog signal is routed to the VOLTS OHMS SELECT Switch where the signal is passed to the A D Converter and the dc voltage level is converted to
123. T C O N N SHIFT and ENTER Keys Press 1 on DATA ENTRY Keypad Test is performed automatically with user instructions given as needed External test equipment to be used includes a Function Generator and Oscilloscope Disconnect external test equipment Change 1 2 91 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 20 FREQUENCY AGILITY TEST DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to verify the Radio Test Set synthesizer response is in specification after A7 3rd LO A9 90 MHz Generator or A10 1st LO has been replaced 1 Connect external test equipment as shown 090 oooo 0 O 0000000 0000000 OO 0000000 00 000000000 ee 000000 MIC ACC T R MODULATION DOMAIN ANALYZER MIC ACC TEST CABLE CE2FO260 2 Set Modulation Domain Analyzer controls Function Frequency Channel A Vertical Center Span Center 87 MHz Span 2 kHz Trigger Ext Edge Arm Only Rising Edge Time Base 300 Ls Reference Left Delay Os Panorama Off Display vs Time Axes Connect Real Time On Persistence Single Histogram Accumulate Off Time Markers Off Freq Markers Off vs Time Histogram Accumulate Off Sampling Auto Interval at Ctr Auto Clicker On Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press RCVR MODE Key and SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Set Rcvr Freq P
124. and A2U1 A2R26 and A15V1 A2R26A2Q9 and 2010 A2R26 and A15V1 12 Perform A15 7005 7840 600 Adjustment Procedure para 2 114 2 1778A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 TEST DESCRIPTION Isolates problem in A15 CRT to malfunctioning PC Board tube fuse or wire harness WARNING Voltages in excess of 100 Vdc are present in the A15 CRT NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from fable 2 1 another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Remove A15 para 2 42 2 Remove top cover from A15 CRT para 2 43 3 Verify A15A2F1 fig FO 13 Sheet 2 of 2 is not blown e If incorrect replace A15A2F1 2 47 2 62 11 6625 3245 40 2 17 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 TEST Continued 4 Verify continuity of A15W1 with DMM If fault is present replace A15W1 para 2 44 5 Reconnect A1A1W2 FO P Sheet 2 of 5 to A15 CRT and set POWER Switch to On 6 Verify 1 5 0 5 with DMM on A15A1 Video Sheet 2 of 2 Q112 Emitter 0116 Emitter 0120 Emitter voltage is incorrect replace A15A1 Video para 2 43 7 Verify voltages with DMM and High Voltage Probe at locations on A15A2 Deflection Socket Pin 3 500 150 Pin 6 22 VAC 5 VAC Pin 8 4 3 VRMS 1 5 V e voltage is i
125. cable 1 oP ONS CE2FO147 END OF TASK 2 96 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 22 REPLACE 78A2 TOP CASE DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with case assemblies removed CAUTION Do not disconnect or remove any assemblies in Radio Test Set unless instrument is unplugged NOTE After any screw nut is loosened or removed 5 times the use of Torque Seal item 11 is required PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Perform required Adjustmentg para 2 95 REMOVE Disconnect dc power cable 1 and SCSI cable 2 Loosen 4 captive screws 3 Remove 2 screws 6 and drawbar 7 Remove screw 8 Slide 78A1A2 Rear Panel 4 toward rear Remove 78A2 Top Case 5 Oo gie eom INSTALL Install 78 2 Top Case 5 Slide 78A1A2 Rear Panel 4 toward front Tighten 4 captive screws 3 Install screw 8 Install 2 screws 6 and drawbar 7 Reconnect SCSI cable 2 and do power cable 1 SOI 6 Y ED pm U CE2FO015 END OF TASK 2 97 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 23 REPLACE 78A3 BOTTOM CASE DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with case assemblies removed NOTE After any screw nut is loosened or removed 5 times the use of Torque Seal Appendix item 11 is required PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 REMOVE Loos
126. cable connectors 2 3 Loosen 4 captive screws 3 4 Remove 78A1A11 2nd LO 4 INSTALL Install 78A1A11 2nd LO 4 Tighten 4 captive screws 3 Reconnect 2 wire cable connectors 2 Reconnect 11 coaxial connectors 1 CE2FO041 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 142 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 63 REPLACE 78A1A10 1st LO DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE Disconnect 4 coaxial cable connectors 1 Disconnect wire cable connector 2 Loosen 3 captive screws 3 Remove 78A1A10 1st LO 4 INSTALL Install 78A1A10 1st LO 4 Tighten 3 captive screws 3 Reconnect wire cable connector 2 Reconnect 4 coaxial cable connectors 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Perform Frequency Agility Test 2 20 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 143 2 64 REPLACE 78A1A10W1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Case para 2 23 Remove 78A1A10 1st LO para 2 63 TM 11 6625 3245 40
127. fail perform Steps 8 14 Test 24 Extended If Failed replace SCSI Bus Memory RAM CPU RAM Memory ROM CPU ROM Time of Day Clock Wait State Generator UUT Interface UUT Interface 4 8 Connect Serial Interface Cable from Test Set RS 232 Connector to Test Adapter RS 232 Connector 9 Press MTRS MODE Key and AUX F6 10 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 External 1 0 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 RS 232 port Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key to select On Set following Fields Operation Mode Off Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Xon Xoff Echo Off 11 Press ESC Key twice 12 Press TERM F5 and ENTER Key 13 Verify CRT displays within 1 second e If incorrect perform Steps 15 21 14 Press SHIFT T E S T C N SHIFT and ENTER Keys Verify results Displayed Test Result If incorrect replace AS Processor para 2 91 AS Processor para 2 91 As Memory A6 Memory Perform Steps 15 21 AS Processor para 2 91 AS Processor para 2 91 A8 Processor A9 External 1 O A9 External I O 78A1A27 External Perform Steps 15 21 bxtest8ram8cpu passed test8rom8cpu passed test8ram8mem passed testarom8mem passed test8ram8add O test8waits passed test8tod passed test8uut passed test8extio passed test8scsi passed ptest 0 e f correct replace A9 External I O para 2 89
128. for Radio Test Set prior to performing the Performance Test 2 66 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued INITIALIZED SETUP 1 Perform Turn On 2 8 TM 11 6625 3245 12 2 Perform Self Test TM 11 6625 3245 12 INTENSITY CONTRAST Turn CRT INTENSITY Contrast cw and cow through full range of control and verify CRT Intensity changes with control movement from a dim display to full brightness KEYBOARD 10 11 12 13 14 Press MODE Keys and verify Operation Screen appears RF GEN RF Generator Operation Screen RCVR Receiver Operation Screen DPLX Duplex Operation Screen AF GEN AF Generator Operation Screen SCOPE ANLZ Oscilloscope or Spectrum Analyzer Operation Screen MTRS Meters Operation Screen Press AUX F6 and verify Auxiliary Functions Menu appears Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 External Press ENTER Key and verify Configure Menu appears Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 RS 232 port Press ENTER Key and verify Configure RS 232 Menu appears Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 Echo Press ENTER Key to select On Press TERM F5 and verify RS 232 Monitor Screen appears Press SHIFT Key and verify S appears between F1 and F2 definitions Press Alphabetic Keys in sequence and verify each letter appears on RS 232 Monitor Screen Press F1 F2 and F5 and verify special characters appear on
129. of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Verify negative pulse from 0 to 5 Vdc with Oscilloscope at A26J2 Pin 3 Sheet 3 of 3 when DATA SCROLL Spinner is rotated Replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Verify 0 5 V logic switching with Oscilloscope at A26J2 Pin 33 when DATA SCROLL Spinner is rotated e incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 14 AF GEN 1 Frequency and Level Accuracy Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Remove A24 Function Generat r para 2 3B and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Verify 1 kHz 1 Hz with Frequency Counter at A24P2 Pin 2B Sheet 2 of 3 Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Verify 0 707 VRMS 396 with DMM at A24P2 Pin 2B Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Install A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Remove A3 Monitor and install PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 ir Appendix of in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cabl Appendix in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Verify 0 707 VRMS 3 with DMM at A3P1 Pin 1A fig FO 4 e If incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 correct replace A17A1 Connector para 2 54 2 13 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR I
130. only for AUDIO OUT Connector DUPLEX OUT Connector replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 f warning tone does not sound and input overload message is not displayed for AUDIO OUT Connector ANTENNA IN Connector and AUDIO OUT Connector DUPLEX OUT Connector replace A22 RF para 2 34 32 BER Meter Failure Step 1 Remove A24 Function Generator para 2 33 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 Appendix off TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Step 2 Press MTRS MODE Key Step 3 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 Bit Error Rate BER Func Press ENTER Key Step 4 Press Run F5 2 23 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 32 BER Meter Failure Continued Step 5 Verify series of pulses at 5 0 5 with Oscilloscope at A24P2 Pin 10 fig FO 16j Sheet 2 of 3 as shown A BB A e If incorrect replace A24 Function Generator 2 33 e If correct replace Monitor para 2 31 33 DUPLEX OUT Connector Level Failure Step 1 Remove 28 Attenuator 2 70 Step 2 Connect Signal Generator output to Measuring Receiver Set Signal Generator for 100 MHz Set Measuring Receiver to RF Level Adjust Signal Generator output for 110 dBm on Measuring Receiver Step 3 Locate A14 Power Termination Sheet 1 of 5 Connect Signal Generator to A
131. para 2 54 If correct replace A24 Function Generator 2 33 20 RF GEN Level Flatness Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Locate A28 Attenuator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Verify signals switch high and low with Oscilloscope at A28AT1 Pin 1 fig FO 17 when Test Set attenuation is varied from 1 to O dB If constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U2 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot 2802 A28CR1 Verify signals switch high and low with Oscilloscope at A28AT1 Pin 2 when Test Set attenuation is varied from 2 to 1 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot A28U1 28 1 Verify signals switch high and low with Oscilloscope at A28AT1 Pin 4 fig FO 17 when Test Set attenuation is varied from 4 to 3 dB e f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 f constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR2 2 15 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 20 RF GEN Level Flatness Failure Continued Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Verify signals switch high and low with Oscilloscope at A28AT1 Pin 8 FO 17 when Test Set attenuation is varied from 8 to 7 dB
132. shown 1V DIV 10 uS DIV e If incorrect replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 2 34 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 12 CRT ABNORMALITY TEST Continued 9 Verify 0 to 4 V square waveform continuous pulse trains are present Verify approximately 16 7 ms between pulses Verify pulse width of approximately 760 As and 0 offset top of waveform is random looking modulation with Oscilloscope at External Video Connector Pin 9 Vertical Sync as shown 5 MS DIV e lf incorrect replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 e f correct perform A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Test para 2 16 or A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Test para 2 17 2 13 KEYBOARD KEY TEST DESCRIPTION This test checks the status of each key on the A17A2 Keyboard through the A23 Counter connection A23P2 on the A1A1 Motherboard NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from table 2 1 or another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Remove A23 Counter para 2 25 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 ih Appendix B of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set 2 Verify gt 10kQ open initially and 100 between pins with DMM at following locations FO 18 Sheet 2 of 3 when keys are pressed 2 35 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 13 KEYBOARD KEY TEST Continued
133. to select ACC Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select ACC ranges and verify values on DMM Range Calibrator DMM Value 20 mA 15 mA at 100 Hz 15 mA 1 01 mA 200 mA 150 mA at 100 Hz 150 mA 10 1 mA 2A 1 5 Aat 100 Hz 1 5 101 mA e value is incorrect replace A8A1 DMM Relay 2 61 Connect DMM to DMM V Q Connector and DMM COM Connector and verify 5 5 V 0 5 V e incorrect replace A8A1 DMM Relay 2 61 e f correct replace ABA2 DMM Digital para 2 60 Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 200 mA Press ENTER Key Set Calibrator for 150 mA Verify DMM displays 150 mA 10 1 mA e If incorrect perform Steps 19 20 e f correct replace A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 Remove A8 DMM para 2 58 Remove A8A2 DMM Digita para 2 60 and A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 Connect DMM across A8A1 fig FO 5 and verify 5 e If incorrect replace A8A1 F1 2 59 e f correct replace A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Ohm Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select 200 OHM range Set Calibrator to 100 Q and verify 100 10 on DMM e If incorrect perform Steps 29 30 Remove A8 DMM para 2 58 Remove A8A2 DMM Digita para 2 60 and A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 61 Reconnect A8A1W2P
134. to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 11 FM Calibration Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to least significant digit Use DATA SCROLL Keys to adjust Frequency Offset for 0 Vdc 440 mVdc on Oscilloscope Press ENTER Key Press AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment 2 190 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 104 DEVIATION METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Deviation Meter for the Receive function Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect external test equipment as shown ANTENNA IN 0000 ofo ODOO OO ODOO O oo00000 ODODOOO OO O000000 OO 0000000000 POWER SPLITTER SIGNAL GENERATOR MEASURING RECEIVER CE2FO254 Set Signal Generator output for 121 100000 MHz at 0 dBM with no modulation Set Measuring Receiver Measurement to FM Detector to Peak and LowPass Filter to 3 kHz Adjust Signal Generator for FREQ ERR reading of lt 10 Hz Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 121 1000 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to OdB Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 40 dB Press ENTER Key Press SETUP K
135. to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Commander U S Army Aviation and Missile Command AMSAM MMC MA NP Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 A reply will be furnished to you You may also provide DA Form 2028 information to AMCOM via email fax or the World Wide Web Our fax number is DSN 788 6546 or Commercial 256 842 6546 Our email address is 2028 Gredstone army mil Instructions for sending an electronic 2028 may be found at the back of this manual immediately preceding the hardcopy 2028 For the World Wide Web use https amcom2028 redstone army mil HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION This document has been reviewed for the presence of solvents containing hazardous materials as defined by the EPCRA 302 and 313 lists by the Engineering Environment and Logistics Oversight Office As of the base document through Change 1 dated 1 August 1996 all references to solvents containing hazardous materials have been removed from this document by substitution with non hazardous or less hazardous materials where possible OZONE DEPLETING CHEMICAL INFORMATION This document has been reviewed for the presence of Class ozone depleting chemicals by the Engineering Environment and Logistics Oversight Office As of the base document through Change 1 dated 1 August 1996 all references to Class ozone depleting chemicals have been removed from t
136. to move cursor to 13 Gen Modulation Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 FM Deviation 20 kHz Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to set FM Deviation on Measuring Receiver to 20 kHz plus Peak Residual FM reading recorded in Step 23 Press ENTER Key 33 34 Modulation setting is out of tolerance and adjustment range is 195 or gt 205 perform Steps 33 46 If FM Modulation setting is in tolerance perform Steps 35 46 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 200 Press ENTER Key Press RF GEN MODE Key Adjust FM MOD ADJ for minimum amplitude of carrier lt dBc on Analyzer Display as shown LEVEL 0 0 dBm SOURCE In 1 DEVIATION ET 50 tH l AFFREQ 905 8Hz Be WAVE 7 Sine EAS 22 2 SINAD 1 kHz 16 0 dB Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 13 Gen Modulation Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 FM Deviation 80 kHz Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to set FM Deviation on Measuring Receiver to 80 kHz plus Peak Residual FM reading recorded in Step 23 Press ENTER Key Press RF GEN MODE Key Set Measuring Receiver Measurement to PM and High Pass Filter to 300 Hz 2 200 2 109 42 43 45 2 110 TM 11 6625 3245 40 GEN MODULATION ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOU
137. wig 20 wii wa W13 W7 Wit CE2FO070 CE2FO070 Figure FO 2 Radio Test Set 78A1 and 83A1 Assembly and Cable Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 2 of 5 FP 5 FP 6 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 as CAUTION c CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD ze ASW3P1 oude dif 2900 i 0009 000000000 0900 00000000 00000000 tiva gt NE I A OBERE Co JE T ra E xd t QNSE enc A DESIGNATOR NOMENCLATURE C A3 RF AMPLIFIER E 1 E Mi FRONT PANEL AS REAR PANEL 2 AS MEMORY A7 UUT INTERFACE nit M AB PROCESSOR 1 A9 EXTERNAL VO 7 E cs s Ag 220000000000900000000 550500900000000006000 2900000009000000000009 A c rar pry 000000000000000000000 66 665 000000 0 5 000200000009000000000 20000000000000000000 _ 2 00090000000000000000G 996500000 o a E N 7 0 E Ting 2 6 M amp C 2 2 4 ja T Tu _ NA 5 CEZFO232 CE2FO232 Figure FO 2 Radio Test Set 78A1 and 83A1 Assembly and Cable Locator and Interconnect Diagram Sheet 3 of 5 FP 7 FP 8 blank Q x dy ws
138. 0 Hz Replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 Reconnect W12 Disconnect W13 from A13 Generator IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Frequency Counter to W13 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Verify 88 0001 MHz 44 Hz e If incorrect replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 If correct replace All 1 2nd LO para 2 62 2 17 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 22 RF GEN Level Accuracy Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Locate A28 Attenuator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 1 with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 1 when Test Set attenuation is setto 1 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot 2802 A28CR1 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 1 Vdc with DMM at 28 1 Pin 2 when Test Set attenuation is set to 2 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR3 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 Vdc 1 Vdc with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 4 when Test Set attenuation is set to 4 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR3 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltag
139. 00 VAC 10 5 mVAC Press ENTER Key If unable to adjust perform Steps 2033 If able to adjust perform Step 34 Press ESC F6 AUX F6 AF GEN MODE Key and SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 AF Gen 1 Setup Press ENTER Key 2 185 2 99 22 34 35 36 37 38 39 TM 11 6625 3245 40 FUNC GEN LEVEL AND VRMS METER ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Wave Form Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 O Lvl Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 AF Gen 2 Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Func Gen 2 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Waveform Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 Lvl Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 Press AF GEN MODE Key Connect DMM positive lead to A24P2 Pin 2B fig FO16 Sheet 2 of 3 and DMM negative lead to A24P2 Pin 6B Set DMM to Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 3 100 V Press ENTER Key Verify 0 000 Vdc with DMM Adjust A24R22 as required Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 2 Press ENTER Key to select Off Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select Off Verify 0 000 Vdc with DMM Adjust A24R23 as required Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to WAVE GEN 1 Press ENTER Key
140. 09000 0000000 0000000 000000000 AUDIO OUT DIGITAL MULTIMETER FREQUENCY COUNTER CE2FO183 7 Verify 1000 0 Hz 1 Hz on Frequency Counter 0 707 VRMS 13 on DMM 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Scale Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 500 mV Press ENTER Key 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Sweep Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 us Press ENTER Key Verify sine wave on Oscilloscope 10 Disconnect external test equipment Change 1 2 69 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued AF GEN 1 DISTORTION THRESHOLD Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Distortion Analyzer to AUDIO OUT Connector Press AF MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key Verify lt 0 25 is displayed on Distortion Analyzer Disconnect external test equipment SPEAKER SPEAKER CONTROL 10 11 12 13 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use
141. 1 2 Remove 78A1A8F2 and 78A1A8F3 2 3 Remove 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 60 or 2 61 4 Remove 4 para 2 60 or 2 61 5 Remove 78A1A8A1F1 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A8A1F1 3 2 Install 4 screws para 2 60 or 2 61 3 Install 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay para 2 60 or 2 61 4 Install 78A1A8F2 and 78 2 5 Install 2 fuse caps 1 d DETAIL FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A8 DMM para 2 58 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 139 CE2FO139 2 60 REPLACE 78A1A8A2 DMM DIGITAL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom para 2 23 Remove 78A1A8 2 58 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 Remove aluminum tape 5 Remove 2 screws 1 Remove 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay Remove 4 screws 2 Lift up 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital 3 90 Unsolder ribbon connector 4 Remove 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital 3 on INSTALL Install 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital 3 Install and solder ribbon connector 4 Install 4 screws 2 Install 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay Install 2 screws 1 Torque to 4 in lbs Install aluminum tape 5 RODI D CE2FO140 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Inst
142. 14P4 f Step 4 Disconnect Wd fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A14 Power Termination FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Measuring Receiver to W3 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Step 5 Verify 110 dBm 2 5 dBm on Measuring Receiver If incorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 If correct replace A17J2A A17J2B 2 51 34 DTMF Failure Step 1 Press More F6 until RX F2 appears Press RX F2 Step 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 123456789 0 Press ENTER Key Press and hold 1 Key on DATA ENTRY Keypad Step 3 Locate A26 Monitor Control fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Verify 0 50 VAC 0 05 VAC with DMM at A26J2 Pin 44 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 Replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 2 24 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 34 DTMF Failure Continued Step 4 Release 1 Key on DATA ENTRY Keypad Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1111111111 Press ENTER Key Step 5 Press More F6 until TX F2 appears Press TX F2 Step 6 Press More F6 until Decode F2 appears Press Decode F2 Step 7 Press GO Key Step 8 Set Oscilloscope controls Channel 1 Scale 1 V 100 mV with x10 Probe Channel 1 Coupling DC Channel 2 Scale 1 V 100 mV with x10 Probe Channel 2 Coupling DC Sweep 500us Trigger Source Channel 1 Trigger Mode Auto Step 9 Connect Oscilloscope Channel 1 to A26J2 Pin 43 Connect Oscilloscope Channel 2 to
143. 16 Power Supply 6 toward front Raise handle 7 and remove 78A1A16 Power Supply 6 INSTALL Install 78AIA16 Power Supply 6 Slide 78A1A16 Power Supply 6 toward rear Install 2 covers 5 Install 2 screws and washers 4 Reconnect wire cable connector 3 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 Reconnect 2 wire cable connectors 1 2 oo 2 126 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 48 REPLACE 78A1A16 POWER SUPPLY Continued 5 TOP VIEW Oe Z S LOO 3 O H ODO O BOTTOM VIEW TEA 55 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 127 2 49 REMOVE 78A1A17 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78 2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE Remove nut 1 Disconnect wire cable connector 2 Remove 8 screws 3 Lift 78AIA17 Front Panel 4 and disconnect Ribbon cable connectors 6 and 2 coaxial cable connectors 7 gt INSTALL 1 Hold 78A1A17 Front Panel 4 and reconnect 2 ribbon cable connectors 6 and 2 coaxial cable connectors 7 2 Install 78A1A17 Fron
144. 16C and 16B 1 A23P2 Pins 15C and 16B A23P2 Pins 14C 16B SHIFT A23P2 Pins 13C and 16B RCL f any reading is incorrect replace A17A2 Keyboardl para 2 54 e readings are correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 2 36 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST DESCRIPTION This test isolates faults based upon failures in Self Test NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from table 2 1 or another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test Page 2 OF DAY CLOCK de atada 2 37 rio GE E KE dada 2 38 8 2 39 9 AUDIO SINAD 2 40 10 SCOPE PERIOD AND 2 41 11 AFCOUNTER 2 42 UM AIMER 2 43 Reid da a CER 2 44 idi P 2 44 15 PHASELOCK LOOPS u an ASE A a E A E 2 45 16 POWER METER u ana a a ee 2 46 17 ANALYZER LEVEL uses aan arent e hin hang cited ada 2 48 18 MODULATION ai ii here 2 49 19 SYNTHESIZER 88 2 50 20 RF COUNTER 2 50 21 226552 tds 2 51 22 2
145. 17 Front Panel para 2 49 REMOVE 1 Tag and unsolder 2 wires 1 2 Remove wire connector assembly 2 3 Remove nut and lock washer 3 4 Remove 78A1A17J8 4 and cap 5 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A17J8 4 and cap 5 2 Install nut and lock washer 3 3 Install wire connector assembly 2 4 Install and solder 2 wires 1 BACK SIDE CE2FO145 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78AIA17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 132 2 54 REPLACE 78A1A17A1 CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapterl para 2 21 Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A17 Front Panel para 2 49 REMOVE 1 Remove 9 screws 1 2 Remove 2 nuts and 2 lock washers 2 3 Remove 78A1A17A1 Connector 3 INSTALL 1 Install 783A1A17A1 Connector 3 2 Install 9 screws 1 3 Install 2 nuts and 2 lock washers 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom para 223 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 133 2 55 REPLACE 78A1A17A2 KEYBOARD TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure cove
146. 1A1 Motherboard 7 INSTALL Install 78A1A1A1 Motherboard 7 Install 18 screws 6 Install 2 screws and 2 tyraps 5 Reconnect 4 ribbon cable connectors 4 Reconnect 4 wire cable connectors 3 Install video cable panel 2 Install 2 screws 1 2 155 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 74 REPLACE 78A1A1A1 MOTHERBOARD Continued 2 156 2 74 REPLACE 78A1A1A1 MOTHERBOARD Continued FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A12 Receive IF para 2 66 Install 78A1A10 1st LO para 2 63 Install 78A1A8 DMM para 2 58 Install 78A1A16 Power Supply para 2 48 Install 78A1A27 External I O para 2 38 Install 78A1A21 Video Controller para 2 37 Install 78A1A19 Processor para 2 36 Install 78A1A20 2 Install 78A1A22 2 34 Install 78A1A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Install 78A1A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Install 78A1A3 Monitor para 2 31 Install 78A1A6 Receiver para 2 30 Install 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator 2 29 Install 78A1A7 3rd LO para 2 28 Install 78A1A5 Analyzer RF 2 27 Install 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF para 2 26 Install 78A1A23 Counter PC Board para 2 25 Install 78A1A25 Digitizer PC 2 24 Install 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 157 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 75 REPLACE 78A1J1A 78
147. 1A2 Rear Panel para 2 57 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78 2 Top Case 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 154 2 74 REPLACE 78A1A1A1 MOTHERBOARD TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7842 Top 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78A1A25 Digitizer para 2 24 Remove 78A1A23 Counter para 2 25 Remove 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF para 2 26 Remove 78A1A5 Analyzer RF para 2 27 Remove 78A1A7 3rd LO 2 28 Remove 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 Remove 78A1A6 Receiver para 2 30 Remove 78A1A3 Monitor para 2 31 Remove 78A1A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Remove 78A1A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Remove 78A1A22 RF I O 2 34 Remove 78A1A20 Memory para 2 35 Remove 78A1A19 Processor para 2 36 Remove 78A1A21 Video Controller para 2 37 Remove 78A1A27 External I O para 2 38 Remove 78A1A16 Power Supply 2 48 Remove 78A1A8 2 58 Remove 78A1A10 1st LO para 2 63 Remove 78A1A12 Receive IF para 2 66 REMOVE Remove 2 screws 1 Remove video cable panel 2 Disconnect 4 wire cable connectors 3 Disconnect 4 ribbon cable connectors 4 Remove 2 screws and 2 tyraps 5 Remove 18 screws 6 Remove 78A1A
148. 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A17J2A 78A1A17J2B 2 2 Install nut and lock washer 1 with Loctite 290 Appendix BACK SIDE CE2FO143 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 130 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 52 REPLACE 78A1A17R1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78 2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 e Remove 78AlA17 Front Panel para 2 49 REMOVE 1 Loosen 2 set screws 1 2 Remove knob 2 3 Remove nut 3 4 Remove 78A1A17R1 4 5 Tag and unsolder 2 wires 5 INSTALL 1 Install 78AIA17R1 4 2 Install nut 3 3 Install knob 2 4 Tighten 2 set screws 1 5 Install and solder 2 wires 5 BACK SIDE CE2FO144 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78AIA17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 131 2 53 REPLACE 78A1A17J8 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78 2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 e Remove 78A1A
149. 2 Solder wire on ground lug 2 3 Solder 10 wires to 10 feedthrus 1 D LH E ME K K H 22 LEN gt AAA Sr ett Tee A TX CE2FO134 A TT Ti Ma FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A14 Power Termination para 2 71 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 152 2 73 REPLACE 78A1G1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7842 Top Case para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78A1A2 Rear Panel para 2 57 REMOVE ONOJ S ONZ Disconnect coaxial cable connector 1 Remove tyrap 2 Disconnect filter 3 Disconnect wire cable connector 4 Remove 2 screws 5 Remove 78A1G1 6 Remove 2 nuts and 2 washers 7 Remove bracket 8 from 78A1G1 6 INSTALL ONOAPON gt Install bracket 8 on 78A1G1 6 Install 2 nuts and 2 washers 7 Install 78A1G1 6 Install 2 screws 5 Reconnect wire cable connector 4 Reconnect filter 3 Install tyrap 2 Reconnect coaxial cable connector 1 2 153 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 73 REPLACE 78A1G1 Continued FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A
150. 2 7 Expendable Supplies and Materials List eene enne enne rn cnn B 1 INDEX 6 F Fabrication Instructions for Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Frequency Agility TEST aerarii Ea aE EN nnns Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment General Functional Description essen General Troubleshooting Information Gen Modulation Gen Output Level Keyboard Key 4 0 Maintenance Forms Records and Reports Maintenance Metering DVM Modulation Meter Nomenclature Cross Reference Packaging ria ieu een sehn Performance Test ea eee ite aldo Phase Meter Adjustment Post Repair Replace Adjustments eee Power Faults Test rre Power Meter Power Supply Preliminary Servicing and Adjustment of Equipment Preparation for Storage or
151. 2 97 Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Locate A19 Processor fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 5 05 10 05 Vdc with DMM positive lead at A19RN2 Pin 1 fig FO16 Sheet 1 of 3 and ground lead at chassis ground Locate A16 Power Supply fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and adjust A16A2R37 5 Vdc ADJUST fig FO14 as required Locate All 2nd LO fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 15 05 Vdc f0 05 Vdc with DMM positive lead at A11FL1 Red Wire fig FO8 and negative lead at A11GL1 Black Wire Locate A16 Power Supply fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and adjust A16A2R25 15 ADJUST fig FO14 as required Disconnect test equipment VCXO ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the VCXO used as the 10 MHz reference for the Test Set OX ee Q9 INO N Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Frequency Counter to T R Connector Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 900 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Verify 900
152. 2 Rear Panel None None 78A1A3 Monitor 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment para 2 106 Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment Power Meter Adjustment paza Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment para 2 111 78A1A5 Analyzer RF Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment para 2 111 78A1A6 Receiver 78A1A7 3rd LO 78A1 A8 DMM Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment 2 105 Phase Meter Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment para 2 106 Digital Multimeter Adjustment 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 Gen Modulation Adjustment para 2 109 78A1A10 1st LO Gen Output Level Adjustment RF Null Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment Gen Modulation Adjustment para 2 109 78A1A11 2nd LO VCXO Adjustment Gen Output Level Adjustment Gen Modulation Adjustment 2 109 2 180 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 2 Post Repair Replace Adjustments Continued REPAIRED REPLACED ASSEMBLIES ADJUSTMENT 78A1A12 Receive IF RF Null Adjustment para 2 101 Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustm
153. 230 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK Change 1 2 118 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 43 REPLACE 78A1A15A1 VIDEO DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78 1 15 CRT para 2 42 REMOVE 1 Remove 6 screws with captive washers 1 and top cover 2 2 Remove 2 screws with captive washers 3 3 Raise 78A1A15A1 Video 4 20 disconnect 7 wire cable connectors 5 INSTALL 1 Reconnect 7 wire cable connectors 5 2 Install 78 1 15 1 Video 4 3 Install 2 screws with captive washers 3 4 Install top cover 2 and 6 screws with captive washers 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A15 CRT Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 119 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 44 REPLACE 78A1A15W1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 geere EMOVE NSTALL 5 gt Remove 7842 Top para 2 22 Remove 7843 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78A1A15 CRT 2 42 Remove 78A1A15A1 Video para 2
154. 245 40 2 10 POWER FAULTS TEST Continued 5 Verify gt 1 at A1A1WIP1 Pins 14 and 13 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall assembly if reading is correct A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer A5 Analyzer RF A5 Analyzer RF A7 3rd LO A7 3rd LO A4 Analyzer Log IF A4 Analyzer Log IF Locate Disconnect If incorrect replace Locate A8 FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 andA8A2 DMM Digital Disconnect A8W2P1 FO 5 6 Verify gt 100 at A1A1W3P1 Pins 10 and 13 with DMM when assembly is pulled or disconnected Reinstall assembly or connection if reading is correct 24 Function Generator 2 33 A24 Function Generator A3 Monitor A3 Monitor Receiver para 2 30 A6 Receiver A9 90 MHz Generator A9 90 MHz Generator A22 RF I O A22 RF I O A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer A5 Analyzer RF A5 Analyzer RF A7 3rd LO A7 3rd LO A4 Analyzer Log IF A4 Analyzer Log IF Locate Disconnect If incorrect replace Locate FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 andA8A2 DMM Digital Disconnect A8W2P1 FO 5 7 Verify gt 100 Q at A1AIW1P1 Pins 16 and 15 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall assembly if reading is correct A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer A23 Counter A23 Counter A26 Monitor Control A26 Monitor Control A24 Function Generator para 2 33 A24 Function Generator A22 RF I O A22 RF 8 Verify gt 15 at A1A1WIP1 Pins 12 and 15 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall
155. 2FO116 AS REAR PANEL E GNO GND GND SPARE FP 63 FP 64 blank A leo ee RED u E gx 1 GND 14 87 UUT INTERFACE PROCESSOR prora GND GND GND SPARE E EXTERNAL VO DIGITAL GND ta GND AS MEMORY GND GND Los 45V 5 DIGITAL SV 54 DIGITAL 5Y 5 45V 3A E 159 15V DIGITAL 1v 15 15V I 15 Hand GND 10 AND DIGITAL GND 10A GND GND 194 DIGITAL GND 10A H GND GND f 45V 294 5 DIGITAL 6 284 oV 5 29A DIGITAL 29 5Y GND 31A DIGITAL GHD 31A GND GNO 314 DIGITAL GNO 31A GNO Fano 295 Jeno DIGITAL GND 298 GND GND 298 DIGITAL 298 GNO 7 NC 15 NC 15 NC aa NC 1809 1809 4a mas NC 5V RESERVED SVRESERVED NC SV RESERVED NC 5v RESERVED NG DROS 6A DROS NC 0806 NC ows
156. 3 Sheet 2 of 2 Verify voltage is 10 6 Vdc Adjust A15A2R803 B ADJ as required 6 Adjust black raster so as to be slightly visible by means of A15A2R338 7 Verify black raster is in center of CRT screen horizontally Adjust A15A2R332 H CENTER as required 8 Rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully cw 9 Verify picture is not rolling horizontally Adjust A15A2R310 H HOLD as required 10 Verify screen is centered horizontally Adjust A15A2R314 H POSI as required 11 Verify Width of screen is 5 3 in 135 mm Adjust A15A2L304 H WIDTH as required 12 Verify Screen is not rolling vertically Adjust A15A2R207 V HOLD as required 13 Verify 600 with DMM and High Voltage Probe at A15A2G2 Adjust SCREEN on A15A2T302 as required 2 211 2 115 25 26 28 29 30 31 TM 11 6625 3245 40 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued Verify length from top to bottom of screen is 3 75 in 95 mm Adjust A15A2R211 V HEIGHT as required Verify picture is centered vertically Adjust A15A2R219 V CENTER as required Adjust FOCUS on A15A2T302 for sharpest picture Adjust A15A1R186 DRIVE A15A1R187 DRIVE and A15A1R188 B DRIVE to minimum Adjust A15A1R183 CUTOFF A15A1R184 CUTOFF and A15A1R185 CUTOFF to center Adjust A15A1 R337 to full brightness Press AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key U
157. 3A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 162 2 79 REMOVE 83A1A3A1 PREAMP DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 e Remove 83AIA3 RF Amplifier para 2 77 e Remove 83A1A3A2 Amplifier para 2 78 REMOVE 1 Unsolder 4 wires 1 2 Remove 83A1A3A1 Preamp 2 INSTALL 1 Install 8 1 Preamp 2 2 Solder 4 wires 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A3A2 Amplifier para 2 78 e Install 83A1A3 RF Amplifier para 2 77 e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 163 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 80 REMOVE 83A1A4 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 REMOVE Disconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 1 Disconnect 3 ribbon cable connectors 2 Disconnect wire cable connector 3 Remove 4 nuts and 4 lock washers 4 Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel 5 INSTALL Install 83A1A4 Front Panel 5 Install 4 nuts and 4 lock washers 4 Reconnect wire cable connector 3 Reconnect 3 ribbon cable connectors 2 Reconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 1 CE2FO131 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 164 2 81 REPLACE 83A1A4A1 UUT CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION This proc
158. 4 V source This is generated in the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply and is not used by any other assembly The All 2nd LO passes TCXO PWR Signal to the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply which passes the signal to the RF BUS and also sets the appropriate signal for a status signal for the All 2nd LO If the TCXO PWR Signal is high the STATUS 2ND Line is high 1 52 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A29J2 POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE 34V CLOCK DRIVERS TRIPLER REGULATOR FOR 2nd LO A291 MOTHERBOARD TCXO PWR TCXO PWR EXTERNAL A29J5 STATUS 2nd REFERENCE 1st LO STATUS Tst LO CONTROL amp STATUS A29W1P1 ATTENUATOR DATA CLOCK LATCH ATTEN LATCH ATTEN CE2F0217 Figure 1 26 A29 Auxiliary Power Supply Functional Block Diagram 1 53 TM 11 6625 3245 40 25 z 27 External 110 fig 1 27 The A27 External I O provides the bidirectional communication link between the A19 Processor and the GPIB and SCSI Connectors Data and Control signals are passed to the A27 External through the NAT BUS Signals are returned to the A19 Processor from the A27 External I O in the same manner Control signals select which connector will be active and which controlling circuitry to use The control and data signals are translated and passed through the appropriate connector Return data takes the same path in reverse The GPIB Connector uses the GPIB CONTROLLER as the controlling device for remote operation Use of this conn
159. 43 Remove 2 wire cable connectors 1 Remove 78A1A15W1 2 Install 78A1A15W1 2 Install 2 wire cable connectors 1 CE2FO225 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A15A1 Video 2 43 Install 78 1 15 CRT para 2 42 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 120 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 45 REPLACE 78A1A15A2 DEFLECTION DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78 1 15 CRT para 2 42 Remove 78A1A15A1 Video para 2 43 REMOVE 1 Remove 2 screws with captive washers 1 and bracket 2 Remove 4 screws with captive washers 3 Raise 78A1A15A2 Deflection Sub 5 and disconnect 5 wire cable connectors 4 Remove 78A1A15A2 Deflection Sub 5 Remove wire cable connector 6 Remove 78A1A15A2 Deflection Socket Remove 4 screws with captive washers 8 bottom cover 9 8 Remove 4 screws with captive washers 10 mylar sheeting and 2 screws with captive washers 10 9 Remove screw with captive washer 11 10 Remove 4 wire cable connectors 12 11 Remove 78A1A15A2 Deflection 13 INSTALL 1 Install 73A1A15A2 Deflection 13 2 Install 4 wire cable connectors 12 3 Install 2 screws with captive washers 11 myla
160. 6 DATA BUS PROCESSOR p PROCESSOR SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT PROCESSOR CONTROL WAIT STATE CIRCUIT ADDRESS BUS INTEGRATED SYSTEM PERIPHERAL _ CONTROL BUS MEMORY SELECT CIRCUIT IRQ DRQ DACK LINES 232 INTERFACE A A ADDRESS BUS vo TIMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT Figure 1 33 8 Processor Functional Block Diagram 1 67 IRQ DRQ DACK LINES TM 11 6625 3245 40 RS 232 CONNECTOR MOTHERBOARD NAT BUS CONTROL LINES 1 CE2FO221 TM 11 6625 3245 40 32 ag 83A1A9 External I O 1 34 A9 External I O provides the bidirectional communication link between the Processor and the GPIB and SCSI Connectors Data and Control signals are passed to the A9 External through the NAT BUS Signals are returned to the A8 Processor from the A9 External in the same manner Control signals select which connector will be active and which controlling circuitry to use The control and data signals are translated and passed through the appropriate connector Return data takes the same path in reverse The GPIB Connector uses the GPIB CONTROLLER as the controlling device for remote operation Use of this connector is in accordance with IEEE 488 The GPIB CONTROLLER accepts and passes data through the GPIB DATA TRANSCEIVER Likewise control signals pass through the GPIB CONTROL TRANSCEIVER
161. 625 3245 40 2 169 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 86 REPLACE 83AlA5A1 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A5 Rear Panel 2 85 REMOVE 1 Remove 2 screws 1 2 Remove 83A1A5A1 Rear Panel 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83AlA5A1 Rear Panel 2 2 Install 2 screws 1 CE2FO058 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A5 Rear Panel para 2 85 e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 170 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 87 REPLACE 83A1A5W2 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A5 Rear Panel 2 85 REMOVE 1 Remove 2 screws 1 2 Remove 83AlA5W2 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83AlA5W2 2 2 Install 2 screws 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A5 Rear Panel para 2 85 e Install 1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 171 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 88 REPLACE 83A1A5W3 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83AlA1 Bottom Case 2 76 Remove 83A1A5 Rear Panel para 2 85 REMOVE 1 Remove nut 1 2 Remove 83A1A5W3 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83A1A5W3 2 2 Install nut 1 CE2FO061 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE
162. 625 3245 40 CE2F0220 TM 11 6625 3245 40 28 ac 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 1 30 The RF Amplifier simulates the SINCGARS manpack transmitter and drives the SINCGARS 50 W power amplifier The A9 90 MHz Generator serves as the driver to the A3 RF Amplifier The generator output power is switched through the 78A1A14 Power Termination to the DUPLEX OUT Connector on the Test Set to the DUPLEX IN Connector on the Test Adapter to the A3 RF Amplifier The RF Amplifier input stage is comprised of a wide band linear RF amplifier 83A1A3U1 Input power is approximately 1 mW O dBm The input stage amplifies power to approximately 0 8 W The amplified RF signal drives the wide band 30 88 MHz class C power amplifier comprised of two balanced transistors A3Q1 and A3Q2 The DC bias voltage is applied to the transistor gates from the ALC circuit controlling DC bias to produce stage gain The 5 W amplified RF signal is routed to the two switched low pass filters where the 2nd and higher harmonics of the amplified signal are filtered out For signals from 30 51 400 MHz the first low pass filter is activated from 51 425 87 975 MHz the second low pass filter is activated Selection of the appropriate low pass filter is done by the logic signal in the band control input A low logic level activates the 30 51 400 MHz low pass filter and a high logic level activates the 51 425 87 975 MHz low pass filter The standard logic levels O and 5 V of the
163. 83A1A4 ANO AUDIO CONNECTOR 7 A 4 CONNECTOR isis 01 Immer py A FRONT PANEL BAP Figure FO 22 83A1A4 Front Panel Assembly Component Locator and Schematic Diagram FP 69 FP 70 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 P Pl CAUTION SUSCEPTIBLE TO DANAGI FLEOTROSTATIO DBONARGE E90 28 m M NT AM uu N NE z Qu a I x E 3 OB ta E sid 0 47 3 3 ne E NE Enz y J Ej Econ 3 pelle e e em Hi Lea nun 3 Em 5 T 000 3 a 4 3 5 9060 3 T TT e Le
164. 92 Func Gen Level VRMS Meter 2 99 2 184 General Troubleshooting 10 2 6 2 1 Gen Modulation 2 198 Gen Output Level 441 2 100 2 186 Keyboard Key ere tia 2 13 2 35 Metering Adjustment see a i ode e dne eco diia 2 184 Modulation Meter Adjustment sse 2 194 Packaging T Em 2 117 2 216 Performance 5 MG 2 19 2 66 Phase Meter 2 195 Power TeSL ee esent icta 2 28 Power Meter wma neuen dia Power Supply 2 183 Preliminary Servicing and Adjustment of Equipment nnn 2 5 2 5 ig uoi sr 2 138 2 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Para Page Remove 78 1 15 CRT 7005 7840 600 2 114 Remove 83A1 Test Adapter dette 2 96 Remove 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 2 11 2 160 Remove 83A1A3A2
165. A Pam 25 30 1 4 DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use is described in TM 750 244 2 1 5 NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST Common names are used when the Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B is mentioned in this manual NOTE Official Nomenclature must be used when filling out report forms or looking up technical manuals Common Name Official Nomenclature Radio Test Set Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B Test Set Radio Test Set TS 4317 GRM Test Adapter Test Adapter J 4843 GRM 114B 1 6 REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS EIR If the AN GRM 114B needs improvement let us know Send us an EIR You the user are the only one who can tell us what you like about your equipment Let us know why you don t like the design performance Put it on an SF 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report Mail it to us at Commander US Army Aviation and Missile Command AMSAM MMC MA NM Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 We ll send you a reply 1 7 WARRANTY INFORMATION The Radio Test Set is warranted by Aeroflex Incorporated for 24 months from date of government acceptance found in Block 21 DD form 250 Report all defects in material or workmanship to your supervisor who will take appropriate action 1 2 Change2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section Il EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA 1 8 EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES Refer to TM 11 6625 3245 12 Chapter
166. A13 Generator IF Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram FP 29 FP 30 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 Af CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY t ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD amp 0 A1R21 REF FL6 FL5 CONNECTION WIRE COLOR FUNCTION DESTINATION e A1R58 REF FL1 BLUE WHITE PWR TERM TEMP PIN 5 A1R18 REF FL2 VIOLET WHITE 20 dB PAD W1P1 8 YELLOW WHITE DUPLEX PIN 11 ORANGE PING FL5 RED 15V WAP PIN2 A1RA6 REF FLS YELLOW WIP1 PIN 12 FL7 BLACKWHITE PWA MODE PIN 4 ELS GRAY WHITE RANGE SEL W1P1 PINO FLO BROWN WHITE PWR LVL PIN 7 81010 ORANGE WHITE ALARM PIN 10 Gu BLACK GND PIN 1 D P4 CE2FO088 Figure FO 11 78A1A14 Power Termination Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram FP 31 FP 32 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY FLECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES t CAUTION CE2FO101 4 em C 2 NS Sess N Es U E 9 OL
167. A1J1B DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78A1A2 Rear Panell para 2 57 REMOVE 1 Disconnect coaxial cable connector 1 2 Remove nut and lock washer 2 3 Remove 78A1J1A 78A1J1B 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1J1A 78A1J1B 3 on 78A1A1 Chassis 4 2 Install nut and lock washer 2 with Loctite 290 Appendix 3 Reconnect coaxial cable connector 1 CE2FOO051 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A2 Rear Panel para 2 57 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter 2 21 END OF TASK 2 158 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 76 REPLACE 83A1A1 BOTTOM CASE DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with case assemblies removed REMOVE 1 Remove 4 screws 1 2 Slide 83A1A5 Rear Panel toward rear 3 Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 2 Slide 83A1A5 Rear Panel toward front 3 Install 4 screws 1 CE2FO052 END OF TASK 2 159 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 77 REMOVE 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom 2 76 REMOVE R
168. A26J2 Pin 44 Step 10 Verify Channel 1 and Channel 2 waveforms are identical and are similiar to waveforms as shown ew eee e If incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 f correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 35 DMM Failure Perform DMM Test para 2 15 Repair faulty assembly 2 25 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 36 Power Meter High Power Failure Locate A14 Power Termination fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 5 0 5 Vdc with DMM at A14FL8 fig FO 11 If incorrect remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot A28U2 fig FO 17 If correct replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 37 Oscilloscope Vertical Accuracy Failure Step 1 Remove A25 Digitider para 2 30 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 i of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Step 2 Verify 2 Vdc 0 4 with DMM at A25P2 Pin 1B fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 If incorrect replace A17A1 Connector para 2 54 e If correct replace A25 Digitizer para 2 24 38 DC Power Failure Step 1 Set DC Power Source to OFF and disconnect DC Power Cable Connect AC Power Cable to AC LINE IN Connector Step 2 Press POWER Switch to On Step 3 Rotate INTENSITY Contrast fully cw and verify IFR Logo Screen is displayed as shown YELLOW GREEN WHITE BLUE LIGHT BLUE If incorr
169. ANCE TEST Continued DMM Continued 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select ACV ranges and verify values on DMM When Multimeter readout exceeds 500 VAC Radio Test Set beeps and displays Multimeter Readout Bar in red Set Range to Set Calibrator for DMM displays 200 mV 150 mVAC at 100 Hz 150 mVAC 110 1 mVAC 2V 1 5 VAC at 100 Hz 1 5 VAC 0101 mVAC 20 V 15 VAC at 100 Hz 15 VAC i1 01 VAC 200 V 150 VAC at 100 Hz 150 VAC i10 1 VAC 2000 V 500 VAC at 100 Hz 500 VAC i1 01 VAC 10 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Ohm Press ENTER Key 11 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select Ohm ranges and verify values on DMM Set Range to Set Calibrator for DMM displays 200 OHM 100 L 100 Q 0 Q 2 K OHM 1000 I 1000 L 100 it 20 K OHM 10 Kg 10 K KQ 200 K OHM 100 KQ 100 KD 10 KD 2 M OHM 1 MD 1M1 100 KQ 20 M OHM 10 MO 10 Ma i M2 12 Connect external test equipment as shown O DO 0000 opo oooo 0 0000 O D000000 OO 0000000 CALIBRATOR 13 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCC Press ENTER Key 2 86 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued DMM Continued 14 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select DCC ranges
170. ARA LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON NO NO GRAPH NO NO NO Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE SIGNATURE AUTOVON PLUS EXTEN SION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED USAPA V3 01 TO Forward direct to addressee listed in publication FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE OF MAJOR RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER ITEMS SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION USAPA V3 01 Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and Spe RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND cial Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply Catalogs BLANK FORMS Supply Manuals SC SM For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is ODISC4 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART 1 ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER ITEM PAGE PARA LINE FIGURE
171. ASK 2 177 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 94 UPLOAD INTERFACE SOFTWARE PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION This procedure is used after replacement of 78A1A20 Memory and or 83A1A6 Memory to automatically upload system software After completion of the following steps the Computer begins execution of Upload Interface Software The User is kept informed of the status of the program and of the actions required through a series of menus that appear during rogram execution 1 Press Computer Power Switch to ON 2 Insert Upload Interface Software Disk TS 4317 GRM or J 4843 GRM 114B into PC Disk Drive A At operating prompt type A press ENTER Key and follow instructions on Computer Display 3 Disconnect external test equipment sz 05 eje COMPUTER a Ej 7 f 2 270 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 95 ADJUSTMENTS DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Radio Test Set before and after an assembly is replaced These adjustment procedures cover Power Supply Adjustment VCXO Adjustment Metering DVM Adjustment para 2 98 Func Gen Level And VRMS Meter Adjustment Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 RF Null Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment para 2 106 Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment Gen Modulation Adjustment para 2 109 Scope Adjustment para 2 110
172. ATES TO WAVE FORMS 5 HIGH VOLTAGE La sanc i ON SHEET sve om SWITCHER sane eni 10 AND ARE NOT USED 0 FLAMENT m BURN 41 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 7 oy 7 H SYNC INVERTER Fem tv nci P lt q DEGAUSSER i x a tay AUTO sou 1 EJ M HIGH VOLTAGE SOURCE 1 sam i84 grobi 2 D FLYBACK TRANSFORMER qus Pw To Pe qma ME une CHR ly ANGER HIGH VOLTAGE 643 or coron fu ies gy pm VOLTS rae o pol 1 M E i ET i PULSE WIDTH L MODULATOR CE2FO119 RR Figure FO 12 781A15 CRT Assembly 7005 7840 600 Component Locator and Schematic Diagram Sheet 2 of 3 FP 35 FP 36 blank on TUDIN BMOOTHFILTER 58 70 SMOQTRALTER en VERTICAL SYNC IN 0 TYPICAL VERTICAL SYNC PULSE AT A15A1Q1 COLLECTOR VAN AA VERTICAL SWEEP RAMP AND VERTICAL BLANKING VAN en TE a on ewow Spa CHIGNO HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AT 15 103 0 en
173. AUDIO Aus AUDIO AUDIO sabe our e 7777 ra Y 12 manner 109 FRED LVL AUDIO CS AXED LVL AUDIO uno I9 104 AUDIO Rov AUDIO rov Pre a La 168 MT AUDIO x AUDIO INTERFACE SPARE SHIELD e mm Mena Pane uno Hm I E118 PUN rr 02 58 3 ono SHIELD SHIELD ze CONSEC ES 1 sora i 5 d E ln us d JONEN aZ WP CAUTION ar S su TUE in CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES DEMOD mm 18 DEMOD od GATA GENER TERT i TUNE GATE BNAF 56 TUNE GATE SMAP S SCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE EY 1 15 4 N C5 JAMA 5 E Da PIT RETI our Prr RoveTr OUT area ar ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD Caen pa TH SAL DATA SNAP 56 14 SAL DATA SNAP us Us um yas PTT E Sy a 1004 PISA SUELEN bell ood PLL GLK 7 PLAK UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED x IT VAN DATA MODE DATA MODE 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY 07 c loo DATA MODE DGTL DATA MODE paene 0 AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES 9 EX ATtpF T 470p E119 20 50 XMT E7 21 HIPWR XMT THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES Ko au SL am en ee emend Km
174. Counter and 0 707 VRMS 3 on DMM Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Scale Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 500 mV Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Sweep Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 ps Press ENTER Key Verify Test Set Oscilloscope displays sine wave Disconnect external test equipment AF GEN 2 DISTORTION THRESHOLD 1 2 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 2 71 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued AF GEN 2 DISTORTION THRESHOLD Continued 3 Connect Distortion Analyzer to AUDIO OUT Connector Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 2 Press ENTER Key to select On Verify 0 2596 is displayed on Distortion Analyzer Disconnect external test equipment EXTERNAL MODULATION 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 RCL Key TM 11 6625 3245 40 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect external test equipment as shown 0000 0000 0 0000 O 0000000 0000000 00 0000000 OO QO0000 07002000000 EXT MOD IN DIGITAL MULTIMETER AUDIO OUT FUNCTION GENE
175. D DATA SUPER MEMORY WAVE FORM PROM A 2 WAVE FORM DACA S y ADDRESS XILINX CONTROL TM 11 6625 3245 40 MOTHERBOARD MIC AUDIO IN EXT MOD IN FUNCTION GEN SIGNAL SELECT SELECT AM MOD AM MOD FM MOD SIGNAL SELECT MIC AUDIO EXT MOD GENA FILTER SELECT GENB FILTER SELECT COMM SERIAL DATA CONTROLLER Figure 1 8 A24 Function Generator Functional Block Diagram 1 17 FM MOD FUNCTION GEN AUDIO SEROUT 2 204 CE2FO204 TM 11 6625 3245 40 7 78A1A26 Monitor Control fig 1 9 The A26 Monitor Control is the controller for the Monitor It provides control signals and clocking signals for the A3 Monitor Additionally the A26 Monitor Control contains the DVM Digital Voltmeter which measures the input selected in the A3 Monitor Other functions contained in the A26 Monitor Control include a Serial Communication Controller for converting serial data to parallel and a DTMF Transceiver for decoding and encoding DTMF Signals The A26 Monitor Control is controlled by the A19 Processor Communication between the A19 Processor and the A26 Monitor Control is through the NAT BUS Information passed between the assemblies is either data or control and address signals Information is bi directional through the Data Lines SDO SD7 Data is conditioned by circuitry internal to the A26 Monitor Control depending on the in
176. DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 2500 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF ATTEN Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 40 dB Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 kHz Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 1 MHz Press ENTER Key CUPOS A12A4R2 and A12A4R3 are interactive and adjustment is extremely sensitive 8 Verify Null signal is lt 0 dBm Locate A12 Receive IF fig FO2 Sheet 1 of 5 and alternately adjust A12A4R2 fig FO9 and A12A4R3 as required 2 102 SIGNAL METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Signal Meter on the RF Receive screen Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 121 1000 MHz Press ENTER Key Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN Connector Set Signal Generator output for 121 100000 MHz at 30 dB 2 188 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 102 SIGNAL METER ADJUSTMENT Continued 7 Verify Signal Strength Meter displays 100 Ifincorrect perform Steps 812 If correct perform Step 12 8 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 9 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu 10 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 Sig
177. DE Key and perform Step 15 Set Signal Generator for 5 kHz deviation with 1 kHz audio rate Verify signal peaks are over vertical Major Divisions Adjust A5R28 DISP ADJ as required Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 MHz Press ENTER Key Press Scan F3 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 200 kHz Press ENTER Key Set Signal generator to 500 MHz at 40 dBm with no modulation Verify center frequency peak is 40 dBm on CRT Locate A4 Analyzer Log IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and adjust A4R5 as required Press Scan F3 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to step through the following Scan Width settings and verify center frequency peak level between all ranges varies lt 2 dB If individual Scan Width is not within tolerance adjust Resolution Bandwidth Adjustment on A4 Analyzer Log IF SCAN WIDTH RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ADJUSTMENT 1 MHz A4R24 300 kHz 20 kHz A4R57 3 kHz 10 kHz A4R57 3 kHz 5 kHz A4R57 3 kHz 2 kHz 4 96 300 Hz 1 kHz 4896 300 Hz Perform Step 26 until no further adjustments are required Disconnect test equipment 2 204 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 112 DIGITAL MULTIMETER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the parameters of the Digital Multimeter DMM Remove A8 DMM para 2 58 Remove A8A1 DMM Relay and A8A2 DMM Digital para 2 60 Steps 1 5 Reconnect A8A1W2P1 fig FO 5 Connect DMM positive lead to ABA2TP1 and negati
178. E Em power POWER SUPPLY 2002 A E Ka we x na saved HA PR TERA TEME n nme 0 700 xm 4 sane 3 porri 1 14 i Lor se a ee BE 4 vam se Dj En E ET o aa dame wm m ASIA MONITOR i Prid UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ES TA Po ke ER 1 ALLREFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED aM MM re EN DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES analog tat 58 E nn MAIRS pa 4 1 9 9 4115 ATAI no m Arnes NK NE A Wie 8 n a En NAT BUS REPRESENTS THE PIN OUT OF THE DIGITAL B AA cono meron Voto pd E BUS FOR THE FOLLOWING ASSEMBLIES 5 nap m lt 3 5 E 5 NIS en 2 E prod Bi MONITOR 2 MAZO Ete amp E poc m namen FUNCTION GENERATOR E am RF VO 20 man EY ROWE
179. ELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Enter 80 MHz and 500 kHz frequencies and verify 90 15 AM Modulation on Measuring Receiver 10 Disconnect external test equipment RF GEN FM 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector 4 Set Measuring Receiver to measure FM on the Positive Peak and activate 3 kHz Low Pass Filter 5 Press RF GEN MODE Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOURCE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM Press ENTER Key 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DEVIATION Press ENTER Key Enter frequencies and verify readings on Measuring Receiver 5 kHz 5 kHz 250 Hz 20 kHz 20 kHz 1 kHz 9 Disconnect external test equipment 2 76 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RF GEN HARMONIC NON HARMONIC LEVEL RR N Press MTRS MODE Key AUX and Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Spectrum Analyzer to T R Connector Set Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency to 500 MHz and Span Width to 100 MHz Div Press RF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Ke
180. EN lt GEN LVL DET ALARM OVERLOAD STATUS POWER MODE lt PWA TERM TEMP pan REPWA LVL T 29 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY GE2FO124 CE2FO124 27 EXTERNAL 1 0 007 005 1 1 21 8 2 3 005 4 yes 004 5 Gr 003 6 7 MEE UN 00118 Jer REN 9 10 0 11 NFRD 12 EJ DAV 13 5 1 ELAS 15 E 507 23 555 24 A A Sx 26 15 03 27 DEVO 32 Spo 30 E1 28 A a ea HE 32 1 1 30 26 BSY 33 24 ls vers E 135 Fi 20 47 1 NO 38 1 1 33 44 amp o GE E 1 E1 35 50 DIGITAL 18 EE 41 GND 19 45 2 1 12 1 El 38 GEJ 3 T E140 5 EMIT 7 er H 10 65 n IGE 13 14 15 16 17 l 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 35 36 37 39 40 42 A30 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR i 5 scsi Si eel Es sgg Bas g El SES gt I DIGITAL GND A30J1 MOTHERBOARD SEC GREEN SEC RED SEC BLUE PRIM RED HSYNC PRI
181. ENTER Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to BER TYPE Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Baseband Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DATA RATE Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 8 16 kbps Press ENTER Key 8 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DATA PATTERN SIZE Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 10000 bits Press ENTER Key 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DATA POLARITY Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Neg SINAD BER Press ENTER Key 10 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DATA PATTERN TYPE Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Fixed Press ENTER Key 11 Press Run F5 and verify BER Meter completes 100 passes with maximum error count of 1 12 Press Stop F5 13 Disconnect coaxial cable DUPLEX OUT CONNECTOR LEVEL 9 gr Om Press MTRS MODE Key AUX and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Measuring Receiver to DUPLEX OUT Connector Set Measuring Receiver to measure dBm Press DPLX MODE Key and RX F2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RX Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 500 MHz frequency Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to T R Press ENTER Key to select DPL Press TUNED RF Key on Measuring Receiver 2 83 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFO
182. ER PWR APPLIED LED FAN ON HIGH BOWER PWR ON LED ET ON PWR ON SW CIRCUIT DC DET TM 11 6625 3245 40 A16A2J2 MOTHER BOARD REG SCOPE 412V E e ANALOG 15V 1 ANALOG 5V ee DIGITAL 5 V2 A16A2J2 MOTHER BOARD ANALOG 415V 2 DIGITAL 15V 15V RF 15V RF 5V RF 15V A16J4 DC OUT Fe 15V 5V 15V A16A2J2 15V MOTHER BOARD tee DC DET AA AWRAT DIE PWRONLED A16A2J3 MOTHER BOARD PWR ON SW PS SHUTDOWN FAN ON HIGH CE2FO200 Figure 1 2 A16 Power Supply Functional Block Diagram 1 5 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 b 78A1A19 Processor fig 113 The A19 Processor provides the overall control for the system The CPU is 80376 embedded microcontroller The 80376 is a 32 bit processor with a 24 bit address bus and 16 bit data bus To speed up the system an 82370 Integrated System Peripheral Device is attached to provide supervision for DMA and Interrupt Requests and Acknowledges Additional controller circuits include the following 690 Supervisory Circuit controls power up RESET and Nonmaskable Interrupt actions RESET affects the 80376 the 82370 and other 110 Devices The RESET signal from the 690 becomes the signal the NAT BUS Memory Select Circuit controls what section of memory 15 being used e Wait State Circuit inserts 1 to 16 wait states into I O processing as needed e Real time cloc
183. ETWHITE LATCH 1STA WI1P1 PIN 9 FL5 BROWN WHITE CLOCK PIN 11 FL6 REC RED 15V PIN 5 FL7 YELLOW 15V PIN 3 FL8 VIOLET W1P1 PIN 1 EL9 GEN 15V 1 PING _ FL10 GEN GREEN WHITE STATUS B MAPA 7 RED WHITE ___ 12 __FL12 GEN LAICH 1STB _WIPLPIN _ _ J2 FL10 1 12 FL13 FL14 FL15 FL18 BROWNMWHITE CLOCK PIN 11 FL14 GEN RED 15V PING __ FL15 YELLOW 15V wiP1 PINS FL16 VIOLET 34 V PIN 1 Gu BLACK GND W1P1 PIN 2 GI2 BLACK GND W1P1 PIN 4 2 085 Figure FO 7 78A1A10 1st LO Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram FP 23 FP 24 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 A e CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD W1P1 CONNECTION WIRE COLOR DESTINATION FLA RED 15V W1P1 PIN2 FL2 15V FL1 FL3 15V W1P1 PINS FL4 TCXO PWR W1P1 PINI FLA CONDUCTOR W2J1 GL1 GND W1P1 PIN4 GL2 GND PIN2 CE2FOO084 Figure FO 8 78A1A11 2 LO Assembly Component Locator and Wiring Diagram FP 25 FP 26 blank q ee A12A4R2 REF a At2FLa AO gt 12 4 12 15 REF A12FLA MIR A12FL2 e A12GL1 N NZ P d 4
184. F FOCUS for sharpest possible picture Set POWER Switch to OFF and wait ten seconds Set POWER Switch to ON and verify no Horizontal foldover Adjust A15A1R92 as required Adjust A15A2R8 RED CUTOFF A15A2R23 GREEN CUTOFF and A15A2R32 BLUE CUTOFF fully ccw Adjust A15A2R2 RED DRIVE and A15A2R15 GREEN DRIVE to center pot Adjust A15A2R29 BRIGHT to full brightness Press AUX F6 2 209 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 114 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued 14 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to red square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15A2R2 RED DRIVE for maximum red in graticule area Adjust A15A2R8 RED CUTOFF until red haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A2R8 RED CUTOFF until red haze just disappears Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press EN
185. F para 2 68 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 149 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 70 REPLACE 78A1A28 ATTENUATOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE Disconnect 3 wire cable connectors 1 Loosen 6 nuts 3 securing each bracket on 78A1A13 Generator IF and 78A1A28 Attenuator Disconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 4 Slide 78A1A13 Generator IF to front Remove 2 screws and 2 washers 5 Disconnect retainer and ribbon cable connector 2 Remove 78A1A28 Attenuator 6 egi Pw INSTALL Install 78A1A28 Attenuator 6 Reconnect retainer and ribbon cable connector 2 Install 2 screws and 2 washers 5 Slide 78A1A13 Generator IF to rear Reconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 4 Tighten 6 nuts 3 securing each bracket on 78A1A13 Generator IF and 78A1A28 Attenuator Reconnect 3 wire cable connectors 1 co N FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 150 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 71 REPLACE 78A1A14 POWER TERMINATION DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter pa
186. F power close to 5 W The detected sampled incident RF power output is connected to 2 6 pin 7 for RF power output monitoring The 50 VDC power supply is a switching power regulator with input voltage of 15 VDC and output voltage of 50 VDC To activate the RF amplifier only when needed and to save current when RF power is not needed the amplifier system includes an electronic switch controlled from the DC Connector The control line is the ON OFF designated pin When the ON OFF voltage is 0 VDC the DC supply line for the power amplifier is disconnected and the amplifier is off 5 VDC activates the amplifier 1 60 LOW PASS FILTER 30 TO 51 4MHz AMPLIFIER A3J1 A3J2 INPUT FROM DIRECTIONAL Ce 500 5W GENERATOR LOW PASS FILTER COUPLER 51 425 TO 87 975MHz POWER PROTECTION MONITOR CIRCUITRY ON OFF SWITCH PIN BAND DIODE GONTROL DRIVERS 50V POWER SUPPLY CE2FO004 Figure 1 30 A3 RF Amplifier Functional Block Diagram 1 61 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 29 ad 83A1A4 Front Panel fig 1 31 The A4 Front Panel provides an interface between the UUT and the Test Set The A4 Front Panel provides an analog interface between the Test Adapter and the Test Set provides a connector SNAP OUTPUT for testing SNAP Tune Word connects the Input RF to the A3 RF Amplifier and passes out the output from the A3 RF Amplifier and provides the operator v
187. FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 AF Output Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 To Speaker Press ENTER Key to select On Press Ret F5 Press T VOL Control Key until Volume Bar appears and audible tone is present Press each VOL Control Keys and verify speaker volume increases and decreases Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 AF Output Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 To Speaker Press ENTER Key to select Off Press Ret F5 2 70 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued AF GEN 2 FREQUENCY AND LEVEL ACCURACY 10 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 2 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 7070 V Press ENTER Key Connect external test equipment as shown oo 0000 oo oooo 9 9005 O DODODDO 900000 OO DIGITAL 00006000 MULTIMETER 0009000000 AUDIO OUT FREQUENCY COUNTER 150 OHM LOAD CE2FO163 Verify 1000 0 Hz 1 Hz on Frequency
188. FP 67 FP 68 blank 7 INTERFACE POWER MONTOR 14V 403 TM 11 6625 3245 40 ALT CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES V scenam j ret NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED B ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES A eg REIS 8 MA2 eg RIIS ADAZRU ng EIS 2 ALL RESISTORS ARE 1 TOLERANCE ALL RESISTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN OHMS 4 AUL CAPACITANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MCROFAMADS 5 ALLINDUOTANOE IS EXPRESSED IN MCROHENRY 400 UNBALANGED TO BALANCED TRANSFORMER ON 2861006802 BEAD CONSTRUCTED FROM A SINGLE COAX 89 178 7 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 8341 gt LA LS LIY L12 L3 14 L24 LAS 129 AND 30 ARE FASTENED BOARD WITH PERMABOMD APPENDIX B ITEM 10 CE2FO127 TM 11 6625 3245 40 PO 4 1 UUT INTERFACE XMT AUDIO XMT AUDIO INTERFACE BEAN par sem DT GND AUDIO GND AUDIO D AUDIO RCY AUDREY SIG OUT RINT 816 OUT XT xum En 5 AUD cui l 100 GND
189. H Sync Color Data consists of the following signals Primary Blue Primary Green Primary Red Secondary Blue Secondary Green Secondary Red Data storage is provided by the VRAM This is dynamic memory requiring refreshing Clocking for the Video Graphics Array is provided by a 16 257 MHz Clock 1 10 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A21P1 MOTHERBOARD DATA ADDRESS VIDEO DATA E SETUP VIDEO SETUP CIRCUIT DISABLE VIDEO GRAPHICS ARRAY VGA VRAM CONTROL A21P2 CRT COLOR DATA INTERFACE CIRCUIT CLOCK 16 257 MHz V SYNCH SYNCH CE2FO203 Figure 1 5 A21 Video Controller Functional Block Diagram 1 11 TM 11 6625 3245 40 5 e 78A21A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 fig 1 6 The Color Signals Vertical Sync VERT SYNC and Horizontal Sync HORIZ SYNC signals are passed from the A21 Video Controller to the A15 CRT The primary and secondary colors are buffered and then passed to the PRIMARY SECONDARY COLORS RESISTER NETWORK where they are divided by resistors and mixed into three color signals The three color signals are passed through the COLOR BLANKING CONTROLLER to the CRT Between the COLOR BLANKING CONTROLLER and the CRT the colors are amplified and passed through the Cutoff Adjustment Circuitry The VERT SYNC Signal from the A21 Video Controller is inverted and passed to the Vertical Deflection Oscillator The Vertical Deflection Oscillat
190. IGH FREQUENCY 1 250 kHz 499 kHz 2 500 kHz 999 kHz 3 1 MHz 49 MHz 4 50 MHz 124 MHz 5 125 MHz 199 MHz 6 200 MHz 399 MHz 7 400 MHz 599 MHz 8 600 MHz 799 MHz 9 800 MHz 999 MHz 11 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Low Frequency Range Verify Low Frequency and note output level in dBm using Measuring Receiver 12 Press High Fl Verify High Frequency and note output level in dBm using Measuring Receiver Press Low Fl 13 Verify Step 11 output is above 0 0 dBm and Step 12 output is below 0 0 dBm If Step 11 output plus Step 12 output is lt 0 30 dBm continue with next Range 14 Press ENTER Key 15 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to least significant digit in data field and edit data While monitoring Measuring Receiver adjust level until value is within tolerance 16 Repeat Steps 12 through 15 until levels match as closely as Radio Test Set allows Continue with next Range 17 Press ESC F6 and AUX F6 18 Disconnect test equipment Change 1 2 187 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 101 RFNULL ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the mixer null for the Spectrum Analyzer Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Analyzer Operation Screen Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use
191. Install 83A1A5 Rear Panel para 2 85 Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 172 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 89 REPLACE 83AlA9 EXTERNAL I O DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 REMOVE Release cardcage latch and raise cardcage 2 30 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Raise cardcage 2 60 Remove 2 screws 3 and PC Board retainer 4 Raise card ejectors and remove 83A1A9 External I O 5 INSTALL Install 83A1A9 External I O 5 in guides and close card ejectors Install PC Board retainer 4 and 2 screws 3 Lower cardcage 2 60 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Lower cardcage 2 until cardcage latch locks BON FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 173 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 90 REPLACE 83A1A7 UUT INTERFACE DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 REMOVE Release cardcage latch and raise cardcage 2 30 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Raise cardcage 2 60 Disconnect 3 ribbon cable connectors 4 and 2 wire cable connectors 5 Remove spacer 3 Loosen 2 captive screws 6 Remove 83A1A7 UUT Interface 7 gt INSTALL Install 83A1A7 UUT Interface 7
192. Key to access Analyzer Operation Screen 3 Press More F6 until Scan F3 appears Press Scan Enter Scan Rates and verify Region 1 Duration is 64 ms 3 2 ms and Region 2 Duration is 10 ms ib ms as shown Verify Region 1 Level with Oscilloscope at A25P2 Pin 9B Sheet 3 of 3 as shown SCAN RATE REGION 1 LEVEL 100 kHz 5 to 5 V 1096 200 kHz 1 to 1 V 10 500 kHz 2 5 to 42 5 V 10 aroa REGION 1 REGION 2 CE2FO243 e lf any output is incorrect replace A25 Digitizer para 2 34 e outputs are correct replace A5 Analyzer RF 2 27 2 52 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 23 RECEIVER SELECTIVITY Remove 22 RF para 2 34 and install PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 irj Appendix of TM 1 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 Run Self Test 23 and verify voltage with DMM at A22P2 Sheet 2 of 3 A22P2 Pin 15A A22P2 Pin 16A voltage is incorrect replace 22 RF I O para 2 34 If all voltages are correct replace Receiverl para 2 30 24 AUXILIARY BOX 1 2 Pin 1 and Pin 2 Pin 3 and Pin 4 Pin 5 and Pin 6 Sheet 3 of 5 0 0 5 5 0 5 Disconnect SCSI Cable from Test Adapter Locate A16 Power Supply FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect DC Power Cable from A16J4 verify readings with DMM on DC Power Cable DC Power C
193. Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCV Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Key to select 2 V Press ENTER Key Enter RANGE Field values and verify TTL switching is present with Oscilloscope at ABA1W1E1 when cycling through ranges pressing ENTER Key at each range A8A1W1E1 Pins 35 and 37 GND A8A1W1E1 Pins 36 and 37 GND A8A1W1E1 Pins 38 and 37 GND A8A1WIE1 Pins 40 and 37 GND e If any reading is incorrect replace ABA1 DMM Relay 2 61 Enter RANGE Field values and TTL switching is present with Oscilloscope at A8A1W1El Pins 24 and 37 GND when cycling through ranges pressing ENTER Key at each range e If incorrect replace 1 DMM Relay 2 61 e f correct replace ABA2 DMM Digital para 2 60 2 59 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 16 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 TEST DESCRIPTION Isolates problem in 15 CRT to malfunctioning component WARNING Voltages in excess of 100 Vdc are present in the A15 CRT NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from fable 2 1 another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Remove A15 CRT para 2 39 2 Remove top cover from A15 CRT 2 40 3 Reconnect AIA1W2 fig FO P
194. LOWPASS FILTERS TRANSFORMER _ SOMHz 514MHz 2 Dn EE le PIN DIODE DRIVERS tide Tie T pie Te Se E a 5 em E man MAPS or Tw 1 51 425 87 975MHz RD zu S um us a 6043 1170230 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 2868000102 3 REA E van hi E ia i iur ur m 16 ruca 4 BAND CONTROL 3 bi MMBT22224 ix EX i t aula 6 ON OFF SWITCH aca a it ano a WV Fas h E a any nn EA as A g 1 l E23 8 2 ke 9 3l as E m 50V PW A SUPPLY BAJADA 1 84 Lh ASA 1 150 150 5 d 186937 M00 22 ww 5 VAW ALO and PROTECTION CIRCUITRY Rea MINIMUM VOLTAGE 7 TUM T IAN 7 b H un i 4126 Hr a m 5 i 2 u El IN eurer ee a E RFAMPURER Figure FO 21 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Assembly Component Locator and Schematic Diagram Sheet 2 of 2
195. LRMS converted to DC Analog Signals include PWR LVL Unit Ambient Temperature A26 Monitor Control SIG LVL MTR A6 Receiver Power Term Temperature A14 Power Termination 15V A16 Power Supply 5V A16 Power Supply 15V A16 Power Supply 1 36 1 MOTHERBOARD AM M PEAK DEMOD DETECTOR PMDEMOD PERK DETECTOR SELECTOR 558 DEMOD C MSG BPF DVM SELECTOR FM DATA DEMOD AUDIO OUT SPEAKER LPF BER SINAD FUNC GEN AUDIO RMS EXT AUDIO IN RF POWER LVL CONVERTER E HPF A3J2 MONITOR CONTROL DTMF IN Figure 1 18 A3 Monitor Functional Block Diagram 1 37 SCOPE AUDIO CTR AUDIO AUDIO OUT SWITCH SWITCH MATRIX MATRIX gt DVM DATA DTMF OUT 2 211 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 17 78A1A5 Analyzer RF fig 1 19 In the A5 Analyzer RF the 89 MHz IF Wideband Signal is converted to a 10 7 MHz IF Signal for the A4 Analyzer Log IF Input signals used for conversion include a 77 3 79 3 MHz Signal from the A7 3rd LO and 1 MHz Reference Signal from the All 2nd LO Signals generated in the A25 Digitizer are used to sweep and phase lock the Sweep VCO Signals from the A25 Digitizer include ANLZR BLANK and ANLZR SWEEP The 89 MHz IF Wideband Signal is presented to the A5 Analyzer RF by the A12 Receive IF The incoming signal is passed to the 1st Mixer where it is mixed with the signal from the Swee
196. M GREEN V SYNC PRIM BLUE DIGITAL GND DIGITAL GND A30W2P1 A19 PROCESSOR aromas PEA Jeasuannun AS EXT VIDEO SEC GREEN SEC RED SEC BLUE PRIM RED PRIM GREEN VSYNC PRIM BLUE DIGITAL GND Figure FO 19 78A1A30 Rear Panel Connector PC Board Assembly Wiring Diagram FP 59 FP 60 blank DIGITAL GND Af CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY t ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES THIS ASSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES A A30 e g El IS A30E1 2 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 78 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 CE2FO121 TM 11 6625 3245 40 As CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES 7 SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD x6 ARRATS BEER ASEEE AQBRBASESAEEER HAE TEE HB SRESE BFE FE ESSE ano x2 EEGESERUEOSESIEGGISO SGSEBUESDiSmsgESt amp amp amp E amp
197. M Signal to the A19 Processor through the path described in reverse order In the A12 Receive IF the RF Signal is attenuated as selected by the operator Attenuation is set using two 20 dB attenuators The amount of attenuation selected is passed to the A12 Receive IF in the same manner as described for the ANTENNA T R SELECT Signal These switchable attenuators are used to reduce signal level above 30 dBm The attenuated signal is presented to the 1st Mixer The 1 st Mixer transforms the RF signal into a 1300 MHz IF signal The LO signal is from the A10 1st LO 1300 2298 MHz For RF signals below 10 MHz the 1st LO signal is 1300 1310 MHz To remove leakage to the IF output a null circuit splits attenuates and phase shifts the LO signal to place in the IF signal path This null signal cancels out the LO input from the A10 1st LO The 1300 MHz IF Signal from the 1st Mixer is passed to the 2nd Mixer The 2nd Mixer transforms the 1300 MHz IF Signal into a 88 90 MHz IF Signal This signal is amplified and passed to the A5 Analyzer RF and the 3rd Mixer of the A12 Receive IF The LO Signal for the 2nd Mixer is generated by the All11 2nd LO at a frequency of 1210 MHz The 3rd Mixer mixes the 88 90 MHz IF Signal with the 77 3 79 3 MHz LO Signal from the A7 3rd LO to form the final 10 7 MHz IF Signal This signal is then passed to the A6 Receiver 1 26 123 ist Lo A12J8 ist LO A129 1st LO A12J1 POWER TERMINATION A12J2 ANTENNA IN
198. MBER ITEM PAGE PARA LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON NO NO GRAPH NO NO NO Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE SIGNATURE AUTOVON PLUS EXTEN SION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED USAPA V3 01 TO Forward direct to addressee listed in publication FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE OF MAJOR RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER ITEMS SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION USAPA V3 01 Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and Spe RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND cial Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply Catalogs BLANK FORMS Supply Manuals SC SM For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is ODISC4 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART 1 ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER ITEM PAGE P
199. NSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 15 AF GEN 1 Distortion Threshold Failure Step 1 Remove A3 Monitor and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 in Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix Q in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Step 2 Connect Oscilloscope Probe to Distortion Analyzer input Verify 20 2596 distortion with Distortion Analyzer at A3P1 Pin FO 4 Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Step 3 Connect Oscilloscope Probe to Distortion Analyzer input Verify 20 2596 distortion with Distortion Analyzer at A3P1 Pin 1A fig FO 4 If incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 f correct replace A17A1 Connector 2 54 16 AF GEN 2 Frequency and Level Accuracy Failure Step 1 Remove A24 Function Generator para 2 33 and install on PC Board Extender Tool Code 29 i of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Step 2 Verify 1 kHz 1 Hz with Frequency Counter at A24P2 Pin 2B Sheet 2 of 3 Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Step 3 Verify 0 707 VRMS 396 with DMM at A24P2 Pin 2B If incorrect replace A24 Function Generato 2 33 e If correct replace A17A1 Connector para 2 54 17 AF GEN 2 Distortion Threshold Failure Step 1 Remove A3 Monitor and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 i 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Cont
200. P1 ATTENUATOR DUPLEX COMPARATOR gt 2 WATTS ALARM DETECTOR COMPARATOR gt 25 WATTS POWER MODE POWER TERM TEMP RF PWR LVL RANGE SELECT CE2FO206 Figure 1 12 A14 Power Termination Functional Block Diagram 1 25 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 11 78A1A12 Receive IF fig 1 13 Signals can be received into the TEST SET through two connectors the ANTENNA IN Connector A17J1A and the T R Connector W2J1 These signals are processed differently until they reach the A12 Receive IF where the two channels merge into one Signals received through the ANTENNA IN Connector A17J1A are passed directly to the A12 Receive IF where the incoming signal is attenuated by a 3 dB pad primarily for impedance matching The signal passing through the T R Connector W2J1 is processed by the A14 Power Termination From the A14 Power Termination the signal passes to the A12 Receive IF where the two Receive Channels merge Selection of the connector to be used starts in the A19 Processor The data is passed to the 22 RF to place on the RF BUS The data passes through the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply to the A28 Attenuator serial data is converted to control signals and become the Antenna T R SEL Signal If the switch is set for the ANTENNA IN Connector A17J1A and the signal is too high in level the switch automatically changes to select the T R Connector W2J1 and return an ALAR
201. PE ANLZ MODE Key to access Oscilloscope Operation Screen Connect DMM positive lead to A25TP4 fig FO 16 Sheet of 3 and DMM negative lead to A25TP16 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPUT Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 GND Press ENTER Key 2 201 TM 11 6625 3245 40 SCOPE ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Scale Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 10 mV Press ENTER Key 15 Adjust A25R44 for 0 000 Vdc 00 01 Vdc on DMM Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 2 mV Press ENTER Key Adjust A25R39 for 0 000 10 01 on DMM Disconnect external test equipment Install A25 Digitizer para 2 24 Connect external test equipment as shown O 0000 oo oooo 0 0000 O o 0000000 0000050 0000000 150 OHM LOAD CE2FO256 Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0424 V Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to least significant digit Use DATA SCROLL Keys to adjust output for 42 43 mVRMS i0 12 mVRMS on DMM Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Press More F6 until Scale Fl appears Press Scale Fl Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 mV Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPU
202. Press ENTER Key Set Signal Generator for 500 MHz signal at 40 dBm with no modulation Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN Connector Disconnect W25 from A4 Analyzer Log IF Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Spectrum Analyzer to W25 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Spectrum Analyzer for 10 7 MHz 2 48 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 17 ANALYZER LEVEL Continued 13 Verify level is 27 dBm 5 dB at 10 7 MHz 1 Hz e If incorrect perform Step 18 14 Reconnect W25 Remove A25 Digitizdr para 2 24 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 in Appendix B of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set 15 Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Analyzer Operation Screen 16 Locate A25 Digitize fig FO Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 1 4 0 1 with DMM at A25P2 Pin 8B fig FO 16 Sheet 1 of 3 e incorrect replace A4 Analyzer Log IF para 2 26 e f correct replace A25 Digitizer para 2 24 17 Reconnect W9 Disconnect W6 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A12 Receive IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Spectrum Analyzer to W6 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 5 dBm RF Power and Frequency for failed test 10 MHz 1310 MHz 655 Hz 64 MHz 1364 MHz 682 Hz 578 MHz 1876 MHz 938 Hz 918 MHz 2218 MHz 1109 Hz e frequency is incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 e frequencies are correct replace A12 Receive IF para 2 66 18 Reconnect W25 Disconne
203. R amp VOLTAGE DOUBLER The LINE RECTIFIER amp VOLTAGE DOUBLER provides approximately 300 Vdc to the POWER MOSFET Switcher If dc power is used pressing the POWER Switch activates the DC DC CONVERTOR CIRCUIT which generates approximately 300 Vdc to the POWER MOSFET Switcher The POWER MOSFET Switcher passes a 300 Vp p square wave to the TRANSFORMER amp RECTIFIER Circuit The TRANSFORMER amp RECTIFIER Circuit has 15 V 5 V and 15 V as outputs One of the 15 V supply lines is passed through the SCOPE 12V REG Regulator to provide 12 to A15 CRT All other supply lines are passed to all assemblies as required The FAN is also powered by 15 V which is passed through the FAN CONTROL Circuit The FAN is a two speed fan If the FAN ON HIGH Signal is active the FAN CONTROL Circuit switches the FAN to the highest speed Current and voltage requirements are passed from the TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIER CIRCUIT to the POWER MOSFET through the OPTO COUPLER and the PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR PWM When a high current condition is detected by the OPTO COUPLER and PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR the POWER MOSFET shuts down turning off the voltage output of the A16 Power Supply 1 4 A16J5 DC IN DC DC I Es CONVERTOR CIRCUIT uev gt AC IN LINE RECTIFIER amp VOLTAGE DOUBLER TRANSFORMER amp RECTIFIER CIRGUIT AC IN RELAY 5V POWER MOSFET 15V OPTO COUPLER PWR APPLIED CIRGUIT RELAY DRIV
204. RATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER 150 OHM LOAD Set Function Generator for 1 kHz sine wave at 3 5 VRMS Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to EXT Press ENTER Key to select On Verify Function Generator frequency on Frequency Counter Note level on DMM 2 72 CE2FO164 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued EXTERNAL MODULATION Continued 9 10 11 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 2 0000 V Press ENTER Key Verify change in level on DMM Disconnect external test equipment MIC ACC IN OUT CONNECTOR MODULATION DIA IN N Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect Microphone to MIC ACC IN OUT Connector Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MIC Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 3 1000 V Press ENTER Key Key Microphone tap on Microphone Grill and verify deflection of Oscilloscope Trace coincident with tapping Disconnect external test equipment RF GEN LEVEL FLATNESS SEO Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to
205. RCE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select OFF in MOD 1 Press ENTER Key Record Residual PM on Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select PM in MOD 1 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MODULATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 6 0 Rad Press ENTER Key Verify 6 Rad reading on Measuring Receiver is within 5 of Rad setting less Residual PM reading from Step 43 If not in tolerance perform Steps 47 53 If in tolerance perform Step 53 Press SETUP Key Press AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to 13 Gen Modulation Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 4 Phase Modulation 6 Rad Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to adjust data value until Phase Modulation on Measuring Receiver is 6 Rad plus Residual PM recorded in Step 43 Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 and AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment SCOPE ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Oscilloscope for external signals at the SCOPE IN Connector 1 Remove A25 Digitizef para 2 24 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 Appendix of TM in Test Set Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press SCO
206. RF I O para 2 34 A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer A24 Function Generator A24 Function Generator para 2 33 A26 Monitor Control A26 Monitor Control A27 External I O A27 External I O 2 Install assemblies in groups and TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 11 SEQUENCE TEST Continued 2 BEEPS CONTINUOUSLY LOOPING Locate A21 Video Controller FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Pull up A21 Video Controller press POWER Switch and verify 1 Beep If incorrect replace A19 Processorl para 2 36 e f correct replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 2 12 CRT ABNORMALITY TEST DESCRIPTION This test checks for proper pulse trains from the A21 Video Controller to the A15 CRT and that 12 Vdc is present from the A16 Power Supply to the A15 CRT NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from table 2 1 or another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Press POWER Switch rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully cw and verify CRT as shown YELLOW GREEN WHITE BLUE LIGHT BLUE f CRT is blank distorted or rolling perform Steps 3 9 e If CRT is stable with colors missing perform Step 2 2 33 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 12 ABNORMALITY TEST Continued 2 5 Locate External Video Connector Figure 2 2 11 6625 3245 12 Verify signals are constant
207. RMANCE TEST Continued DUPLEX OUT CONNECTOR LEVEL Continued 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to dBm Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Verify 0 dBm 3 5 dB on Measuring Receiver Set Measuring Receiver to measure 40 dBm Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 40 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver to measure 80 dBm Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 80 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 110 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Verify 110 dBm 3 5 dB on Measuring Receiver 17 Disconnect external test equipment DTMF 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Keytwice 3 Press DPLX MODE Key 4 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to OUT Press ENTER Key to select TIR 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOURCE Press ENTER Key Use DATASCROLL Keys to move cursor to 3 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM Press ENTER Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DEV Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 5 kHz Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to PROGRAM or DIRECT ENTRY Press ENTER Key to select DIRECT ENTRY Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor down one line Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 123456789 0 Press ENTER Key 8
208. SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 0000 V Press ENTER Key NOTE To center waveform on CRT select Vert F3 and use DATA SCROLL Spinner 14 Press MTRS MODE Key 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 6 Dist Meter Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to INPUT Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select SINAD BER Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to NOTCH FREQ Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keys to enter 1000 Hz Press ENTER Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Filter Select Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 4 000 kHz Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 Verify distortion reading is within 0 5 1 Count of Distortion Analyzer If out of tolerance perform Steps 22 26 If in tolerance perform SINAD Meter Adjustment Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 Distortion Meter Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Distortion Analyzer Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 2 108 SINAD METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Sinad Meter for the Receive function 1 2 3 Set Distortion Analyzer Measurement to SINAD Press AF MODE Key
209. SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 21 FM DEVIATION 1 10 11 12 13 Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Set Low Pass Filter to 15 kHz and select FM Detector on Measuring Receiver Run Self Test 21 and verify 100 MHz 100 Hz at 0 dBm 2 dB with 5 kHz 1 kHz Deviation and 1 kHz Audio tone with Measuring Receiver If incorrect perform Steps 6 13 Remove 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 ir Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Run Self Test 21 and verify 1 kHz sine wave at 1 Vp p 10 1 V with Oscilloscope at A3P1 Pin 8B fig FO 4 If incorrect replace Receiver para 2 30 Install Monitor bara 2 31 Remove A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 ir Appendix H o TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cabld Appendix in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Verify 5 0 0 5 Vdc with DMM at A26J2 Pin 24 fig FO 16 Sheet 1 of 3 e If incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 If correct replace Monitor para 2 31 Remove A9 90 MHz Generatof para 2 29 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 9 in Appendix Blof 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set
210. Sheet 2 of 5 2 Verify readings with DMM at following locations fig FO 3 Sheet 1 of 2 with DMM A1A1W1P1 Pins 14 and 13 A1A1W1P1 Pins 10 and 13 A1A1W1P1 Pins 16 and 15 A1A1W1P1 Pins 12 A1A1W3P1 Pins 9 gt 10 Perform Step 5 gt 400 Perform Steps 13 14 gt 200 kQ Perform Step 7 and 15 gt 20 Perform Step 8 and 10 gt 200 Perform Step 3 A1A1W3P1 Pins 11 and 12 gt 10kQ Perform Step 4 A1A1W3P1 Pins 13 and 15 gt 15 0 Perform Step 9 A1A1W3P1 Pins 7 and 14 gt 5 Perform Step 12 A1A1W3P1 Pins 14 and 6 gt 5 Perform Step 10 A1A1W3P1 Pins 1 and 8 Perform Step 1 A erto otep 6 e If correct replace A16 Power Supplyl para 2 48 3 Verify gt 20 Q at A1A1W3P1 Pins 9 and 10 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall assembly if reading is correct Remove If incorrect replace 24 Function Generator 2 33 A24 Function Generator A3 Monitor para 2 31 Monitor para 2 31 Receiver para 2 30 A6 Receiver A9 90 MHz Generator A9 90 MHz Generator A22 RF I O para 2 34 A22 I O para 2 34 4 Verify gt 1 Q at A1AIWSP1 Pins 11 and 12 with DMM when assembly is pulled Reinstall assembly if reading is correct Remove If incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control A26 Monitor Control A3 Monitor para 2 31 A3 Monitor para 2 31 TM 11 6625 3
211. Sheet 2 of 5 to A15 CRT and set POWER Switch to On 4 Verify waveforms fig FO 12 Sheet of 3 with Oscilloscope Test Locations fig FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 Location If incorrect troubleshoot Maintenance Action components fig FO 12 Sheet 1 of 3 and associated circuitry fig FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 1 Replace A21 Video Controller A1Q1 and A1U5 A1U1 or Replace A15V1 A1U1 or Replace A15V1 Replace A21 Video Controller A1U5 and A1U8 A1T4 A12 A1U8 A1Q3 or Replace A15V1 8 Verify A1 Q4 is shorted Repair short on A1Q4 Troubleshoot A1U3 and A10Q7 oR WP NO 9 A1 Q4 and A15A1T1 10 Verify open on A1Q3 Repair open on A1Q3 Troubleshoot A1U3 A1CR3 A1CR4 Al CR5 Al CR6 and AIQ4 11 Verify open on A1Q3 Repair open on A Q3 Troubleshoot A1U3 and A1Q4 5 Rotate INTENSITY CONTRAST Adjustment fully connect DMM to A15A2U1 Pin 16 FO 12j Sheet 1 of 3 and record voltage reading in 2 60 2 16 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 TEST Continued TM 11 6625 3245 40 6 Rotate INTENSITY CONTRAST Adjustment cw and verify voltage increases from level recorded in Step 5 7 Verify voltage alternates between 0 and 3 with Oscilloscope at A15A2R4 as shown Press AUX F6 If incorrect perform Step 12 on in Pone pent Wi HAN IM ILLI Hiit tma LE e os A2R5 A2R17 A2R26 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Keys to move cu
212. Signal sets the Switch to route the source from the A28 Attenuator to the DUPLEX OUT Connector A17J2A and routes the T R Connector W2J1 to a 50 L Termination This signal is also sampled by a LEVEL DETECTOR which converts the signal to a dc voltage This dc voltage is passed to a COMPARATOR to determine if the signal exceeds 0 25 W If the signal exceeds 0 25 W the COMPARATOR outputs a voltage level that disconnects the input from the A28 Attenuator and the 3 dB Pad becomes the load for the DUPLEX OUT Connector A1 7J2A Additionally the voltage is passed as an ALARM Signal to let the A19 Processor know that the power level exceeded limitations The A19 Processor generates an error message to alert the operator The 3 dB Pad between the Switch and the DUPLEX OUT Connector A17J2A is present for VSWR matching and input protection Because of the heat generated when high level signals are attenuated by the various attenuators in the A14 Power Termination a TEMP Temperature SENSOR monitors the temperature within the A14 Power Termination The sensed temperature is passed to the A3 Monitor in the form of a dc voltage If the temperature exceeds certain limitations the unit will provide operator warnings 1 24 20 dB PAD _ 14 2 RECEIVE IF TIR CONNECTOR 10dB PAD 250W A14W1P1 ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR 20 dB PAD 14 3 DUPLEX CONNECTOR LEVEL DETECTOR A14W1
213. Step 2 Press RCVR MODE Key Step 3 Verify 5 0 5 with DMM at A22P2 Pin IC FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 If incorrect replace A22 RF I O para 2 34 If correct replace Receiver 2 30 29 Receiver Sensitivity Failure Step 1 Set Signal Generator for 36 dBm FM with no modulation Step 2 Set Test Set to Receive mode Step 3 Set Spectrum Analyzer to 10 7 MHz Step 4 Disconnect 9 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from Receiver fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Spectrum Analyzer to W8 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 36 dBm 5 dB If incorrect perform Steps 5 6 If correct replace A6 Receiver para 2 30 Step 5 Set frequency on Spectrum Analyzer to 79 3 MHz Step 6 Disconnect W10 from A7 3rd LO fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Spectrum Analyzer to A7J3 and verify 10 dBm 3 dB If incorrect replace A7 3rd LO para 2 28 If correct replace A12 Receive IF para 2 66 30 Receiver Selectivity Failure Step 1 Remove 22 RF and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 in Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Step 2 Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 60 dBm with no modulation Step 3 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 80 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Step 4 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MODPress ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM4 Press ENTER Key Step 5 Use FIELD SELECT Key
214. T Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 7 AC Press ENTER Key Press Sweep Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 us Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to VERT Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to center waveform Press ENTER Key U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1996 710 115 40229 Change 1 2 202 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 110 SCOPE ADJUSTMENT Continued 24 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to TRIG LVL Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to position trace start on center graticule 25 Verify one cycle is displayed Press ENTER Key 26 Press More F6 until Mkr 1 F3 appears Press Mkr 1 F3 27 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MARKER Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 250 000 Press ENTER Key 28 Press Mkr 2 F4 29 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 750 000 Press ENTER Key 30 Verify DELTA is 500 us and 120 mV 8 mV Adjust A25R25 as required 31 Disconnect test equipment 2 111 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the parameters of the Spectrum Analyzer 11 12 13 Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key to access Analyzer Operation Screen Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN
215. TA ENTRY Keypad to enter 100 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Enter Frequency of 100 MHz on Measuring Receiver Press TUNED RF and RATIO Keys on Measuring Receiver 2 74 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RF GEN LEVEL ACCURACY Continued 8 Enter levels and verify levels on Measuring Receiver 10 11 12 0 dSm 0 dBm 1 5 dB 90 dBm 90 dBm 1 5 dB 1 dBm 1 dBm 1 5 dB 110 dBm 110 dBm 2 5 dB 2 dBm 2 dBm 1 5 dB 111 dBm 111 dBm 2 5 dB 3 dBm 3 dBm 1 5 dB 112 dBm 112 dBm 2 5 dB 4 dBm 4 1 5 dB 113 dBm 113 dBm 2 5 dB 5 dBm 5 dBm 1 5 dB 114 dBm 114 dBm 2 5 dB 6 dBm 6 dBm 1 5 dB 115 dBm 115 dBm 2 5 dB 7 dBm 7 dBm 1 5 dB 116 dBm 116 dBm 2 5 dB 8 dBm 8 dBm 1 5 dB 117 dBm 117 dBm 2 5 dB 9 dBm 9 dBm 1 5 dB 118 dBm 118 dBm 2 5 dB 16 dBm 16 dBm 1 5 dB 119 dBm 119 dBm 2 5 dB 32 32 dBm 1 5 dB 120 dBm 120 dBm 2 5 dB 40 dBm 40 dBm 1 5 dB 121 dBm 121 dBm 2 5 dB 64 dBm 64 dBm 1 5 dB 122 dBm 122 dBm 2 5 dB 80 80 dBm 1 5 dB Set Measuring Receiver to measure 800 MHz at RF Level down to 122 dBm Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 800 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Verify output of 122 dBm 13 5 dB
216. TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON NO NO GRAPH NO NO NO Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE SIGNATURE AUTOVON PLUS EXTEN SION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED USAPA V3 01 TO Forward direct to addressee listed in publication FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE OF MAJOR RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER ITEMS SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION USAPA V3 01 PIN 072612 000
217. TER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to green square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15A2R15 GREEN DRIVE for maximum green in graticule area Adjust A15A2R23 GREEN CUTOFF until green haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A2R23 GREEN CUTOFF until green haze just disappears Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to blue square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15A2R32 BLUE CUTOFF until blue haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A2R32 BLUE CUTOFF until blue haze just disappears Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to gray square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Verify gray co
218. THERBOARD A NAT BUS EXTERNAL DATA DATA BUS AGC AR INTERFACE D A CONVERTER PARALLEL STATUS SERIAL INTERFACE CONVERTER LINES ADDRESS amp CONTROL BUFFER T CONTROL BUS m D A CONVERTER 01 5 11 E CONTROL INTERFACE VO C816 FAN OPTO FAN ON HIGH COUPLER 1 STATE WAIT PS SHUTDOWN OPTO PS SHUTDOWN COUPLER LATCH DATAOUT 9 LTCHUNES gt CE2FO216 Figure 1 25 A22 RF I O Functional Block Diagram 1 51 TM 11 6625 3245 40 24 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply fig 1 26 The A29 Auxiliary Power Supply performs four functions Provides interface from A10 1st LO All 2nd LO and A28 Attenuator to the A22 RF I O Disperses 5 and i15 Vdc from the A16 Power Supply to the A10 1st LO All 2nd LO and A28 Attenuator Provides 34 Vdc to A10 1st LO Takes TCXO PWR line from All 2nd LO and generates an appropriate signal for STATUS 2ND 2nd LO status line The A29 Auxiliary Power Supply provides a feed thru interface for the A10 1st LO and A28 Attenuator to and from the A22 RF I O through the RF BUS Information passed from the RF BUS includes latch clock and serial data signals Information passed to the RF BUS are status signals from the A10 1st LO and A28 Attenuator The A29 Auxiliary Power Supply also passes 5 and 15 V to the A10 1st LO All 2nd LO and A28 Attenuator The A10 1st LO also requires a 3
219. Tune Word information for testing applicable LRUS 1 62 TM 11 6625 3245 40 4 AAW2P1 UUT INTERFACE UUT INTERFACE A4W3P1 UUT INTERFACE SNAP TUNE WORD INFO A4A2 AUDIO A4J1A RF AMP IN lt _ A DUPLEX IN CE2FO162 Figure 1 31 A4 Front Panel Functional Block Diagram 1 63 TM 11 6625 3245 40 30 ae 83A1A6 Memory 1 32 The ADDRESS DATA and CONTROL Signals passed to the Memory are buffered before being made available to the Memory The ADDRESS BUS 1 accessed by the DECODE LOGIC Circuitry The DECODE LOGIC Circuitry generates control signals enabling the proper memory device Memory devices consist of RAM and ROM The RAM is Static Protected The ROM is EEPROM 1 64 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A6P1 MOTHERBOARD DATA SIGNALS DATA BUFFER DATA BUS ADDRESS BUFFER ADDRESS BUS ADDRESS SIGNALS DECODE LOGIC CONTROL BUFFER CONTROL BUS CONTROL SIGNALS 2 222 Figure 1 32 A6 Memory Functional Block Diagram 1 65 TM 11 6625 3245 40 31 af 83A1A8 Processor fig 1 33 The A8 Processor provides the overall control for the system The CPU is an 80376 embedded microcontroller The 80376 1 a 32 bit processor with a 24 bit address bus and 16 bit data bus To speed up the system an 82370 Integrated System Peripheral Device is
220. UTPUT INTENSITY BLANKER CUTOFF ADJ m 3 Sig 515 010 VERT SYNC VERT DEFL OSC HOLD LINEARITY INVERTER AND OUTPUT 21 85kHz HORIZ DEFL OSC HIGH VOLTAGE ANODE HOLD CENTERING HIGH VOLTAGE SOURCE FOCUS AND FLYBACK SWITCHER FLYBACK SCREEN SWITCHER DRIVER TRANSFORMER HORIZ SYNC INVERTER REGULATED PULSE WIDTH SWITCHER TRANSFORMER AND FILTER MODULATOR Bab Y E ENABLE 109kHz 15V DEGAUSSER AUTO CE2F0001 CE2FO001 Figure 1 6 A15 CRT Functional Block Diagram 1 13 TM 11 6625 3245 40 5 f 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 fig 1 7 The Color Signals Vertical Sync VERT SYNC and Horizontal Sync HORIZ SYNC signals are passed from the A21 Video Controller to the A15 CRT The primary and secondary colors are buffered and then passed to the PRIMARY SECONDARY COLORS RESISTER NETWORK where they are divided by resistors and mixed into three color signals The three color signals are passed through the VIDEO AMPLIFIER to the CRT Between the VIDEO AMPLIFIER and the CRT the colors are amplified and passed through the Cutoff Adjustment Circuitry VERT SYNC Signal from the A21 Video Controller is inverted and passed to the HORIZ VERT DEFLECTION OSCILLATOR The HORIZ VERT DEFLECTION OSCILLATOR then generates the signal to deflect the image vertically and passes it to the Vertical Yoke Adjustments are provided by the VERT POS HOLD LINEARITY and OUTPUT Circuitry Defl
221. Verify 0 67 0 035 with DMM at A9P1 Pin 2A FO 6 e If incorrect replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Disconnect W 1B fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A9 90 MHz Generator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 3 connect Measuring Receiver to A9J3 fig FO 8 and verify 90 MHz with 5 kHz 1 kHz deviation f incorrect replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 Reconnect W18 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 Disconnect W12 from A13 Generator IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Measuring Receiver to W12 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Measuring Receiver for FM Measurement High Pass Filter to 50 Hz Low Pass Filter to 15 kHz and RMS measurement Press RF GEN MODE Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 2500 MHz Press ENTER Key Verify reading of 100 Hz RMS e f incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 2 51 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 21 FM DEVIATION Continued 14 Reconnect W12 Disconnect W11 from A13 Generator IH fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W11 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify reading of 100 Hz RMS e fincorrect replace A11 2nd LO para 2 62 e f correct replace A13 Generator IF 2 68 22 ANALYZER DISPERSION 1 Remove A25 Digitizef para 2 24 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set 2 Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE
222. Verify output level is constant 1 dB and leveler voltage does not rail to 6 or 10 If incorrect adjust A3A2DC1 to flatten band output level If incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Install cover on A3 RF Amplifier Steps 4 5 Install A3 RF Amplifier para 2 77 2 215 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section V PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT 2 117 PACKAGING Package Radio Test Set in original shipping container When using packing materials other than original use following guidelines Wrap Test Set in plastic packing material Use double wall cardboard shipping container Protect all sides with shock absorbing material to prevent Test Set movement within container Seal shipping container with approved sealing tape Mark FRAGILE on all sides top and bottom of shipping container 2 118 TYPES OF STORAGE Short Term administrative 1 to 45 days Intermediate 46 to 180 days Long term over 180 days After long term storage perform Turn On Procedure para_2 8 TM 11 6625 3245 12 and Self Test 11 6625 3245 12 If these tests fail refer tol table 2 1 for any reported errors 2 119 ENVIRONMENT The Test Set should be stored in a clean dry environment In high humidity environments protect Radio Test Set from temperature variations that could cause internal condensation The following environmental conditions apply to both shipping and storage
223. able Pins 1 and 2 DC Power Cable Pins 3 and 4 DC Power Cable Pins 5 and 6 e If any reading is incorrect perform Step e Ifall readings are correct perform Steps 4 20 fig FO 14 and gt 100 gt 500 Q gt 500 Q Pull following assemblies and verify faulty assemblies with DMM on DC Power Cable Location DC Power Cable DC Power Cable DC Power Cable e If correct replace DC Power Cable Press AUX F6 Disconnect A3 RF Amplifier A7 UUT Interface A9 External I O A8 Processor A6 Memory A3 RF Amplifier A7 UUT Interface A6 Memory A3 RF Amplifier A7 UUT Interface A6 Memory A5W3P 1 If faulty perform replace 83AIA3 RF Amplifier Test A7 UUT Interface AQ External I O A8 Processor A6 Memory 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test A7 UUT Interface A6 Memory 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test A7 UUT Interface A6 Memory A2Al Motherboard Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 External Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 SCSI port Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key to select On Press ESC F6 twice 2 53 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 24 AUXILIARY BOX Continued 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 4 Self Test Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to move cursor to 24 Auxiliary Box Press F1 Press ENTER Key on each Extended Test and evaluate Test results If two or more Extended Tests
224. al used by the A5 Analyzer RF to sweep the 89 MHz IF Signal Inputs for the Digitizer are SCOPE IN Connector Receive IF 425 kHz Analyzer Video Scope Audio Input signals are processed differently but once processed follow the same basic path The signal once selected is scaled by the 1 2 5 Scaling Circuit amplified and converted to digital data in a Flash A D Converter The digital data is then stored in on board RAM until it is passed to the A19 Processor through the NAT BUS Scope Audio Analyzer Video and Receiver IF Input Signals are selections for the SCOPE IF ANALYZER Selector The selected signal is routed to the SCOPE INTERNAL SELECTOR The signal once selected is scaled by the 1 2 5 Scaling Circuit as required amplified and converted to digital data in a FLASH A D CONVERTER The digital data is then stored in on board SRAM until it is passed to the A19 Processor through the NAT BUS If an offset of vertical position of signal is desired an offset voltage is applied to the Amplifier before being passed to the FLASH A D CONVERTER The other selection of the SCOPE INTERNAL SELECTOR is the processed SCOPE IN Connector The SCOPE IN Connector Signal can be AC DC or GND Ground coupled The Coupled signal can be sent through a SCOPE PREAMP if 1 mV Div sensitivity is required The signal then goes through a 1 10 100 1000 Scaling Attenuator The signal then is passed to the SCOPE INTERNAL SELECTOR The signal is processed as d
225. all Remove 78A1A15A2 Deflection 2 45 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78AIA15A2 Deflection para 2 45 Install 78A1A15A1 Video para 2 43 Install 78A1A15 CRT 2 42 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter p A END OF TASK 2 124 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 47 REPLACE 78AlA15A2F1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 e Remove 78A1A15 CRT para 2 42 Remove 78A1A15A2 Deflection 2 45 REMOVE Remove 78A1A15A2F1 1 INSTALL Install 78A1A15A2F1 1 CE2FO229 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78AIA15A2 Deflection para 2 45 Install 78A1A15 CRT Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 125 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 48 REPLACE 78A1A16 POWER SUPPLY DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78 2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE Disconnect 2 wire cable connectors 1 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 Disconnect wire cable connector 3 Remove 2 screws and 4 washers 4 Remove 2 covers 5 Slide 78A1A
226. all 78A1A8 DMM para 2 58 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 140 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 61 REPLACE 78A1A8A1 DMM RELAY DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A8 DMM para 2 58 REMOVE 1 Remove aluminum tape 7 Remove 2 screws 1 Remove 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay Remove 4 screws 2 Unsolder ribbon connector 3 Remove 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay 4 Unsolder 7 wires 5 and ground lug 6 on Re INSTALL Solder 7 wires 5 and ground lug 6 Install 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay 4 Install and solder connector 3 Install 4 screws 2 Install 78A1A8A2 DMM Digital and 78A1A8A1 DMM Relay Install 2 screws 1 Torque to 4 in Ibs Install aluminum tape 7 NAO CE2FO141 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A8 DMM para 2 58 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 141 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 62 REPLACE 78A1A11 2nd LO DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Case para 2 23 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 11 coaxial connectors 1 2 Disconnect 2 wire
227. all 83AIA4J1A 83A1A4J1B 2 2 Install nut and lock washer 1 with Loctite 290 Appendix CE2FO057 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A4 Front Panel para 2 80 e Install 83AIA1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 167 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 84 REPLACE 83A1A4J9A 83A1A4J9B DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel 2 80 REMOVE 1 Remove nut and lock washer 1 2 Remove 83A1A4J9A 83AIA4J9B 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83A A4J9A 83AIA4J9B 2 2 Install nut and lock washer 1 with Loctite 290 Appendix B yA CE2FO058 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A4 Front Panel 2 80 e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 168 2 85 REMOVE 83A1A5 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83AlA1 Bottom 2 76 REMOVE Remove wire cable connector 1 Remove 2 ribbon cable connectors 2 Remove 6 screws and 2 washers 3 Remove 83A1A5 Rear Panel 4 INSTALL Install 83A1A5 Rear Panel 4 Install 6 screws and 2 washers 3 Install 2 ribbon cable connectors 2 Install wire cable connector 1 Bom 2 132 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK TM 11 6
228. and verify values on DMM Set Range to Set Calibrator for DMM displays 20 mA 15 mA 200 Ma 150 mA 2A 1 5A 1101 mA 15 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select ACC Press ENTER Key 16 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select ACC ranges and verify values on DMM Set Range to Set Calibrator for DMM displays 20 mA 15 mA at 100 Hz 15 mA 200 mA 150 mA at 100 Hz 150 mA i10mA 2 1 5 at 100 Hz 1 5 101 mA 17 Disconnect external test equipment POWER METER HIGH POWER 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect external test equipment as shown 0000 ppo oo oooo O 0000 O 0000000 0000000 OO 0000000 D 000000 0000000000 SIGNAL GENERATOR RF AMPLIFIER RF POWER TEST SET CE2FO174 2 87 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued POWER METER HIGH POWER Continued 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press MTRS MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Pwr Meter Pulse CW Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 W Press ENTER Key Set Signal Generator and RF Amplifier for 100 MHz signal at 10 W with no modulation using RF
229. assembly if reading is correct Remove If incorrect replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 A21 Video Controller A27 External I O A27 External I O para 2 38 A20 Memory A20 Memory A19 Processor para 2 36 A19 Processor 2 29 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 10 POWER FAULTS TEST Continued 9 Verify gt 15 at A1A1W3P1 Pins 13 and 14 with DMM when assembly is disconnected Reinstall connection if reading is correct Disconnect A13W fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from 28 A13 Generator IF Attenuator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect A12WT fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 A28 A12 Receive IF Attenuator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect A14W FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A28 A14 Power Termination Attenuator fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect A11W fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A29 A11 2nd LO Auxiliary Power Supply Sheet 1 of 5 Locate A13 Generator IF and Disconnect A13P6 A10 1st LO fig 10 10 Verify 21 at A1A1W3P1 Pins 14 and 6 with DMM when assembly is disconnectedReinstall connection if reading is correct Disconnect A13WT fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A28 A13 Generator IF Attenuator fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect A14WT fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A28 A14 Power Termination Attenuator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect A10W fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A29 A10 1st LO Auxiliary Power Supply Sheet 1 of 5 Disconnect 11 1 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A29 All 2nd LO
230. attached to provide supervision for DMA and Interrupt Requests and Acknowledges Additional controller circuits include the following MAX 690 Supervisory Circuit controls power up RESET and Nonmaskable Interrupt actions RESET affects the 80376 the 82370 and other I O Devices The RESET signal from the MAX 690 becomes the RESDRv signal on the NAT BUS Memory Select Circuit controls what section of memory is being used Wait State Circuit inserts 1 to 16 wait states into processing as needed Real time clock containing time of day clock alarm 100 year calendar programmable interrupt square wave generator and 50 bytes of memory A lithium power source is included in the package to keep the clock updated when power is not applied Memory available on the Processor includes 128 8 ROM and 64kX8 RAM The ROM is used for part of the system code The RAM is used for storing program global parameters The AT Compatible Channel NAT BUS contains 16 bit bidirectional data bus 24 bit address line bus 9 levels of interrupt Memory and I O Read Write lines Clock and timing lines 5 channels of DMA control lines 7 memory refresh timing control lines Data in and out of the NAT BUS is controlled by the NAT BUS Buffer The RS 232 INTERFACE is attached directly to the RS 232 Connector The RS 232 INTERFACE translates both directions between the microprocessor and the device attached to the RS 232 connector 1 6
231. band control input are transformed to 5 and 50 V logic levels by the Pin Diode Driver circuit The Pin Diode Driver circuit supplies adequate current levels to switch the pin diodes The pin diodes switch in and out the appropriate low pass filter The RF power after filtering is routed to a directional coupler A3A2DC1 A3A2DC1 is a 4 port element The RF power enters through the 1st port and the load is connected to the 2nd port The 3rd port samples 17 dB coupling approximate the incident RF power delivered by the amplifier output stage to load The 4th port samples 17 dB coupling approximate the RF power reflected from the load back to the output stage The ratio of reflected power to incident power gives the indication on load VSWR The two sampled RF powers are detected by schottky diodes A3A2CR5 and A3A2CR6 to form equivalent DC voltages The two DC voltages are compared and if close in value indicating high load VSWR the output RF power is reduced to prevent damage to the power amplifier The detected sampled incident RF power is compared to the DC voltage which exists at the same point when the incident RF power is equal to 5 W The error voltage is amplified and integrated by a high gain operational amplifier A3A2U3 The amplified integrated voltage is routed to the gain control lines of the RF power amplifier The RF amplifier gain is adjusted automatically by the control lines to minimize error voltage and keep the output R
232. ble Pin 5 DC Power Cable Pin 5 DC Power Cable Pin 5 DC Power Cable Pin 5 Disconnect 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A7 UUT Interface 83A1A9 External I O 83A1A8 Processor 83A1A6 Memory 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A7 UUT Interface 83A1A6 Memory 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A7 UUT Interface 83A1A6 Memory 83A1A5W3P1 Sheet 3 of 5 e If correct replace DC Power Cable 2 11 BEEP SEQUENCE TEST DESCRIPTION If faulty perform replace 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test 83A1A7 UUT 230 83A1A9 External I O para 2 89 83A1A8 Processor para 2 91 83A1A6 Memory 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A7 UUT Interface 2 50 83A1A6 Memory para 2 92 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A7 UUT Interface 83A1A6 Memory 83A1A2A1 Motherboard This test isolates the fault depending upon the Beep Sequence heard at Power Up 0 BEEPS NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from table 2 1 or another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test Locate A21 Video Controller FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Pull up A21 Video Controller press POWER Switch and verify 1 Beep incorrect replace A19 Processor para 2 36 e If correct replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 2 31 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 11 BEEP SEQUENCE TEST Continued 0 BEEPS ON INDICATOR LIGHTS NO FAN Loca
233. ce signal The All 2nd LO has a possibility of two sources for that 10 MHz signal The default is the G1 contained in the unit The second choice is an external 10 MHz Reference If the All 2nd LO detects the presence of an external standard it switches to this signal and disables TCXO Power The 10 MHz signal is amplified and passed through a Multiplier to generate a 110 MHz signal The 110 MHz signal is then multiplied by a Multiplier to generate 1210 MHz signal The resulting signal 1210 MHz LO is amplified and used by both the A12 Receive IF and the A13 Generator IF The signal from the 10 MHz Standard is also used by the A10 1st LO After the signal is amplified for the first xl 1 Multiplier it is amplified again and split into three 10 MHz Signals Two signals pass through a 10 MHz Bandpass Filter and are sent to the A10 1st LO one signal for the Receive function and one for the Generate function The Third 10 MHz Signal is passed through a 10 Frequency Divider to create a 1 MHz Reference signal This 1 MHz Reference signal is applied to five Buffers to create five 1 MHz Reference signals The 1 MHz Reference signals are used by the following A23 Counter A5 Analyzer RF 3rd LO A9 90 MHz Generator A6 Receiver In addition to the generated signals mentioned the All 2nd LO passes the TCXO PWR Signal to the TCXO and to the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply This is an analog signal that enables the TCXO ou
234. cedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE Disconnect wire cable connector 1 Disconnect 3 coaxial cable connectors 2 Loosen 4 nuts 3 securing each bracket Loosen connector 4 Loosen 4 captive screws 5 Remove 78A1A13 Generator IF 6 OA INSTALL Install 78A1A13 Generator IF 6 Tighten 4 captive screws 5 Tighten connector 3 to Torque of 10 in Ibs Tighten 4 nuts 3 securing each bracket Reconnect 3 coaxial cable connectors 2 Reconnect wire cable connector 1 e gre orm FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 148 2 69 REPLACE 78A1A13W1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom para 2 23 Remove 78A1A13 Generator IF para 2 68 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE Unsolder 3 wires on 3 feedthrus 1 Unsolder wire on ground lug 2 Remove screw 3 Remove 78A1A13W1 4 INSTALL Install 73A1A13W1 4 Install screw 3 Solder wire on ground lug 2 Solder 3 wires to 3 feedthrus 1 PONS CE2FO135 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A13 Generator I
235. connect 4 coaxial cables 1 2 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 3 Remove 78A1A6 Receiver 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A6 Receiver 3 2 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 3 Reconnect 4 coaxial cables 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 105 2 31 REPLACE 78A1A3 MONITOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 2 3 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Loosen 2 captive screws 2 Remove 78A1A3 Monitor 3 INSTALL 1 2 3 Install 78A1A3 Monitor 3 Tighten 2 captive screws 2 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 meo ee gt 1 SK FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A2 Top Case 2 22 END OF TASK CE2FO024 2 106 2 32 REPLACE 78A1A26 MONITOR CONTROL TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 7842 Top Case para 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A26 Monitor Control 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78AIA26 Monitor Control 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 N
236. ct W26 from A5 Analyzer RH fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Spectrum Analyzer to W26 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 3 dBm RF Power and Frequency for failed test 10 MHz 79 3000 MHz 40 Hz 64 MHz 79 3000 MHz 40 Hz 578 MHz 77 3001 MHz 40 Hz 918 MHz 79 2875 MHz 40 Hz If any frequency is incorrect replace A7 3rd LO 2 28 e fall frequencies are correct replace A5 Analyzer RF para 2 27 18 AM MODULATION 1 Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Select AM Detector on Measuring Receiver 2 Run Self Test 18 and verify 100 MHz i100 Hz at 10 dBm i2 dB with 30 15 AM and 1 kHz Audio tone with Measuring Receiver e If incorrect perform Steps 7 10 3 Remove A3 Monitor para 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 i of TM 11 6625 3245 12 lin Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix C in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 2 49 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 18 AM MODULATION Continued 4 Run Self Test 18 and verify 1 kHz sine wave at 1 Vp p 0 1 V with Oscilloscope at A3P1 Pin 8A FO 4 f incorrect replace Receiver para 2 30 5 Install A3 Monitor bara 2 31 Remove A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 Appendix o TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cabld Appendix
237. ctor signals are imported and passed through an attenuator for setting the signal level The resulting signals are passed to the Audio Switching Matrix for output selection Data signals can be generated by either the Super 8 Microprocessor or the SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER The resulting signal can be passed as raw data or filtered and attenuated The filtered signal is sent to the Audio Switching Matrix The unaltered signal is available directly for output Level changing to bipolar 6 V and TTL levels is also available at the same time filtering is done The Filter available is a 300 Hz Low Pass Filter for use in signaling formats The Audio Switching Matrix is presented with five different inputs and selects three different outputs for each For each input only one output can be selected however all five inputs can be active simultaneously The three outputs available include FM MOD OUT AM MOD OUT and FUNCTION GENERATOR AUDIO OUT to the AUDIO OUT Connector A17J6 The FM MOD OUT and AM MOD OUT signals are available directly to the A9 90 MHz Generator from the Audio Switching Matrix The FUNCTION GENERATOR AUDIO OUT is processed by another attenuator giving a wider dynamic range and then filtered by a 60 kHz Low Pass Filter This signal is then presented to the AUDIO OUT Connector A17J6 Selections for the Audio Switching Matrix are passed from A19 Processor to the Super 8 Microprocessor for processing 1 16 A24P1 MOTHERBOAR
238. d to the A12 Receive IF include ANTENNA T R SEL 20 dB PAD 1 SEL 20 dB PAD 2 SEL The A28 Attenuator is responsible for attenuating the RF signal from the A13 Generator IF before entering the A14 Power Termination Attenuation settings are 0 127 dB 1 48 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A28J1 A28J2 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY GENERATOR IF p POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION GENLVL DET A28J3 RECEIVE IF ALARM ANTENNA OVERLOAD STATUS DATA CLOCK Migs D ite R I RCV IF CONTROL PWR TERM RCV IF CONTROL A28J4 POWER TERMINATION 95277 ATTEN CONTROL Ca STATUS POWER TERM CONTROL BLANKING POWER UP ATTENUATOR RESET A28J5 Y 2 A28J6 GENERATOR IF TERMINATION CE2FO161 Figure 1 24 A28 Attenuator Functional Block Diagram 1 49 TM 11 6625 3245 40 23 x 78A1A22 RF 1 0 fig 1 28 The A22 RF 1 O performs one primary function and several secondary functions The primary function is to convert the data presented by the A19 Processor from parallel to serial format using the Parallel To Serial Converter for the modules attached to the RF BUS Included in that function are clock and latch functions for the transmission of serial data Clock and Data Signals are presented to all attached assemblies simultaneously however Latch Signals are unique to each assembly Selection of a latch line by the A19 Processor Data attaches the Serial Data Bus to the specific assembly
239. dd 2 23 33 DUPLEX OUT Connector Level 2 24 34 DTME Fall re en BRE 2 24 35 DMM Failure EE 2 25 36 Power Meter High Power 2 26 37 Oscilloscope Vertical Accuracy 2 26 38 DE Power tee A a A e Pte Enos 2 26 39 Frequency Agility Test 8 2 27 40 Amplifier Failures sch ists nlt rrr a aede 2 27 41 Test Adapter Test Plug Failure 2 27 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 6 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION Troubleshooting at general support maintenance level requires locating any malfunction as quickly as possible The amount of troubleshooting to be accomplished is based on what the Maintenance Allocation Chart indicates Because of this the only trouble symptoms here are those that could be caused by faulty items general support maintenance level is allowed to fix NOTE Before using troubleshooting table check work order and talk to unit maintenance if possible for description of symptoms and steps taken to correct them Check all forms and tags attached to or accompanying equipment to determine reason for removal from service 2 7 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES Following is a list of aids to be used when troubleshooting Ra
240. digital data This digital data is converted from parallel to serial format and passed to the A23 Counter Voltage signals enter from the DMM VQ Connector and are switched to the Voltage Range Select by the Volts ohms Select Switch The VOLTAGE Range Select produces an analog signal based on the incoming voltage being referenced to ground through a load that is dependent on the range selected for the measurement If the measurement to be made is for ac current measurement the RMS voltage passes through the RMS To DC Converter converting the RMS voltage to a dc voltage If the analog voltage is already a dc voltage dc current measurement is required then the RMS To DC Converter is bypassed The AC DC SELECT Device passes the required analog signal This analog signal is routed to the VOLTS OHMS Select Device where the signal is passed to the A D Converter where the dc voltage level is converted to digital data This digital data is converted from parallel to serial format and passed to the A23 Counter Resistance is measured between the DMM VQ Connector and the DMM COM Connector A small current is passed out the DMM VQ Connector and back in the DMM COM Connector The resulting voltage between the two connectors is read by the Ohms To Voltage Converter and switched to the A D Converter The parallel format digital data is converted to serial data and passed to the A23 Counter 1 56 A8W2P1 MOTHERBOARD DMWOUTEN DMM CLOCK DMM INEN T
241. dio Test Sets a Radio Test Set has built in self tests used in troubleshooting Procedures for self tests are specified in troubleshooting procedures b Refer to principles of Chapter Section as required This provides circuit theory of each section with references to functional block diagrams Radio Test Set Functional Block Diagram is located on figure FO 1 Radio Test Set Assembly and Cable Locator Diagram is located on figure FO 2 Assembly component locators are located on figures FO 3 through FO 23 Many problems on Radio Test Sets in service are caused corrosion Sometimes removing and reseating affected cable or circuit card will correct malfunction Cleaning connector and or switch contacts with alcohol item 1 will repair many types of digital and analog circuit malfunctions d When the A3 Monitor or A26 Monitor Control is installed on an extender board in the troubleshooting procedures the Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable needs to be fabricated and used e Perform Turn On Procedure para 218 TM 11 6625 3245 12 Self Test and Performance para 2 19 in order to troubleshoot Radio Test Set f eliminate the possibility of replacing good assemblies refer tb para 2 98 and perform required adjustment procedures to determine whether assembly is maladjusted or faulty 2 8 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION The following inspection procedures are used to locate obvious malfunctions with Rad
242. djust SQLCH Control Keys for maximum squelch setting on Squelch Level Indicator Use SQLCH Control Keys to decrease squelch until values appear on the meters Set Signal Generator to 80 1 MHz at 57 dBm Verify numeric values are displayed on Receiver Meters Set Signal Generator to 80 485 MHz Increase Signal Generator level until Squelch Indicator appears and verify Signal Generator level is 30 dBm or greater Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 60 dBm with no modulation Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select FM2 Press ENTER Key Adjust SQLCH Control Keys for maximum squelch setting on Squelch Level Indicator Use SQLCH Control Keys to decrease squelch until values appear on the meters 2 81 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued RECEIVER SELECTIVITY Continued 16 17 Set Signal Generator to 80 052 MHz Increase Signal Generator level until Squelch Indicator appears and verify Signal Generator level is 30 dBm or greater Disconnect external test equipment ANTENNA IN CONNECTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION TMB Ns 9 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 AF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to ent
243. e Soft Function Keys the APPLIED and ON Indicators and the Power Switch Soft Function Keys are mechanical momentary switches that are normally open Switch closure connects a Row and Column signal Each Switch connects a Row and Column signal to provide a signature signal to the A23 Counter Additional Components on the A17A2A1 Function Keyboard include the APPLIED and ON Indicators and the POWER Switch The APPLIED Indicator is lit whenever power is applied to the Test Set The signal that lights this LED is provided by the A16 Power Supply The POWER Switch applies power to the Test Set when depressed The POWER Switch grounds the POWER Switch signal activating the Power On circuitry in the 16 Power Supply The ON Indicator is activated by the Power On circuitry of the A16 Power Supply The A17A2 Keyboard is composed of all other keys and the DATA SCROLL Spinner The Front Panel keys are mechanical momentary switches that are normally open Switch closure connects a Row and Column signal Each Switch connects a Row and Column signal to provide a signature signal to the A23 Counter The DATA SCROLL Spinner provides an increment and decrement function for editing data The two signals generated SPIN A and SPIN B provide the A23 Counter with data change and direction information The A17A1 Connector provides the audio interface between the Test Set and the UUT Connections available are EXT MOD IN Connector SINAD BER IN Connector AUDIO OUT Connec
244. e connectors 6 Remove 78A1A15A1 CRT H V 7 Unsolder ground wire 8 10 Remove 4 screws with washers 9 11 Disconnect wire cable connector 10 12 Remove 78A1A15A2 CRT Color 11 o0 og Agom INSTALL Install 78A1A15A2 CRT Color 11 Install wire cable connector 10 Install 4 screws 9 Solder ground wire 8 Install 2 washers 4 and 78A1A15A1 CRT H V 7 Reconnect 3 cable connectors 6 Reconnect 3 wire cable connectors 5 Install 2 nuts and 2 washers 4 Install 2 screws with washers 3 Install top cover 2 Install 23 screws 1 i SON Co 2 115 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 40 REMOVE 78A1A15A1 CRT H V AND 78A1A15A2 CRT COLOR Continued 0 0 55 3 SS ooo X lt oo gt ooo oo 200079 o lt ooo 2 oo P o FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A15 CRT para 2 39 Install 78A3 Bottom para 223 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 116 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 41 REPLACE 78A1A15V1 7005 7840 600 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove
245. ect perform CRT Abnormality Test para 2 12 If correct replace A16 Power Supply para 2 48 2 26 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 39 Frequency Agility Procedure Failure Step 1 If A7 3rd LO was replaced assembly replace A7 3rd LO para 2 28 Step 2 If A9 90 MHz Generator was replaced assembly replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 Step 3 If A10 1st LO was replaced assembly replace A10 1st LO 2 63 40 RF Amplifier Failure Perform A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Repair faulty assembly 41 Test Adapter Test Plug Failure Inspect A4A2 Audio Connector fig FO 22 for cracked broken or frayed ribbon cables Ifincorrect replace A7 UUT Interface para 2 90 If correct replace A4A2 Audio Connector 2 82 2 27 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 10 POWER FAULTS TEST DESCRIPTION This test determines whether a power fault is contained within the A16 Power Supply or outside of the A16 Power Supply Ifthe power fault is outside of the A16 Power Supply the test determines the assembly causing the fault NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from table 2 1 or another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Disconnect A1AIW1 and A1A1W3 fig FO 2
246. ecting the image horizontally is done by passing the HORIZ SYNC signal to the HORIZ VERT DEFLECTION OSCILLATOR which generates the Horizontal Deflection Signal and passes it to the Horizontal Yoke Adjustments are provided by the HORIZ POS HOLD LINEARITY and OUTPUT Circuitry The HORIZ SYNC Signal is also used for the CLAMP GATE in generating the Blanking signal The HORIZ VERT DEFLECTION OSCILLATOR also feeds the FLYBACK TRANSFORMER The FLYBACK TRANSFORMER is also fed by the HIGH VOLTAGE REGULATOR The FLYBACK TRANSFORMER then supplies High Voltage signals to the CRT The Degausser passes the Degaussing Signal to the Degaussing Coil The Degausser is supplied by 15 V 1 14 A15J1 RED OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD AME AND CUTOFF ADJ SEC RED gt en PRIMARY SECONDARY SR RED EBEN VIDEO SG GREEN SEC BLUE gt EIM AMPEIEIER SB BLUE GUTOFF ADJ VERT SYNC HORIZ SYNG O BLUE OUTPUT AMP AND INTENSITY BLANKER CUTOFF ADJ VERT SYNG INVERTER VERT POS HOLD LINEARITY 21 85kHz AND OUTPUT HORIZ VERT DEFEECTION TRANSFORMER OSCILLATOR HORIZ HORIZ POS OUTPUT ADJ INVERTER HOLD LINEARITY AND OUTPUT REGULATED 12VDG HIGH VOLTAGE ENABLE REGULATOR 15V DEGAUSSER AUTO Figure 1 7 A15 CRT Functional Block Diagram 1 15 CATHODE RAY TUBE VERT YOKE HORIZ YOKE CRT VOLTAGES
247. ector is in accordance with IEEE 488 The GPIB CONTROLLER accepts and passes data through the GPIB DATA TRANSCEIVER Likewise control signals pass through the GPIB CONTROL TRANSCEIVER Clock signals for the GPIB CONTROLLER are provided by a clock within the assembly Interrupt and DMA requests for GPIB are passed through the NAT BUS INTERFACE to the NAT BUS DMA Acknowledge signals are returned along the same path in reverse The SCSI Connector uses the SCSI PROCESSOR as the controlling device for remote operation 1 54 A27P1 MOTHERBOARD DATA ADDRESS NAT BUS INTERFACE LCA CONTROL ee SCS IRQ11 SCSI ACK DACK1 SCSI REQ DRQ1 6 MHz CLOCK 24 MHz 2732 REAR PANEL GPIB DATA TRANSCEIVER DIO 1 8 GPIB CONTROLLER GPIB CONTROL GPIB CONTROL TRANSCEIVER GPIB CONTROL EE E ADDRESS SCSI INT SCSI ACK SCSI REQ SOSI PROCESSOR 24 MHz ST CONTROL gt CONTROL CE2FO218 Figure 1 27 A27 External 1 0 Functional Block Diagram TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 26 aa 78A1A8 fig 1 28 The A8 DMM converts current voltage or resistance into digital data for the A23 Counter The A23 Counter interprets the data and passes the measurement to the A1 9 Processor Resolution of the A8 DMM is 31 2 digits Control data from the A23 Counter is passed to the A8 DMM in serial format Required signals are DMM CLOCK Signal DMM INEN
248. edure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel 2 80 REMOVE 1 Remove 4 screws 1 2 Remove 83A1A4A1 UUT Connector 2 INSTALL 1 Install 83A4A1 UUT Connector 2 2 Install 4 screws 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE e Install 83A1A4 Front Panel para 2 80 e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 165 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 82 REPLACE 83A1A4A2 AUDIO CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel 2 80 REMOVE 1 Remove 11 screws 1 2 Remove 2 nuts and 2 washers 2 3 Remove 83A1A4A2 Audio Connector 3 INSTALL Install 83A1A4A2 Audio Connector 3 1 2 Install 2 nuts and 2 washers 2 3 Install 11 screws 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A4 Front Panel para 2 80 e Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 166 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 83 REPLACE 83A1A4J1A 83A1A4J1B TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Case 2 76 e Remove 83A1A4 Front Panel 2 80 REMOVE 1 Remove nut and lock washer 1 2 Remove 83AlA4J1A 83AIA4JIB 2 INSTALL 1 Inst
249. elease cardcage latch and raise cardcage 2 30 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Raise cardcage 2 60 Disconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 3 Disconnect wire cable connector 4 Loosen 4 captive screws 5 Remove 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 6 nogRoN INSTALL Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 83A1A3 RF Amplifier 6 Tighten 4 captive screws 5 Reconnect wire cable connector 4 Reconnect 2 coaxial cable connectors 3 Lower cardcage 2 600 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Lower cardcage 2 until cardcage latch locks CO TO 1 2 160 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER Continued 2 77 CE2FO053 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 833A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF TASK 2 161 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 78 REMOVE 83A1A3A2 AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 e Remove 83A1A3 RF Amplifier para 2 77 REMOVE Remove 8 screws 1 Remove cover 2 Remove 17 screws 3 Remove 2 nuts and 2 washers 4 Remove 83A1A3A2 Amplifier 5 NAO EN INSTALL Install 83A1A3A2 Amplifier 5 Install 2 nuts and 2 washers 4 Install 17 screws 3 Install cover 2 Install 8 screws 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A3 RF Amplifier para 2 77 Install 8
250. en 4 captive screws 1 Remove 2 screws 4 and drawbar 5 Remove screw 6 Slide 78A1A2 Rear Panel 2 toward rear Remove 78A3 Bottom Case 3 INSTALL Install 78A3 Bottom Case 3 Slide 78A1A2 Rear Panel 2 toward front Tighten 4 captive screws 1 Install screw 6 Install 2 screws 4 and drawbar 5 12 EA 6 AAA pg 7 TAS EA gt gt CE2FO015 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 98 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 24 REPLACE 78A1A25 DIGITIZER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect coaxial cable 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A25 Digitizer 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A25 Digitizer 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect coaxial cable 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments para 2 95 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 END OF TASK 2 99 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 25 REPLACE 78A1A23 COUNTER DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 78A2 2 22 REMOVE 1 Disconnect 3 coaxial cables 1 2 Raise card ejectors and remove 78A1A23 Counter 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A23 Counter 2 in guides and close card ejectors 2 Reconnect 3 coaxial cables 1 e
251. ent Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment 78A1A13 Generator IF Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 Gen Modulation Adjustment para 2 109 78A1A14 Power Termination Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 Power Meter Adjustment para 2 113 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Adjustment para 2 114 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Adjustment para 2 115 78A1A16 Power Supply Power Supply Adjustment VCXO Adjustment 2 97 Metering DVM Adjustment para 2 98 Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment para 2 99 Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 RF Null Adjustment Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment para 2 108 Gen Modulation Adjustment Scope Adjustment para 2 110 Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment Digital Multimeter Adjustment Power Meter Adjustment 78A1A17 Front Panel None 78A1A19 Processor None 78A1A20 Memory Power Supply Adjustment VCXO Adjustment para 2 97 Metering DVM Adjustment para 2 98 Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment 2 99 Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment para 2 108 Gen Modulation Adjustment Spectru
252. ents Perform tests or inspections and corrective actions in order listed NOTE Voltage readings referenced to analog ground unless otherwise specified figure FO 2 for assembly and cable location diagram 2 8 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 APPLIED Indicator does not light Step 1 Locate A1A1W1 fig 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 8 5 1 5 Vdc at A1A1W1P1 Pin 4 Sheet 1 of 2 e Replace A16 Power Supply para 2 48 Step 2 Verify continuity between A17A2 Keyboard and A16 Power Supply FO 3 Sheet 2 of 2 If incorrect replace A1A1 Motherboard para 2 74 e If correct replace A17A2 Keyboard para 2 55 2 ON Indicator does not light Step 1 Verify ON Indicator lights or lights momentarily when POWER Switch is pressed Perform Steps 3 4 Step 2 Locate A16 Power Supply FO P Sheet 1 of 5 Press POWER Switch and verify voltages with DMM at A16J4 with DMM A1644 Pin 1 5 Vdc 10 5 Vdc A1644 Pin 3 15 Vdc i2 Vdc A1644 Pin 5 15 12 If any voltage is incorrect perform Power Faults Test para 2 10 Step3 Locate A1A1W1 fig F 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 8 5 1 5 at A1A1W1P1 Pin 3 fig FO 3 Sheet 1 of 2 Perform Step 5 Step 4 Verify continuity between A17A2 Keyboard and A16 Power Supply FO 3 Sheet 2 of 2 f incorrect replace A1A1 Motherboard para 2 74
253. ep 7 for 1400 mW Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 40 W Press ENTER Adjust Signal Generator RF output level until reading on Measuring Receiver is equal to calculated power level in Step 7 for 0 2 mW Press Range Fl to select 20 mW Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 2 mW Press ENTER Key Verify 0 2 mW 0 1 mW on Power Meter Perform Steps 28 through 38 until no further adjustments are required Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 Disconnect test equipment Install aluminum tape on A14 Power Termination 2 208 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 114 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION This procedure is used after repair of Al 5 CRT to align the colors and horizontal and vertical dimensions Remove A15 CRT para 2 39 Remove top cover from A15 CRT para 2 40 Steps 1 2 Set POWER Switch to ON Rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully cw Adjust A15A1R83 for 54 5 kHz or 18 34 us with Oscilloscope probe channel 1 at A15A1TP1 fig FO 12 Sheet 1 of 3 sync Oscilloscope to channel 1 as shown Verify voltage is 95 with DMM and High Voltage Probe at junction of A15A1L2 and A15A1C42 Adjust A15Al R68 as required Adjust A15A1R92 to remove horizontal roll and to square green lines on Logo Screen Adjust A15A1R14 to remove vertical roll Verify 69 V with DMM and High Voltage Probe x1000 at A15A2E8 Adjust A15A1T2 ES SCREEN as required Adjust A15A1T2 E
254. er 25000 Hz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 3 1000 V Press ENTER Key Press RF GEN MODE Key Connect coaxial cable from AUDIO OUT Connector to ANTENNA IN Connector and verify warning tone and input overload message appears Disconnect coaxial cable DUPLEX OUT CONNECTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION RON Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF GEN MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 AF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 25000 Hz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 3 1000 V Press ENTER Key Press RF GEN MODE Key Connect coaxial cable from AUDIO OUT Connector to DUPLEX OUT Connector and verify warning tone and input overload message is displayed Disconnect coaxial cable 2 82 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued BER METER 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect AUDIO OUT Connector to SINAD BER IN Connector using coaxial cable 4 Press MTRS MODE Key 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 Bit Error Rate BER Func Press
255. es at 13 Vdc 1 Vdc with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 8 when Test Set attenuation is set to 8 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 and A28CR3 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 Vdc 1 Vdc with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 16 when Test Set attenuation is set to 16 dB f constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot 2801 A28CR4 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 1 Vdc with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 32 when Test Set attenuation is set to 32 dB If constant low remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot 2801 and A28CR4 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 replace A28AT1 2 18 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 22 RF GEN Level Accuracy Failure Continued Step 7 Step 8 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 1 with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 32 and 32b when Test Set attenuation is set to 64 dB If constant low remove 28 Attenuator and troubleshoot 2801 and A28CR1 If constant high remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 land replace A28AT1 Verify signals switch voltages at 13 1 with DMM at A28AT1 Pin 32 32a and 326 when Test Set attenuation 1 set to 96 dB If constant low remove
256. escribed for the internal signals The ANLZR SWEEP Signal is generated by the SWEEP RAMP GENERATOR The SWEEP COUNTER counts up the value for the SWEEP RAMP GENERATOR which builds the ANALYZER SWEEP Signal The SWEEP COUNTER is disabled by the ANALYZER BLANKING Signal The ANALYZER BLANKING Signal is generated by the COUNTER TIMER The ANALYZER BLANKING Signal is used both internally to reset the SWEEP COUNTER and passed to the A5 Analyzer RF for use in sweeping the 89 MHz IF Signal 1 42 A25P2 SCOPE PREAMP MOTHERBOARD AC DC SCOPE IN GND i 21 410 PREAMP 100 SELECTOR 1000 SCALING SCOPE AUDIO SCOPE ANAL 21 22 25 ANALYZER VIDEO SCALING SEL A25J3 RECEIVE IF COUNTER TIMER Figure 1 21 A25 Digitizer Functional Block Diagram 1 43 VERTICAL POSITION TM 11 6625 3245 40 A25P1 MOTHERBOARD 3007 NAT BUS INTERFACE KS LCA lt IOWA 1 PA DROS A25P2 E MOTHERBOARD ANALYZER BLANKING SWEEP ANALYZER O RAMP SWEEP GEN CE2F0213 TM 11 6625 3245 40 20 78AIA9 90 MHz Generator 1 22 The A9 90 MHz Generator provides an 88 0001 90 MHz Modulated IF signal to the A13 Generator IF The A9 90 MHz Generator consists of two loops of which the outputs are summed to make a final signal This signal is attenuated and filtered before being provided to the A13 Generator IF In the process modulation is added to the signa
257. essor Functional Block Diagram 1 7 TM 11 6625 3245 40 3 78A1A20 Memory fig 1 4 The ADDRESS DATA and CONTROL Signals passed to the A20 Memory are buffered before being made available to the 20 Memory The ADDRESS BUS is accessed by the DECODE LOGIC Circuitry The DECODE LOGIC Circuitry generates control signals enabling the proper memory device Memory devices consist of RAM and ROM The RAM is Static Protected The ROM is EEPROM 1 8 A20P1 MOTHERBOARD DATA SIGNALS DATA BUS DATA BUFFER ADDRESS BUFFER ADDRESS SIGNALS ADDRESS BUS CONTROL BUS CONTROL SIGNALS CONTROL BUFFER Figure 1 4 A20 Memory Functional Block Diagram CE2FO202 1 9 TM 11 6625 3245 40 CE2FO202 TM 11 6625 3245 40 4 d 78A1A21 Video Controller fig 115 The A21 Video Controller is responsible for processing digital video information before passing it on to the A15 CRT The A21 Video Controller is composed of the following sections Video Graphics Array VGA Video RAM 256k in 8 64X4 bit configuration Monitor Interface Video Setup Circuitry The controller of the A21 Video Controller is the Video Graphics Array Upon power up the Video Setup Circuitry initializes the Video Graphics Array The A21 Video Controller interprets data and passes the appropriate signals to the A15 CRT through the Monitor Interface Signals provided to the A15 CRT are Color Data V Sync and
258. et Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to blue square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15AIR185 B CUTOFF for maximum blue in graticule area 32 Adjust A15A1R188 B DRIVE until blue haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A1R188 B DRIVE until blue haze just disappears 33 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 2 212 2 115 34 35 36 37 38 39 11 6625 3245 40 78A1A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to gray square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Verify gray color when rotating INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully ccw and fully cw Adjust A15A1R186 R DRIVE A15A1R187 G DRIVE and A15A1R188 B DRIVE as required Verify all graticule squares are equal Adjust A15A2R209 V LIN as required Verify no distorted graticule squares display tearing display foldover or excessive picture width If CRT abnormalities exist repeat Steps 3 38 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selec
259. et Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Verify gt 1 5 V with DMM at W31P1 Pin 47 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 e If incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 If correct replace Monitor 2 31 2 11 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 10 11 Keyboard Keys Inoperable Perform Keyboard Key Test para 2 13 Replace faulty assembly DATA SCROLL Spinner Inoperable Step 1 Remove A23 Counter para 2 25 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 in Appendix Blof TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Step 2 Verify level alternates between 0 and 5 Vdc with Oscilloscope at A23P2 Pin 8B and 8C fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 when DATA SCROLL Spinner is rotated If incorrect perform Steps 3 4 e f correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Step 3 Verify reading fluctuates between a short and an open with DMM between A23P2 Pin 8B and Ground fig FO 18 Sheet 2 of 3 Replace A17REfl para 2 55 Step 4 Verify reading fluctuates between a short and an open with DMM between A23P2 Pin 8C and Ground fig FO 18 Sheet 2 of 3 f incorrect replace A17RET para 2 58 J f correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Speaker Inoperable Step 1 Remove Monitdr para 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 i
260. et 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W1 1 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 100 Hz RMS FM Deviation incorrect replace All 2nd LO para 2 62 If correct replace A13 Generator IF para 2 68 26 RF GEN Harmonic Non Harmonic Level Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Disconnect W12 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Spectrum Analyzer to W12 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Spectrum Analyzer to 1922 MHz and Full Span Verify Harmonics are 26 dBc and Non Harmonics are 50 dBc e If incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 f correct replace A13 Generator IF para 2 68 27 Frequency Frequency Error Meter Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Disconnect W24 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A23 Counter FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Frequency Counter to W24 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Set Frequency to 800 MHz on Signal Generator Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 800 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Verify 425 kHz 200 Hz If incorrect replace Receiver para 2 30 e If correct replace A23 Counter para 2 25 2 21 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 28 AGC Failure Step 1 Remove A22 RF 1 0 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 7 in Appendix 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set
261. ey Change 1 2 191 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 104 DEVIATION METER ADJUSTMENT Continued 12 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Select Mod Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 11 User Defined Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 IF Filters Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 300 kHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Post Detection Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Low Pass Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 3 000 kHz Press ENTER Key Press RCVR MODE Key Verify plus and minus deviation is within 200 Hz If deviation error is gt 200 Hz remove external test equipment and perform FM Adjustment para 2103 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Dev Meter Peak Press ENTER Key Set Signal Generator output to 8 kHz deviation Press Range F1 until 10 kHz Range is displayed with AR Auto Range Off Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press Key and ENTER Key Press Range Fl to set Range to 20 kHz Set Signal Generator output for 16 kHz deviation Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter
262. f Test 10 and verify 2 kHz 20 Hz square wave at 6 Vp p 0 6 V with Oscilloscope at A3P1 Pin fig FO 4 as shown fincorrect replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Verify 2 kHz 20 Hz square wave at 6 Vp p 0 6 V with Oscilloscope at A3P1 Pin 2B e If incorrect perform Steps 4 5 e f correct replace A25 Digitizer para 2 24 Install A3 Monitor para 2 31 Remove A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 in Appendix of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix Q in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Loop Self Test 10 and verify signals with Oscilloscope are not stuck at 7 5 or 7 5 at A26J2 fig 16 Sheet 3 of 3 A26J2 Pin 8 A26J2 Pin 9 A26J2 Pin 10 A26J2 Pin 11 A26J2 Pin 12 A26J2 Pin 13 A26J2 Pin 14 A26J2 Pin 15 A26J2 Pin 16 A26J2 Pin 17 e df any signal is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e signals are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 2 41 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 11 AFCOUNTER 1 Remove Monitor para 2 31 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 8 Appendix B of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Run Self Test 11 Verify
263. formation type Raw data is passed through the DATA INTERFACE Requests for data to and from the A26 Monitor Control pass through the DATA REQUEST LOGIC Status Signals are returned to the A19 Processor after passing through the STATUS BUFFER The DTMF XCVR Transceiver is also tied to the Data Lines and processes both data in and out DTMF signals coming in are from the A3 Monitor DTMF Signals generated are also passed to the A3 Monitor Control for these circuits and the Super 8 Processor is provided by the MONITOR DECODER CONTROL PAL The inputs for THE MONITOR DECODER CONTROL PAL are passed from the NAT BUS through the ADDRESS And CONTROL BUFFER As previously stated the primary responsibility of the A26 Monitor Control is to control the A3 Monitor The A19 Processor passes the requirements to the A26 Monitor Control The Super 8 Processor then sets the required controls Subordinate elements for the Super 8 Processor include RAM and EPROM Memory MEMORY MAP DECODER PALS SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER and a Filter Clock Generator The areas that the A26 Monitor Control controls include the following DEMOD CONTROL select demodulation type VOL amp SQ CONTROL control volume level and squelch on off SQUELCH LEVEL CONTROL DVM CONTROL select DVM input CROSSPOINT CONTROL control settings of crosspoint switches Another action performed in the A26 Monitor Control is that performed by the DVM Digital Voltmeter The DVM measures t
264. ge latch and raise cardcage 2 30 Disconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Raise cardcage 2 600 Remove 2 screws 3 and PC Board retainer 4 Raise card ejectors and remove 83A1A6 Memory 5 INSTALL Install 83A A6 Memory 5 in guides and close card ejectors Install PC Board retainer 4 and 2 screws 3 Lower cardcage 2 600 Reconnect ribbon cable connector 1 Lower cardcage 2 until cardcage latch locks BON FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 Perform Upload Interface Software Procedure para 2 934 END OF TASK 2 176 2 93 REPLACE 83A1A2A1 MOTHERBOARD DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1A1 Bottom 2 76 Remove 83AIA9 External I O para 2 89 Remove 83A1A7 UUT Interface para 2 90 Remove 83A1A8 Processor para 2 91 Remove 83A1A6 Memory para 2 92 TM 11 6625 3245 40 REMOVE 1 Disconnect wire cable connector 1 2 Remove 7 screws 2 3 Remove 83A1A2A1 Motherboard 3 INSTALL Install 83A1A2A1 Motherboard 3 1 2 Install 7 screws 2 3 Reconnect wire cable connector 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 83A1A6 Memory para 2 92 Install 83A1A8 Processor para 2 91 Install 83A1A7 UUT Interface para 2 90 Install 83A1A9 External 1 O para 2 89 Install 83A1A1 Bottom Case para 2 76 END OF T
265. gram FO 16 Sheet Replace Procedure e ge eae INDEX 3 TM 11 6625 3245 40 MICHI 2 211 ed 1 15 RATO 1 14 41 2 118 iaa 2 119 2 121 78A1A23 Counter Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 10 Functional Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet 2 2 2 ee o ei ti eias 78A1A24 Function Generator Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 8 sse Functional Description nennen nennen nnne Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet 2 Replace Procedure iis iui eid bei oa e teu 78A1A25 Digitizer Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 Functional Description E eret e a e n Al Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet 33 2 Replace Procedure ii tede cette 78A1A26 Monitor Control Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 9 sse Functional Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet 3 2 Replace Procedure ii ea EE nennen nnn nns 78A1A27 External Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 7 Functional Description cu eei coire ae siehts Locator Diagram FO 16 3 Replace Proced re een ernennen 78A1A28 Attenuator Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 4 Functional
266. h to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press AF GEN MODE Key and SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 AF Output Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 To Speaker Press ENTER Key to select On Press ESC F6 2 184 2 99 7 8 20 21 11 6625 3245 40 FUNC GEN LEVEL AND VRMS METER ADJUSTMENT Continued Press AF MODE Key Connect external test equipment as shown DD 0000 plo Do 0000 0 DD 0000 3 0000000 000000050 000000 e 0009000000 Set DMM to VAC Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to LEVEL Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 2 5000 V Press ENTER Key Verify 2 5 VRMS 10 5 mVRMS If correct perform Step 34 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 15 Func Gen Level Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor 1 199 9 mV Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to edit value until DMM equals 199 9 mVAC 10 03 mVAC Press ENTER Key If unable to adjust perform Steps 2033 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 2 5 V Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to edit value until DMM equals 2 5
267. he dc voltage of the signal passed by the A3 Monitor and passes the measurement data to the Super 8 Processor Control signals for the DVM are Memory Mapped and decoded by the MEMORY MAP DECODER PALS Data is passed from the DVM through the Address Data Bus Address lines A0 A2 from the Super 8 Processor are used to calibrate the DVM The filters used on the A3 Monitor require clocks to function properly The FILTER CLK GENERATOR provides the clocks required for the filters on the A3 Monitor 1 18 A26P1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A26J2 MOTHERBOARD MONITOR DATA LPF CLK FILTER CLK HPF CLK DATA SUPER 8 GENERATOR N GLK REQUEST PROCESSOR IRQS lt SERIAL VOL 4 80 COMM CONTROL E ACK CONTROLLER LoGic STATUS BUFFER SQ LEVEL Ros MEMORY CONTROL aS LOGIC DTMF XCVR DVM IRQ15 DVM CONTROL Bm LOGIC CROSSPOINT CONTROL LOGIC MONITOR EA CONTROL DTMF OUT PAL DVM STATUS CE2FO205 Figure 1 9 A26 Monitor Control Functional Block Diagram 1 19 CE2FO205 TM 11 6625 3245 40 78A1A23 Counter fig 1 10 The A23 Counter performs the following functions Counts Audio and IF Frequencies Monitors and Controls the DMM Monitors DATA ENTRY Keypad and DATA SCROLL Spinner and provides data to A19 Processor The A23 Counter acts as a slave controller to the A19 Processor lt performs the above functions on command and inter
268. he signal from the T R Connector W2J1 is attenuated by a 10 dB Pad The attenuated signal is then either processed by a switchable 20 dB Pad or passed on without attenuation Selection is provided by the 20 dB PAD Signal from the A28 Attenuator The Signal then passes through a 30 dB Pad This attenuated signal is passed to the A12 Receive IF for processing Additionally when the signal passes through the 10 dB Pad the input is split and passed through a 7 dB Pad to the LEVEL DETECTOR The LEVEL DETECTOR passes the signal as a dc voltage to both the LOW PWR AMP and the HIGH PWR AMP The selection of the path used is determined by the level of the signal The LOW PWR AMP is used for signals 2 W The level 15 sensed by the COMPARATOR that follows the LOW POWER AMP If a level exceeding 2 W is sensed the COMPARATOR passes low voltage signal to the A22 RF which causes the A22 RF I O to send a RANGE SELECT Signal that selects the HIGH PWR AMP Path Additionally if the 20 dB PAD is bypassed in the routing from the T R Connector W2J1 to the A12 Receive IF it is switched in to attenuate the signal and protect the circuitry internal to the TEST SET The output of the switch is passed to the A3 Monitor for measuring RF Power of the incoming signal The A14 Power Termination is also where the output signal is connected to the appropriate connector for Duplex Operation For Generate Operation the T R Connector W2J1 is the only selection The DUPLEX
269. he specified filter attenuator or amplifier which generates the conditions to set the Pin Diode Switches to proper settings The first switch selects the input path for the second switch Selections include Wide Band Attenuator 300 kHz Bandpass Filter 30 kHz Bandpass Filter The output of the second switch is the input of the third switch which selects the input path for the fourth switch Selections include 3 kHz Bandpass Filter 300 Hz Bandpass Filter Broadband Amplifier Once the signal passes through the last Pin Diode Switch it goes to a Logarithmic Amplifier The amplified signal then passes to an AM Detector The AM Detector converts the 10 7 MHz IF to a voltage level This voltage is amplified and passed to the A25 Digitizer as the ANLZR VIDEO Signal 1 40 4 2 ANALYZER RF 1 MOTHERBOARD DATA CLOCK LATCH AN1 WIDE BAND ATTENUATOR 30 kHz BPF ATTN AMP 3 kHz BPF DIODE SWITCH 300 kHz BPF 300 Hz BPF 22 x TX 300 Hz BW AAPA MOTHERBOARD CE2FO212 ANALYZER VIDEO 1 41 Figure 1 20 A4 Analyzer Log IF Functional Block Diagram TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 19 t 78A1A25 Digitizer fig 1 21 The primary operation of the A25 Digitizer is the conversion of analog data into digital data to be passed to the A19 Processor Additionally the A25 Digitizer generates the ANLZR SWEEP Signal and ANLZR BLANK Sign
270. heet 1 of 5 connect Frequency Counter to W18 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 1 MHz 0 5 Hz e If incorrect perform Step 9 If correct replace A5 Analyzer RF 2 27 Reconnect coaxial cable Disconnect W16 All 2nd LO fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Frequency Counter to W16 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 10 MHz 5 Hz e incorrect replace G1 para 2 73 e f correct replace All 1 2nd LO 2 62 16 POWER METER 1 2 3 4 5 6 Run Self Test 16 Connect Measuring Receiver to T R Connector Set Measuring Receiver to measure RF Power Verify 0 dBm 2 dB with Measuring Receiver e If incorrect perform Steps 7 16 Locate A14 Power Terminatioh fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 25 0 05 with DMM at A14FL9 FO 11 e incorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 Locate A26 Monitor Control fig FO P Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 21 0 05 Vdc with DMM at A26J2 Pin 47 fig 16 Sheet 3 of 3 e incorrect perform Step 6 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 18 5 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 5 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 0 5 voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e voltages are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 7 Loca
271. his document by substitution with chemicals that do not cause atmospheric ozone depletion WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App 2401 et seq Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230 25 DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D Distribution authorized to Department of Defense and DoD contractors only to protect critical technical data on systems or hardware This determination was made Oct 1986 Other requests shall be referred to Program Manager TMDE ATTN SFAE CS FT T TEMOD Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document Change2 i TM 11 6625 3245 40 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ssssssssssssssssssssssssssesscssssnscecsssssnssessesssssnseeesssssneeesesess CHAPTER 4 INTRODUCTION uictoria Quads prc s dd dou daa de 1 1 Section General Information Equipment Description and 1 3 Principles of 1 3 CHAPTER 2 MAINTENANCE
272. ii FP 17 Replace Procedure iod e ttt fetu a tete termi etes eir ees 2 105 78A1A7 3rd LO Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 16 1 33 Functional Descripcion 1 32 EocatornDiagram RO FP 17 Replace Proced re iie hate ie REO a 2 103 78A1A8 DMM Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 8 1 57 Functional DeSCription een either nase 1 56 Locator Diagram FOB una tb entree IL FP 19 Replace Procedure TEATAB DMM EE 2 138 T8ATASAMDMIW iiti deest eS et be vn bua aaa elena aeaa 2 140 TOATASAT E eri 2 139 Y8A1A8A2 DMMlDigital 5 1 221 3 pred m rip ERIT nel a ce 2 141 2 uineas aq IMG Eie iaa 2 139 ran ete tede an s eA exte nel epe ee dee ed 2 2 139 78A1A9 90 MHz Generator Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 2 1 45 Functional Description tori ipe RE a ERR via de dete 1 44 Locator Diagram d op ite tes D Bra eap FP 21 Replace Proce Cire cs eio p RO ORE RETOUR DEC rS RETIRER e ERREUR Ede ete eid 2 104 INDEX 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 78A1A10 1st LO Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 4 77 1 29 Functional 1 iet pn abeo ben e e e DB A 1 28 Locator Diagram FO 7 sess een eigene ae reo A is FP 23 Replace Procedure Ete Ito Uteris t ttt tS 2 143 ZOBTATOM T SHE At A otto
273. ines ie 2 7 Troubleshooting Table 2 8 Types Of SIorage initial annie lent 2 216 U Upload Interface Software 2 178 V VEXOAdjUSIMENT do ias 2 183 Warranty Information ate Gu 1 2 INDEX 8 AF 250kH2 tGHz RF 250kHz 1GHa MIC Amo gt PIT gt gt u C3 etus Figure FO 1 Radio Test Set AN GRM 114B Functional Block Diagram FP 1 FP 2 blank RF VO CONTROL TM 11 6625 3245 40 7BA1A5 lt SWEEP RAMP ANALYZER RF S BLANKING O R LOGAF a E gt Gur id 10 7 Mi IF gt 194 ANALYZER LOGAF 18 e 3 L RESOLUTION p 0 20 40 dB 89MHz IF BANDWIDTH Bu Ed DET 22221252 106 AMP 1300 1210 MHz 73733 sn 4AMHZPLL 5 lt 9 score in 2298 MHz 3 MHz 5 AZ 1 MHz 2 we REF 2 RF OUTPUTS a 2 CROSSOVER 10 MHz 2nd LO 2 4 1 2 7 7 O gt REC va TRAIAN 7 TOMAS 9 2nd LO 3rd LO DMM lt 1048 0 IN als gt gt Tem 01 O lt a H 10MHz EXT 2 E SCOPE R REF 10 MHz DET DEMOD M AUDIO AA REF SIGNAL gt
274. io TestSet a Inspect all external surfaces of Radio Test Set for physical damage breakage loose or dirty contacts and missing components 2 7 TM 11 6625 3245 40 WARNING Dangerous voltages are present with covers removed b Remove 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 and 78A3 Bottom Casd para 2 23 on Test Set and 83A1A1 Bottom Casel para 2 76 on Test Adapter as required to access components CAUTION Do not disconnect or remove any board assemblies in Radio Test Set unless instrument is unplugged Some assemblies contain devices that can be damaged if board is removed when power is on Several components including MOS devices can be damaged by electrostatic discharge Use conductive foam and grounding straps when servicing is required around sensitive components Use care when unplugging ICs from high grip sockets c Inspect printed circuit board surfaces for discoloration cracks breaks and warping and printed circuit board conductors for breaks cracks cuts erosion or looseness e Inspect all assemblies for burnt or loose components f Inspect all chassis mounted components for looseness breakage loose contacts or conductors g Inspect all motherboard connectors for missing broken or corroded contacts h Inspect Radio Test Set for disconnected broken cut loose or frayed cables or wires 2 9 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE Table 2 1 lists common malfunctions found during normal operation or maintenance of Radio Test Set or compon
275. ions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Connect external test equipment as shown 0000 pgo oooo 0 DO 0000 O 0000000 DO000000 oo00000 a 0000000000 CE2FO170 CALIBRATOR 2 Press MTRS MODE Key 3 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Digital Multimeter DMM Press ENTER Key 4 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCV Press ENTER Key 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select DCV ranges and verify values on DMM Range Calibrator DMM Value If incorrect replace perform 200 mV 150 mVdc 150 mVdc 2 1 Perform Steps 22 28 2V 1 5 1 5 21 mVdc A8A1 DMM Relay 20V 15 Vdc 15 Vdc 0 21 Vdc A8A1 DMM Relay 200 V 150 Vdc 150 Vdc 2 1 Vdc A8A1 DMM Relay 2000 V 500 Vdc 500 21 Vdc A8A1 DMM Relay 2 56 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 15 DMM TEST Continued 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select ACV Press ENTER Key 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Select ACV ranges and verify values on DMM When Multimeter readout exceeds 500 VAC Test Set beeps and displays Multimeter Readout Bar in red Range Calibrator Value 200 mV 150 mVAC at 100 Hz 150 mVAC 10 1 mVAC 2 0 V 1 5 VAC at 100 Hz 1 5 VAC 101 mVAC 20 V 15 VAC at
276. isual indication that power is applied to the Test Adapter Connection to the UUT is provided by the UUT Connector This connector provides all input and output lines required to test the UUT other than the Power Supply This connector is tied directly to the A7 UUT Interface In addition to the UUT Connector the signal for the POWER ON Indicator for the Test Adapter is supplied by the A7 UUT Interface The Analog interface between the Test Set and Test Adapter is provided by connecting the following connectors using coaxial cables Test Adapter Test Set EXT MOD OUT EXT MOD IN SINAD BER OUT SINAD BER IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT DEMOD IN DEMOD OUT Additionally the DMM OUT Connector is connected to the V Q and COMM Connectors using a twin coaxial to banana connector cable These connectors are on the A4A2 Audio All signals are low pass filtered on the A4A2 Audio before being transmitted or immediately upon receipt from the Test Set The A4A2 Audio is connected to the A7 UUT Interface The A4 Front Panel also provides the interface from the Test Set to the A8 RF Amplifier The DUPLEX OUT Connector on the Test Set is connected to the Test Adapter DUPLEX IN Connector The Test Adapter DUPLEX IN Connector is connected to the A3 RF Amplifier providing the RF stimulus for high power testing The output of the A3 RF Amplifier is connected to the A4 Front Panel terminating at the RF AMP OUT Connector The SNAP OUTPUT Connector is used to provide SNAP
277. k containing time of day clock alarm 100 year calendar programmable interrupt square wave generator and 50 bytes of memory A lithium power source is included in the package to keep the clock updated when power is not applied Memory available on the A19 Processor includes 128kX8 ROM and 64kX8 RAM The ROM is used for part of the system code The RAM is used for storing program global parameters The AT Compatible Channel NAT BUS contains 16 bit bi directional data bus 24 bit address line bus 9 levels of interrupt Memory and I O Read Write lines Clock and timing lines 5 channels of DMA control lines 7 memory refresh timing control lines Data in and out of the NAT BUS is controlled by the NAT BUS Buffer The RS 232 INTERFACE is attached directly to the RS 232 Connector The RS 232 INTERFACE translates both directions between the microprocessor and the device attached to the RS 232 connector 1 6 TM 11 6625 3245 40 DATA BUS On ADDRESS BUS A19J2 RS 232 CONNECTOR a RS 232 INTERFACE NAT BUS REAL XA LINES A19P1 MOTHERBOARD INTEGRATED SYSTEM PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR TIME CLOCK NAT BUS CONTROL BUFFER IRQ DRQ amp DACK LINES L j Q amp DACK LINES PROCESSOR SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT CONTROL BUS ADDRESS BUS PROCESSOR CONTROL CE2FO201 MEMORY SELECT WAIT STATE ye Figure 1 3 19 Proc
278. l The location where modulation is added is dependent on modulation type The Coarse Loop is passed data by the 22 RF from data generated in the A19 Processor The LATCH Signal is used to identify the Coarse Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer This data is integrated and used to tune a 780 800 MHz VCO The VCO output is fed back to the Coarse Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer through a 64 65 Divider to establish a phase lock condition Once the VCO is phase locked the Coarse Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer passes a signal to the LOCK DETECT Circuit The output of the 780 800 MHz is passed through a 10 Divider and sent to a mixer for mixing with the output of the Fine Loop For speed a preposition system is in place for initializing the 780 800 MHz VCO close to the required frequency Data used is the same data used by the Coarse Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer The Fine Loop is passed data by the A22 RF 1 0 from data generated in the A19 Processor The LATCH GEN A Signal is used to identify the Fine Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer This data is integrated and used to tune a 10 MHz VCO The VCO output is fed back to the Fine Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer through a 128 129 Divider to establish a phase lock condition Once the VCO is phase locked the Fine Loop PLL FREQ Synthesizer passes a signal to the LOCK DETECT Circuit An additional signal added to the 10 MHz is either the FM Modulation or Phase Modulation signal FM Modulation from the Function Generat
279. lor when rotating INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully ccw and fully cw Adjust A15A2R15 and A15A2R2 as required 2 210 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 114 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued 31 Adjust A15A1R36 HOR CENTER for Horizontal center Adjust A15AIR16 SIZE for Vertical size Adjust A15A1R25 VERT LINEARITY for Vertical linearity Wait 15 minutes 32 Verify all graticule squares are equal Adjust A15Al R25 as required 33 Verify no distorted graticule squares display tearing display foldover or excessive picture width If CRT abnormalities exist repeat Steps 3 33 34 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 35 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Defaulted Manufacturer Set Press ENTER Key to select ON 36 Press AUX F6 37 Install top cover on A15 CRT para 2 40 Steps 10 11 Install A15 CRT 2 39 2 115 78AIA15 CRT 7005 8644 300 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION This procedure is used after repair of A15 CRT to align the colors and horizontal and vertical dimensions Remove A15 CRT para 2 42 Remove top cover from A15 CRT para 2 43 Step 1 Set POWER Switch to ON and allow 20 minute warm up period Verify input voltage is 12 Vdc 00 3 Vdc with DMM at A1A1W2P1 Pin 12 Sheet 1 of 2 Rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully ccw to display black on CRT Measure voltage at A15A2TP B2 FO 1
280. low or high with Oscilloscope at External Video Connector Pins 3 9 TM 11 6625 3245 12 Appendix H e lf incorrect perform A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Test para 2 16 or A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Test para 2 17 e f correct replace A21 Video Controller para 2 37 Disconnect A1A1WP fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 Press POWER Switch Locate A1A1W2 and A1A1W1 Verify 12 Vdc 1 Vdc with DMM at following pins on A1A1W2P1 and A1A1W1P1 fig 3 Sheet 1 of 2 Correct A1AIW2P1 Pin 12 to Pin 14 Replace A16 Power Supply A1AIW1P1 Pin 6 to Pin 7 para 2 48 A1A1W2P1 Pin 12 A1A1W1P1 Pin 6 to Pin 14 Repair fault between to Pin 7 A16 Power Supply and A15 CRT Sheet 2 of 2 A1A1W2P1 Pin 12 to Pin 14 Perform Steps 6 9 A1A1W1P1 Pin 6 to Pin 7 Verify resistance changes from approximately 10 KQ to lt 1 KQ with DMM between A1A1W2P1 Pins 10 and 11 when INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment is rotated fully cw If incorrect remove A17 Front Panel para 2 49 and replace A17R1 fig FO 18 Sheet 1 of 2 Locate External Video Connector Figure 2 2 TM 11 6625 3245 12 Verify O to 4 V square waveform continuous pulse trains are present Verify approximately 46 us between pulses Verify pulse width of approximately 3 3 us and 0 offset top of waveform is random looking modulation with Oscilloscope at External Video Connector Pin 8 Horizontal Sync TM 11 6625 3245 12 Appendix H as
281. lter to 15 kHz and Detector to Peak Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press RF GEN MODE Key Press More F6 until Disp Fl is displayed Press Disp FI Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Full Anlz Press ENTER Key 2 198 2 109 10 11 12 13 TM 11 6625 3245 40 GEN MODULATION ADJUSTMENT Continued Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 121 MHz Press ENTER Key Record Peak Residual AM on Measuring Receiver Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to SOURCE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select AM in MOD field 1 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MODULATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 90 Press ENTER Key Verify AM Modulation reading on Measuring Receiver is within s5 of Test Set setting less Peak Residual AM If out of tolerance perform Steps 14 27 fin tolerance perform Steps 21 27 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 13 Gen Modulation Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 AM Modulation 90 Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to set modulation reading on Measuring Receiver to 90 plus Peak Residual
282. m FO 12 Sheet 1 FP 33 Replace Procedure TINA a e o tute Petr Lut 2 114 TSATATSAT ERTHN ot ia 2 115 2 ote dated fre lt aussen lia 2 115 EET 2 117 Schematic Diagram FO 12 Sheet 2 FP 35 Troubleshooting Test es ne ee nen 2 60 INDEX 2 78A1 A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Adjustment Procedure cnn nn Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 7 Functional Description Locator Diagram FO 13 Sheet 2 Replace Procedure TEATATI CRT Lenin e e A 78A1A15A1 CRT 78A1A15A2 CRT ZOATAT5A2E inii m RU urere cete Sed Schematic Diagram FO 13 Sheet 1 Troubleshooting ocior reet en alien 78A1A16 Power Supply Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 2 Functional Locator Diagram 14 Replace Procedure eene nnne nnne nnns 78A1A17 Front Panel Functio
283. m Analyzer Adjustment Power Meter Adjustment 2 181 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 2 Post Repair Replace Adjustments Continued REPAIRED REPLACED ASSEMBLIES 78A1A21 Video Controller ADJUSTMENT None 78AIA22 RF I O 78A1A23 Counter VCXO Adjustment 2 97 None 78A1A24 Function Generator Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment Gen Modulation Adjustment para 2 109 78A1A25 Digitizer Scope Adjustment para 2 110 Spectrum Analyzer Adjustment para 2 111 78A1A26 Monitor Control Metering DVM Adjustment 2 98 Func Gen Level and VRMS Meter Adjustment para 2 99 Signal Meter Adjustment FM Adjustment Deviation Meter Adjustment Modulation Meter Adjustment Phase Meter Adjustment Distortion Meter Adjustment Sinad Meter Adjustment para 2 108 Power Meter Adjustment 78A1A27 External I O 78A1A28 Attenuator None Gen Output Level Adjustment para 2 100 78A1A29 Auxiliary Power Supply Power Supply Adjustment para 2 96 78A1A30 Rear Panel Connector None 83A1A2Al Motherboard None 83A1 A3 RF Amplifier 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment 83A1A4 Front Panel None 8 5 Rear Panel None 83A1A6 Memory None 83A1A7 UUT Interface None 83A1A8 Processor None 83A1A9 External None 2 182 2 96 TM 11 6625 3245 40 POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the 5 Vdc and 15 supplies
284. m the DATA SCROLL Spinner and a 2 MHz clock derived from the 8 MHz Clock on the NAT BUS Use of a key on the DATA ENTRY Keypad or the DATA SCROLL Spinner causes an interrupt in the CPU CONTROL SECTION Control This Interrupt alerts the A19 Processor that new data has been entered Enable signals for reading the DATA ENTRY Keypad are provided by the CPU CONTROL SECTION to the KEYBOARD INTERFACE Enable signals for reading the DATA SCROLL Spinner are provided by the CPU CONTROL SECTION to the SPINNER INTERFACE Data resulting from reading either the DATA SCROLL Spinner or the DATA ENTRY Keypad is returned to the CPU CONTROL SECTION through the DATA BUS 1 20 A23P1 MOTHERBOARD um 8 MHz CLOCK 1 MHz LO 2nd Lo 425 kHz IF RECEIVER CE2FO215 ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS CONTROL BUS CPU CONTROL SECTION SPINNER INTERFACE NAT BUS INTERFACE KEYBOARD INTERFACE COUNTER FUNCTION INTERFACE Figure 1 10 A23 Counter Functional Block Diagram 1 21 DMM INTERFACE gt A29P2 MOTHERBOARD SPINNER BUS KEYBOARD BUS COUNTER AUDIO TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 9 j 78A1A17 Front Panel fig 1 11 The A17 Front Panel provides the interface between the operator and the Test Set and provides the RF and Audio Data link between the UUT and Test Set The A17A2A1 Function Keyboard is composed of th
285. mplifier Test Cable RF AMP Switch to ON Verify 15 Vdc 1 Vdc with DMM at drain of A3A2Q3 and ground If incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Switch A3A2S1 and A3A2S2 to off Connect DMM in series with 15 from Power Supply and set to measure Amps Verify 350 mA 150 mA with DMM If incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Connect jumper from drain of A3A2Q3 to A3A2TP1 Verify 650 mA with DMM Adjust ASA2R5 as required Disconnect jumper from A3A2TP1 Connect jumper to 2 2 Verify 650 mA with DMM Adjust ASA2R6 as required Disconnect jumper from ASA2TP2 and drain of A3A2Q3 Switch 251 and A3A2S2 to ON Disconnect A3W1P2 and A3W2P1 Connect Tracking Generator to A3A2J2 Connect Spectrum Analyzer input to A3A2J3 Disconnect 5 Power Supply line from A3A2J6 Pin Connect ground to A3A2J6 Pin Set Tracking Generator output to 5 dBm Set Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency to 52 MHz MHz Division to 5 Bandwidth to Normal Detent Attenuator to 30 dBm dB Division to 1 or 2 dBm and Reference Level to 0 dBm Set 1 dB point of filter knee to 51 57 MHz by adjustment of windings on A3A2L11 and A3A2L12 Set Spectrum Analyzer MHz Division to 5 Verify filter flatness is 1 dB If incorrect adjust windings on A3A2L11 and A3A2L12 Perform Steps 5 9 Using Permabond Appendix B item 10 seal A3A2L11 and A3A2L 12 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to HI Set Spec
286. n Appendix TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix C in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Step2 Press AF GEN MODE Key Step 3 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to GEN 1 Press ENTER Key to select On Step 4 Locate Wall fig FQ 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify 4 1 Vdc logic switching with Oscilloscope at W31P2 Pins 1 2 and 4 4 when VOL CONTROL Keys are pressed e If any voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control 2 32 Step 5 Verify 1 kHz sine wave with Oscilloscope at A3P1 Pin 16B If incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 If correct replace A17LS1 para 2 55 2 12 MALFUNCTION Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 12 Self Test Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Verify Test Running was displayed in lower left corner of CRT Perforrh para 2 13 for keys AUX F6 4 and ENTER Verify Self Test completed all tests in lt 3 minutes Replace A25 Digitizer para 2 24 Verify Self Test displays P for all tests Perform Self Test Failure Test para 2 14 13 Squelch Inoperable Squelch Failure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Remove A26 Monitor Control and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 instal Boar Test Set Install Monitor Monitor Control Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix in place
287. nal Block Diagram Figure 1 11 Funetional Deseription ea rare en eda uet eds Locator Diagram FO 15 Sheet 1 Replace Procedure FrontParnelz iieri ee een 78A1A17A1 TBATALFA2 Keyboard ini e daa evade es TGATATZJ2A 78AAA17J2B7 ne ee d dn av da god edd NO TL ZR S e AN Schematic Diagram FO 15 Sheet 2 2 22 78A1A19 Processor Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 Functional Description ER rene Locator Diagram FO 16 Replace Procedure 78 1 20 Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 4 Functional Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet Replace Procedure ied otc O ba 78A1A21 Video Controller Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 Functional Locator Diagram FO 16 Sheet Replace Proced re o eiit ete SEE ede tre ee ini 78A1A22 RF I O Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 5 Functional Description 44 620414 nennen nnns Locator Dia
288. nal Meter Press ENTER Key twice Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 100 Press ENTER Key 11 Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 12 Disconnect test equipment 2 103 FM ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the FM demodulation circuit Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warmup period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Connect external test equipment as shown PON oo 0000 po oooo 0 OO 0000 0000000 0000000 OO 0000000 00 0000000000 DEMOD OUT SIGNAL GENERATOR OSCILLOSCOPE GE2FO253 5 Set RF Signal Generator output for 121 100000 MHz at 30 dBm 2 189 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 103 FM ADJUSTMENT Continued 6 T 8 Set Oscilloscope Trigger to Auto Sweep to 500 ILs Coupling to DC and V Div to 20 mV Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 121 1000 MHz Press ENTER Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 Select AGC Type Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 User Defined Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Measurement Press ENTER Key Press RCVR MODE Key Verify FREQ ERR is lt 10 Hz Adjust Signal Generator frequency as required Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key
289. ncorrect replace A15A2 Deflection para 2 45 e Ifall voltages are correct replace A15V1 7005 8644 300 para 2 46 8 Perform A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Adjustment Procedure para 2 115 2 18 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER TEST DESCRIPTION Isolates problem in RF Amplifier to malfunctioning component NOTE Perform this test only when instructed from fable 2 1 r another troubleshooting test Do not perform this troubleshooting test as a separate procedure unless otherwise instructed Certain conditions have been established and or tested prior to performing this test 1 Remove RF Amplifie para 2 77 Remove cover from RF Amplifier 2 78 2 Disconnect coaxial cable from A3A2J1 Sheet 1 of 2 and A3A2J2 Disconnect coaxial cable from A3A2J3 and A3A2J4 Verify gt 50 with DMM at A3A2J6 Pins 1 3 and A3A2J6 Pins 5 8 Verify A3A2J6 Pin 4 is shorted to ground with DMM e f incorrect repair short on respective line Change 1 2 63 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 18 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER TEST Continued 3 Connect RF Amplifier Test Cable Connector to A3A2J6 Connect RF Amplifier Test Cable wires to Power Supply as follows Black Wire Ground Red Wire 15 Yellow Wire 15 Orange Wire 5 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to LO and RF Amplifier Test Cable RF AMP Switch to OFF Activate Power Supply Verify 50 17 with DMM at A3A2R57 10 11 e If incorrect perfo
290. ncy Counter and Distortion Analyzer at A24P2 Pin 3B Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Disconnect W13 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A9 90 MHz Generator FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect T Connector between W13 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and A9J3 FO 6 and connect Measuring Receiver to T Connector Set Measuring Receiver Low Pass Filter to 15 kHz and High Pass Filter to 300 Hz Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to AF FREQ Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 100 00 Hz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to DEVIATION Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 5 0 kHz Press ENTER Key 2 20 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 25 RF GEN FM Failure Continued Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Verify 1 kHz 10 Hz at 5 kHz 10 modulation with Measuring Receiver Replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 Disconnect W12 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Measuring Receiver to W12 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 2500 MHz Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver to measure RMS FM Deviation and verify 100 Hz RMS FM Deviation e If incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 Disconnect WII from A13 Generator fig FO 2 She
291. nge 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 APPENDIX B EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST Section I INTRODUCTION B 1 SCOPE This appendix lists expendable supplies you will need for maintenance on the Radio Test Set These items are authorized to you by 50 970 Expendable Durable items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items B 2 EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS a Column 1 Number This number is assigned to the entry in the listing and is referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the material e g Use cleaning compound item 5 App b Column 2 Level This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item C Operator Crew O Unit Maintenance H General Support Maintenance Column 3 National Stock Number This column indicates the National Stock Number assigned to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes d Column 4 Description This column indicates the Federal item name and if required a minimum description to identify the item The last line for each item gives the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGE in parentheses followed by the part number e Column 5 Unit of Measure U M This column indicates the measure used in performing the actual maintenance function This measure is expressed by a two character alphabetical abbreviation e g EA IN PR If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue requisi
292. nt Locator and Schematic Diagram Lt P o SHIELD SHIELD 1 fat ea TRIPLER 10 01 33 01 cm che cra Rs IU 1 2 MBRO40 MBRO MERO MBRO Q 47 184004 DRAERS T gt T gt 1 c5 Uic m La 47 Lar i NOTES qu E D 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED SOURCE gt H 1 ALL REFERENCE NUMBERS CARRY MSS AN ASSIGNED DESIGNATOR SERIES vo THIS At CARRIES SERIES En SSEMBLY CARRIES SERIES oun eu Don 10 i A29 e g Jt I T 2 RESISTORS ARE 1 9 1 TOLERANCE IRL SOURCE uta 3 ALL RESISTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN OHMS 6 1 MC14049U0 MC14049U8 MC14049UE 4 ALL CAPACITANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MCROFARADS 4 m 5 ALLINDUCTANCE IS EXPRESSED IN MCROHENRYS en MMETA904 6 PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 78 1 M 560 MC14049UB 1 gt j j 14 SHED SHIELD SHIELD i AM2NALO 2 1 TCXO PWA 3 RF 18V EXTERNAL Em 5 46610 VK REFERENCE EE RB STATUS Qu 101400 1 r 10 STATUS 1STA 9 LATCH ISTA 7 STATUS ISTB 8 LATCHISTB E 11 CLOCK 12 2 2 3 Brasv ABWIPI 428 ATTENUATOR 4 L al DATA CLOCK pa LATCH ATT
293. operational purposes only This determination was made on 15 January 1995 Other requests for this document will be referred to Commander US Army Communications Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth ATTN AMSEL LC LEO P MM T Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 5007 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document 1 By Order of the Secretary of the Army DENNIS 4 REIMER General United States Army Chief af Staff Official Z y JOEL B HUDSON Administrative Assistari to the Secretary of the Anny 02451 By Order of tha Secretary of the Marine Corps H E HEESE Deputy for Support Manne Corps Research Development and Acquisition Command DISTRIBUTION be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 323318 requirements for TM 11 5625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE ON CHANGED PAGES THE PORTION OF THE TEXT AFFECTED BY THE LATEST CHANGE IS INDICATED BY A VERTICAL LINE OR OTHER CHANGE SYMBOL IN THE OUTER MARGIN OF THE PAGE Date of issue for original and changed pages are Original 0 Change 1 Change 2 5 April 1994 1 August 1996 25 May 2007 Total number of pages in this publication is 354 consisting of the following Page Change No No lo 2 d nu 2 2 Blank iia unite 2 E E 2
294. or Control para 2 32 3 Verify 2 5 Vdc i0 5 Vdc with DMM at A26J2 Pin 47 e fincorrect perform Step 4 e f correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 4 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 18 5 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 0 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 20 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 0 Vdc 0 5 Vdc voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 If all voltages are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 Run Extended Self Test 8 2 RF Test Locate A26 Monitor Contrdl fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 250 Vdc 0 05 Vdc with DMM at A26J2 Pin 47 FH Sheet 3 of 3 e If incorrect perform Steps 7 8 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 7 Locate A14 Power Termination fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 300 0 05 with DMM at A14FL1 FO 11 e lfincorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 8 Locate A26 Monitor Control fig FO P Sheet 1 of 5 and verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 Sheet 3 of 3 A26J2 Pin 18 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 5 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 20 0 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 21 0 0 5 e f any voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e Ifall voltages are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 2 39 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 9 AUDIO SINAD 1 Locate 26 Monitor Control fig
295. or is differentiated to produce a Phase Modulation signal Data from the A22 RF 1 0 selects between the two This signal is added to the 10 MHz VCO signal to produce a 10 MHz IF Signal The final product is mixed with the output from the 78 80 MHz LO produced in the Coarse Loop This 88 90 MHz IF Signal is passed to the Attenuator The Attenuator is digitally controlled by the signals passed by the A22 RF The LATCH GEN Signal is used to identify the data as being for the Digital Controlled Attenuator AM Modulation from the A24 Function Generator is also summed with the Attenuator The LVL DET Signal is fed back from the A13 Generator IF to maintain the proper RF Output Level The final product is passed through 90 MHz Low pass Filter and to the A13 Generator IF Once both the Fine Loop and the Coarse Loop are phase locked both loops pass signals to the LOCK DETECT Circuit When both signal are present the LOCK DETECT generates STATUS GEN Signal signifying that the A9 90 MHz Generator is in a phase locked condition 1 44 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A9J3 MOTHERBOARD GENERATOR IF FM MOD SELECT LATCH GEN CLOCK DATA LATCH GEN B PREPOSITION DIGITAL CONTROLLED REN LATCH GEN LVL DET STATUS GEN CE2FO214 Figure 1 22 A9 90 MHz Generator Functional Block Diagram 1 45 TM 11 6625 3245 40 21 v 78A1A13 Generator IF fig 1 23 The
296. or then generates the signal to deflect the image vertically and passes it to the Vertical Yoke The HORIZ SYNC Signal from the A21 Video Controller is used to Create the BLANKING signal for the CRT Deflect the image horizontally on the CRT e Clock the PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR Deflecting the image horizontally is done by passing the HORIZ SYNC signal to the Horizontal Deflection Oscillator which generates the Horizontal Deflection Signal and passes it to the Horizontal Yoke Feedback returns from the Horizontal Yoke to the Flyback Transformer The Flyback Transformer then supplies the ANODE FOCUS and SCREEN Voltages to the CRT Another use of the HORIZ SYNC Signal is to create the Blanking Signal The HORIZ SYNC Signal is passed to the CLAMP GATE to generate the Blanking Signal to the COLOR BLANKING CONTROLLER The HORIZ SYNC Signal is also used to clock the PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR which controls the HIGH POWER SWITCHER and FLYBACK TRANSFORMER The HORIZ SYNC Signal supplied by the A21 Video Controller is Inverted before being passed to the PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR 1 12 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A15J1 RED OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD AMP AND CUTOFF ADJ SEC RED CATHODE RAY Ea SEC PRIMARY SECONDARY SHRED Ken GREEN 2 BUFFER uu NOH NEIWORIE COLOR BLANKING SG GREEN SAND ur SEC BLUE CONTROLLER CUTOFF ADJ BLUE VERT SYNC Ya HORIZ SYNC HORIZ BLUE O
297. ower Termination Control signals for the A28 Attenuator originate in the A19 Processor The A22 RF I O converts the data into a serial format and passes the data to the A28 Attenuator through the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply The data is accepted by the A28 Attenuator when the appropriate Latching signal LATCH ATTEN is generated The serial data is converted to parallel format and split into control signals Decoder 1 passes control signals to the A14 Power Termination and A12 Receive IF It also passes the control signal for the 1 dB setting of Attenuator Decoder 2 is used to control the remainder of the Attenuator settings The A28 Attenuator both passes control signals and accepts status signals for the A14 Power Termination The A28 Attenuator decodes the following control lines for the A14 Power Termination DUPLEX sets DUPLEX OUT Connector A17J2A as output connector RANGE SELECT sets switch selecting signal for RF PWR LVL Signal 20dB PAD activates 20 dB attenuator in signal path from T R Connector W2J1 The status signals accepted from the A14 Power Termination include ALARM T R Connector WIJ1 Overload POWER MODE POWER TERM TEMP RF POWER LEVEL Status signals are also accepted from the A12 Receive IF and A13 Generator IF The A13 Generator IF passes the GEN LEVEL DET Signal for eventual use by the A9 90 MHz Generator ANTENNA OVERLOAD STATUS is provided for the A19 Processor by the A12 Receive IF Control signals provide
298. p VCO to form the 33 3 MHz IF Signal The signal is then passed to the 2nd Mixer The 2nd Mixer converts the 33 3 MHz IF Signal to a 10 7 MHz IF Signal using the signal generated by the 44 MHz VCO The 10 7 MHz IF Signal is then passed to the A4 Analyzer Log IF The Sweep VCO Signal is also passed to the 3rd Mixer as the first stage of the phase lock system for the Sweep VCO Using the 77 3 79 3 LO Signal from the A7 3rd LO the 3rd Mixer converts the Sweep VCO Signal to a 44 MHz Signal 1 38 TM 11 6625 3245 40 A533 3512 1st MIXER 2nd MIXER ER RECEIVE IF LOGAF 90 MHz 33 3 MHz 33 3 MHz 107 MHz 6 83 95 MHz z 2 116 3 128 3 MHz 44 ASP1 SWEEP SWEEP MOTHERBOARD 116 3 128 3 MHz 77 3 79 3 MHz 116 3 128 3 MHz 44 MHz SWEEP 3rd MIXER ASP1 MOTHERBOARD ANALYZER LOCK 44 MHz VCO 1MH DETECT 44 MHz 4 MH CE2FO237 Figure 1 19 AS Analyzer RF Functional Block Diagram 1 39 TM 11 6625 3245 40 18 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF fig 1 20 The 10 7 MHz IF Signal is sent to the A4 Analyzer Log IF from the A5 Analyzer RF The A19 Processor sends information on Resolution Bandwidth through the NAT BUS to the A22 RF where the data is converted to serial format The A22 RF passes the serial data to the A4 Analyzer Log IF where the information is decoded in the Bandwidth Select Area into signals for setting the Pin Diode Switches to proper settings Select lines are sent to t
299. perform Step 5 4 Verify level of Region 3 is lt 10 of Region 1 e If incorrect perform Step 5 e If correct replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 5 Verify voltages with DMM at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 18 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 19 0 0 5 A26J2 Pin 20 5 0 5 A26J2 Pin 21 5 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A26J2 Pin 31 0 Vdc 0 5 Vdc e voltage is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 6 Loop Self Test 12 and verify signals with Oscilloscope are not stuck at 7 5 Vdc or 7 at A26J2 A26J2 Pin 8 A26J2 Pin 9A26J2 Pin 10 A26J2 Pin 11 A26J2 Pin 12A26J2 Pin 13 A26J2 Pin 14 A26J2 Pin 15A26J2 Pin 16 A26J2 Pin 17 If any signal is incorrect replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 e f all signals are correct replace Monitor para 2 31 2 43 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 13 CWT FILTER NOTE Failures for Self Test 13 are detected as multiple failures Failures for Self Test 13 are indicated and cleared on previous Self Test procedures 14 HP FILTER 1 Locate A26 Monitor FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Run Self Test 14 and verify signal with Oscilloscope and x10 Probe at A26J2 Pin 47 fig FO 16 Sheet 3 of 3 as shown 2 Verify level of Region 1 is 1 Vdc i0 2 V e If incorrect perform Step 5 3 Verify level of Region 2 is 5096 to 9096 of level in Region 1 e fincorrect perform Step 5
300. presets the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR to a frequency that is close to the required frequency The Reference for the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR is a 1 MHz signal derived from the 10 MHz Standard Signal The 10 MHz Signal passes through a 10 Divider to form a 1 MHz Signal This 1 MHz Signal is phase shifted as needed to correct phase shift error The signal generated by the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR passes through the DIGITAL PLL LOOP FILTER at high gain From the DIGITAL PLL LOOP FILTER the signal is presented as the DC TUNE Signal to the VCO Once the VCO has locked on to the Operating Frequency the DIGITAL PLL LOOP FILTER switches to low gain operation to reduce conflict with the AC TUNE Signal Additionally a 1ST STATUS Signal one for Receive and one for Generate is generated to the A29 Auxiliary Power Supply Feedback is routed to two areas within the A10 1st LO to establish a phase lock condition The first signal is the VCO TO DIVIDER Signal The VCO TO DIVIDER Signal is passed through a 256 4272 Prescaler before being presented to the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR The MOD Modulus CONTROL Signal determines the prescale value used Using the 1 MHz Reference the DIGITAL PLL DIVIDER amp COMPARATOR adjusts the output to correct the final output signal After a period of time the second signal the VCO TO SAMPLER Signal is amplified and passed through the sampler which is clocked by the PULSE GENERATOR
301. r sheeting and 4 screws with captive washers 10 Install screw with captive washer 11 Install bottom cover 9 and 4 screws with captive washers 8 Install 7 15 2 Deflection Socket 7 Install wire cable connector 6 Reconnect 5 wire cable connectors 4 Install 78A1A15A2 Deflection Sub 5 Install 4 screws with captive washers 3 Install bracket 2 and 2 screws with captive washers 1 7 and 2 121 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 45 REPLACE 78A1A15A2 DEFLECTION Continued CE2FO224 2 122 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 45 REPLACE 78A1A15A2 DEFLECTION Continued gt CE2FO227 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A15A1 Video para 2 43 Install 78 1 15 CRT 2 42 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 123 2 46 REPLACE 78AIA15V1 7005 8644 300 INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES REMOVE Remove 4 screws with captive washers 1 Remove 78A1A15V1 2 INSTALL Install 78A1A15V1 2 Install 4 screws with captive washers 1 1 2 1 2 Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78 1 15 CRT para 2 42 Remove 78A1A15A1 Video para 2 43 TM 11 6625 3245 40 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Inst
302. r to A9J3 FO 8 and verify 20 dBm 10 dB Replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 2 16 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 20 RF GEN Level Flatness Failure Continued Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Reconnect W13 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Locate A14 Power Termination Sheet 1 of 5 and disconnect A14P4 fig FO 11 Remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 Reconnect A28J1 A28J2 A28J3 and A28J4 FO 17 Locate A13 Generator fig FOF2 Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 11 5 dBm 3 dB with Power Meter at A13P6 fig FO 10 Replace A13 Generator IF para 2 68 Connect 50 n Load to A13P6l fig FO 10 Connect Signal Generator to 28 5 fig FO 1 Set Signal Generator for 100 MHz 7 dBm Record reference level Verify insertion loss is 3 dB maximum 0 3 dB with Power Meter at A28J6 If incorrect remove A28 Attenuator and replace A28AT1 If correct replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 21 RF GEN Frequency Accuracy Failure Step 1 Step 2 Disconnect W12 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF Sheet 1 of 5 and connect Frequency Counter to W12 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 Enter frequencies in Test Set RF Field and verify readings on Frequency Counter 50 MHz 1350 MHz 25 Hz 200 MHz 1500 MHz 100 Hz 400 MHz 1700 MHz 200Hz 600 MHz 1900 MHz 300 Hz 800 MHz 2100 MHz 40
303. ra 2 21 Remove 7843 Bottom Casel para 2 23 REMOVE i Remove wire cable connector 1 2 Disconnect 3 coaxial cable connectors 2 3 Loosen 4 nuts 3 securing each bracket on 78A1A13 Generator IF and 2 nuts 4 securing each bracket on 78A1A28 Attenuator 4 Disconnect coaxial cable connector 5 5 Slide 78A1A13 Generator IF and 78A1A28 Attenuator to front 6 Loosen 4 captive screws 6 7 Remove 78A1A14 Power Termination 7 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A14 Power Termination 7 2 Tighten 4 captive screws 6 3 Slide 78A1A13 Generator IF and 78A1A28 Attenuator to rear 4 Reconnect coaxial cable connector 5 5 Tighten 4 nuts 3 securing each bracket on 78A1A13 Generator IF and 2 nuts 4 securing each bracket on 78A1A28 Attenuator 6 Reconnect 3 coaxial cable connectors 2 7 Reconnect wire cable connector 1 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Perform Adjustments Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 151 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 72 REPLACE 78A1A14W1 DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A3 Bottom 2 23 Remove 78A1A14 Power Termination para 2 71 REMOVE 1 Unsolder 10 wires on 10 feedthrus 1 2 Unsolder wire on ground lug 2 3 Remove 78A1A14W1 3 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1A14W1 3
304. rcuit once the Phase Lock Loop condition exists The other path for the output of the 350 MHz VCO is through a 5 Divider and a 100 Divider to divide the 350 356 2 signal by 500 The resulting signal 700 712 4 kHz is passed to the PHASE DETECTOR The output of the Summation VCO is mixed with the output of the Coarse Loop to form a 700 712 4 kHz signal for input to the Phase Detector This signal is compared against the output of the Fine Loop This Phase Detect Charge Pump output tunes the Summation to the correct frequency If the Summation frequency exceeds the Coarse Loop frequency the Summation VCO is railed low by a comparator The Summation VCO is then freed and the system is allowed to function normally Once the Summation VCO is properly tuned and phase lock is achieved the Phase Detector outputs a Summation Loop Lock Detect signal to the Lock Detect Circuit Once all three loops are phase locked and Lock Detect signals are available the Lock Detect Circuit outputs a 3rd LO Status Signal and extinguishes the Lock LED 1 32 TM 11 6625 3245 40 15 i5 780 125 800 MHz COARSE LOOP SUMMATION LOOP A7P1 MOTHERBOARD 780 800 MHz DATA CLOCK LATCH B PHASE LATCH A DETECTOR 7 RECEIVE IF LOCK DETECT PRE POSITION LOGIC A7J4 ANALYZER RF MOTHERBOARD DETECT STATUS 3RD CIRCUIT LOCK DETECT PRE POSITION LOGIC CE2FO209 Figure 1 16 A7 8rd
305. re position the 77 3 79 3 MHz VCO in the Summation Loop The signal generated by the 780 800 MHz VCO takes two paths First the signal is passed back through a 64 165 Divider and compared to a Phase Lock Loop 125 kHz Reference which uses the 1 MHz Reference as a clock The comparison initiates a Phase Lock Loop after proper adjustment of the VCO frequency The PLL comparator outputs a LOCK DETECT signal to the Lock Detect Circuit once the Phase Lock Loop condition exists The second path for the 780 800 MHz signal is through a 10 Divider for an effective range of 78 0125 80 MHz with an increment of 12 5 kHz This signal is mixed with the output of the Summation Loop creating a 700 712 4 kHz signal which is presented to a Phase Detector The phase detector compares the output of this signal with the signal presented by the 350 356 2 MHz Fine Loop The 350 356 2 MHz Fine Loop Operates similar to the 780 800 MHz Coarse Loop The 350 MHz VCO is pretuned by the data passed by the A22 RF after it is passed through a D A Converter The analog voltage created is used to pretune the 350 MHz VCO The signal generated by the 350 MHz VCO takes two paths First the signal is passed back through a 64 65 Divider and compared to a Phase Lock Loop 50 kHz Reference which uses the 1 MHz Reference as a clock The comparison initiates a Phase Lock Loop after proper adjustment of the VCO frequency The PLL comparator outputs a LOCK DETECT signal to the Lock Detect Ci
306. rence to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE SIGNATURE AUTOVON PLUS EXTEN SION 788 1234 DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED USAPA V3 01 MSG Jane Doe SFC TO Forward direct to addressee listed in publication FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code DATE Commander U S Army Aviation and Missile Command MSG Jane Q Doe 8 30 02 ATTN AMSAM MMC MA NP 1234 Any Street Redstone Arsenal 35898 Nowhere Town AL 34565 PART REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS p NUMBER p TITLE TOTAL NO PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE OF MAJOR ITEMS SUPPORTED 4 e AN PART REMARKS Any general remarks blank form bla TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION MSG Jane Q Doe SFC 788 1234 USAPA V3 01 Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and Spe RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND cial Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply Catalogs BLANK FORMS Supply Manuals SC SM For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is ODISC4 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART 1 ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NU
307. ress ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keys to enter 87 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key gi oo 2 92 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 20 FREQUENCY AGILITY TEST Continued 7 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor 2 Select Mod Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 11 User Defined Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 IF Filters Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 300 kHz Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 Select AGC Type Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Manual Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 255 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT KEYS to move cursor to 6 Out Speaker Press ENTER Key to select Off Press RF GEN MODE Key and SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 5 RF Gen Setup Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 RF Gen Freq Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 30 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 RF Gen Level Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 0 0 dBm Press ENTER Key Press ESC F6 AUX F6 and S R Fl Verify signal is within 1 kHz of 87 MHz in 1 5 ms from Trigger with Modulation Domain Analyzer as shown UTILITY HPJB PRINT _ dli SELFCAL MENU SELFCAL MENU mp MENU u He
308. rform Steps 48 52 If in tolerance perform Modulation Meter Adjustment para 2 105 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Dev Meter RMS Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 2 193 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 105 MODULATION METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust the Modulation Meter for the Receive function 1 Set Signal Generator output for 121 100000 MHz at 0 dBm with 80 AM modulation and 1 kHz tone 2 Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Low Pass Filter to 15 kHz and Detector AM 3 Press RCVR MODE Key 4 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select AM2 Press ENTER Key 5 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Meter Press ENTER Key 6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 Press ENTER Key 7 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 8 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu 9 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 4 Modulation Meter Press ENTER Key 10 Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key 11 Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 2 194 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 106 PHASE METER ADJUSTMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to adjust
309. rm Step 4 f correct perform Steps 6 16 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to HI Verify 50 17 Vdc with DMM at A3A2R57 e If incorrect perform Step 5 If correct troubleshoot A3A2Q12 and associated circuitry fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 2 Remove A3A2R59 Verify 50 Vdc 7 Vdc with DMM at A3A2R57 f incorrect troubleshoot 204 A3A2CR8 A3A2CR9 and associated circuitry Install ASA2R59 fig FO 21 Sheet 1 of 2 f correct troubleshoot A3A2Q13 ASA2CR3 A3A2CR4 and associated circuitry Install AJA2R59 fig FO 21 Sheet 1 of 2 Verify 5 1 with DMM at 2 f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2Q9 A3A2Q12 A3A2Q8 206 204 and associated circuitry fig FO 21 Sheet 2 of 2 Verify 50 7 Vdc with DMM at 2 e f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2Q7 A3A2Q10 A3A2Q11 2013 and associated circuitry Sheet 2 of 2 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to Hi Verify 50 Vdc i7 Vdc with DMM at A3A2TP3 e f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2Q9 A3A2Q12 208 2 4 and associated circuitry Sheet 2 of 2 Verify 5 1 Vdc with DMM at 2 e f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2Q7 A3A2Q10 A3A2Q11 2013 and associated circuitry Sheet 2 of 2 Set Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Output to 5 dBm Center Frequency to 70 MHz MHz Division to 20 Bandwidth to Normal Detent Attenuator to 30 dBm and dB Divi
310. rol Extended Ribbon Cable Appendix Q in place of Monitor Monitor Control Ribbon Cable W31 Step 2 Connect Oscilloscope Probe to Distortion Analyzer input Verify gt 0 25 distortion with Distortion Analyzer at A3P1 Pin 3A fig FO 4 Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Step 3 Connect Oscilloscope Probe to Distortion Analyzer input Verify gt 0 25 distortion with Distortion Analyzer at A3P1 Pin 1A fig FO 4 e incorrect replace Monitor para 2 31 If correct replace A17A1 Connector para 2 54 2 14 MALFUNCTION TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 18 External Modulation Failure Step 1 Step 2 Remove A24 Function 2 33 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 irj Appendix of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Verify 3 3 VRMS 0 3 V with DMM at A24P2 Pin IB fig FO 16 Sheet 2 of 3 e If incorrect replace A17A1 2 54 If correct replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 19 MIC ACC IN OUT Connector Modulation Failure Step 1 Step 2 Remove A24 Function Generator 2 38 and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 29 1 Appendix of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test Set Verify deflection of Oscilloscope trace coincident with tapping on Microphone at A24P2 Pin 1 Sheet 2 of 3 e If incorrect replace A17A1 Connector
311. rom the unit they should be placed on the conductive work surface or in conductive containers When not being worked on wrap disconnected circuit boards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have been coated or impregnated with a conductive material Do not handle these devices unnecessarily or remove from their packages until actually used or tested d Change 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 C2 CHANGE Headquarters Department of the Army No 2 Washington D C 25 May 2007 GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR RADIO TEST SET AN GRM 114B TS 4358 G NSN 6625 01 309 2824 ElC KN2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION This document has been reviewed for the presence of solvents containing hazardous materials as defined by the EPCRA 302 and 313 lists by the Engineering Environment and Logistics Oversight Office As of the base document through C1 dated 1 August 1996 all references to solvents containing hazardous materials have been removed from this document by substitution with non hazardous or less hazardous materials where possible OZONE DEPLETING CHEMICAL INFORMATION This document has been reviewed for the presence of Class ozone depleting chemicals by the Engineering Environment and Logistics Oversight Office As of the base document through C1 dated 1 August 1996 all references to Class ozone depleting chemicals have been removed from this document by substitution with chemicals that do not cause atmospheric ozone depletion
312. rs Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top 4213 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A17 Front Panel 2 49 REMOVE Qui o 4 2 set screws 1 Remove knob 2 and nut 3 Unsolder 2 wires on speaker 6 Remove 4 nuts and 4 washers 4 Remove top speaker bracket 5 and speaker 78A1A17LS1 6 Remove 4 screws 7 Remove bottom speaker bracket 8 Remove 8 screws 9 Unsolder 2 wires 11 on 78A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 Remove 78A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 Unsolder DATA SCROLL Spinner 78A1A17RE1 12 from 78A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 INSTALL 1 Solder DATA SCROLL Spinner 78A1A17RE1 12 to 78A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 Install 73A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 Solder 2 wires 11 to 78A1A17A2 Keyboard 10 Install 8 screws 9 Install bottom speaker bracket 8 Install 4 screws 7 Install top speaker bracket 5 and speaker 78A1A17LS1 6 Install 4 nuts and 4 washers 4 Solder 2 wires to speaker 6 Install nut 3 and knob 2 Tighten 2 set screws 1 2 134 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 55 REPLACE 78A1A17A2 KEYBOARD Continued FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A1A17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom Case 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK
313. rsor to 3 Monochrome Display Set Press ENTER Key to select On 2 61 Press AUX F6 and verify red green and or blue colors are absent on CRT Verify waveform as shown below with Oscilloscope on A15A2 CRT Color OEA 119 Md s NP A2U1 Pins 16 20 25 If incorrect remove A15A2 CRT Color para 2 40 troubleshoot A15A2U1 and associated circuitry fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 3 CE2FO248 If incorrect remove A15A2 CRT Colorl para 2 40 troubleshoot A15A2Q1 and associated circuitry fig FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT CE2FO249 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 16 78A1A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 TEST Continued RED COLOR FAILED Location If incorrect troubleshoot components If all locations are correct FO 12 Sheet 1 of 3 and associated troubleshoot circuitry FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 A2U1 Pin 25 A1U5 and A2U1 A2R5 and Al 5V1 A2R5 A2Q3 and A2Q4 GREEN COLOR FAILED Location If incorrect troubleshoot components If all locations are correct FO 12 Sheet 1 of 3 and associated troubleshoot circuitry fig FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 A2U1 Pin 20 A1U5 and A2U1 A2R17 and A15V1 A2R17A2Q7 and A2Q8 A2R17 and A15V1 BLUE COLOR FAILED Location If incorrect troubleshoot components If all locations are correct 20 12 Sheet 1 of 3 and associated troubleshoot circuitry FO 12 Sheet 2 of 3 A2U1 Pin 16 A1U5
314. rupts the A19 Processor as needed with Keyboard Spinner information The CPU CONTROL SECTION controls the actions of all other major sections of the A23 Counter The CPU CONTROL SECTION consists of the Zilog Super 8 Microprocessor ROM SRAM and a decoder for translating address and data signals into control signals for the various sections of the A23 Counter The NAT BUS INTERFACE provides the connection between the A19 Processor through the NAT BUS and the CPU CONTROL SECTION The COUNTER FUNCTION INTERFACE counts the frequency of the Audio and the 425 kHz IF Signals Counting the 425 kHz IF Signal provides the RF Error from the frequency of the A6 Receiver The COUNTER FUNCTION uses the 1 MHz Reference Signal from the All 2 1 LO as the frequency time base for counting frequency Control signals are passed to the COUNTER FUNCTION INTERFACE by the CPU CONTROL SECTION through the CONTROL BUS Data from the COUNTER FUNCTION INTERFACE is returned through the DATA BUS to the CPU CONTROL SECTION which passes the data through the NAT BUS to the A19 Processor The A23 Counter both reads and writes to the A8 DMM Communication with the A8 DMM is conducted through the DMM INTERFACE Data to and from the A8 DMM is in serial format therefore a clock and latch system is required as well as a data line in and a data line out The A23 Counter also reads the DATA ENTRY Keypad and the DATA SCROLL Spinner Reading Spinner counts requires SPINA and SPINB signals fro
315. s E fiuit Oooo BET d El D 2 p E one ERBE SEE EEE EEE UUT Interface A A A6 Memory PREFIX ALL REFERENCE DESIGNATORS WITH 8 1 Figure FO 23 83A1A6 83A1A7 83A1A8 and 83A1A9 PC Board Assemblies Component Locator Diagrams Sheet 1 of 2 FP 71 FP 72 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 As CAUTION CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD Dan DANAN RA 3p fi B 5 8 D D d p ER oa I gt STE EK Y q lt gt 5 D 5 D ae 2 9 8 1 p a o IA CO 1 32 gt
316. s to cursor to Deviation Meter Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 100 kHz Press ENTER Key Step 6 Press Ret F6 Change 1 2 22 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 30 Receiver Selectivity Failure Continued Step 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to Attn Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 dB Press ENTER Key Step 8 Adjust UUT Squelch Controls for lowest setting where signal from Signal Generator breaks squelch Step 9 Set Signal Generator to 80 1 MHz at 57 dBm Verify Receiver breaks squelch e If incorrect perform Step 10 If correct replace Receiver para 2 30 Step 10 Verify 0 0 5 with DMM at A22P2 Pin 15A and Pin 16A FO 18 Sheet 2 of 3 If incorrect replace 22 RF I O para 2 34 e If correct replace Receiver para 2 30 31 ANTENNA IN or DUPLEX OUT Connector Overload Protection Failure Connect coaxial cable between AUDIO OUT Connector and ANTENNA IN Connector then AUDIO OUT Connector and DUPLEX OUT Connector and verify warning tone sounds and input overload message is displayed f warning tone sounds and input overload message is displayed only for AUDIO OUT Connector ANTENNA IN Connector replace A12 Receive IF para 2 66 f warning tone sounds and input overload message is displayed
317. s to move cursor to 5 Select AGC Type Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Manual Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 1 Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 Verify flat line on Oscilloscope Press More F6 until AGC F5 appears Press AGC F5 Rotate DATA SCROLL Spinner cw and verify waveform as shown REC RF 100 0000 MHz MOD FREQ RF IN ANT 0dB 99 99995 FREQ 49 0 Hz AF m 2 179 2 79 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued AGC Continued 19 Rotate DATA SCROLL Spinner cw and verify waveform REC RF 100 0000 MHz MOD FREQ 0 dB Rev IF 99 99995 FREQ ERR AF 1 000 k mil 20 Press ENTER Key 21 Disconnect external test equipment RECEIVER SENSITIVITY 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect Signal Generator to ANTENNA IN Connector 4 Set Signal Generator for 80 MHz signal at 2 ILV with FM Modulation 1 kHz tone 3 kHz Deviation 5 Press RCVR MODE Key 6 Use SQLCH CONTROL Keys and VOL CONTROL Keys to set Squelch to minimum rejection and Volume to audible 7 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 80 MHz Press ENTER Key 8 Press More F6 until Meters
318. se FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to red square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15A1R183 R CUTOFF for maximum red in graticule area Adjust A15AIR186 R DRIVE until red haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A1R186 R DRIVE until red haze just disappears Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Background Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to green square Press ENTER Key Press SCOPE ANLZ MODE Key Adjust A15A1R184 G CUTOFF for maximum green in graticule area 27 Adjust A15A1R187 G DRIVE until green haze appears outside graticule area Readjust A15A1R187 G DRIVE until green haze just disappears Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 3 Color Selection Menu Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Selectable Color Set Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 2 Scope Analyzer Color S
319. sel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 REMOVE Remove 2 screws and 4 washers 1 Remove 4 screws and 8 washers 2 TOP VIEW Disconnect wire cable connector 3 Slide 78A1A15 CRT 4 toward rear Raise handle 5 and remove 78 1 15 CRT 4 STALL Perform Adjustments 2 95 Install 78A1A15 CRT 4 on chassis aligning screw holes 3 Slide 78A1A15 CRT 4 toward front until guide pins 6 are seated in grommets 4 Reconnect wire cable connector 3 B 5 Install 4 screws and 8 washers 2 9 6 Install 2 screws and 4 washers 1 a O O O O 000 000 509 4 oO OO O BOTTOM VIEW 5 0000 0000 CE2FO032 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK Change 1 2 114 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 40 REMOVE 78 15 1 CRT H V AND 78AIA15A2 CRT COLOR DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A15 CRT para 2 39 REMOVE Remove 23 screws 1 Remove top cover 2 Remove 2 screws with washers 3 Remove 2 nuts and 2 washers 4 Lift 78A1A15A1 CRT H V 7 and remove 2 washers 4 Disconnect 3 wire cable connectors 5 Disconnect 3 cabl
320. sion to 10 dBm Connect Tracking Generator output to A3A2J2 Connect Spectrum Analyzer input to A3A2J3 Verify display signal is 30 dBm at 170 MHz f incorrect troubleshoot AJA2CR3 ASA2CRA and associated circuitry fig 21 Sheet 2 of 2 Change 1 2 64 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 18 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER TEST Continued 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to LO Verify second display signal is lt 30 dBm at 100 MHz e f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2L16 A3A2L15 A3A2L11 A3A2L12 A3A2L19 and associated circuitry fig FO 21 Sheet 2 of 2 Set DMM to measure 15 Vdc Verify 0 Vdc with DMM at drain center pin of A3A2Q3 and ground e If incorrect troubleshoot A3A2U2 2 and associated circuitry fig FO 21 Sheet 2 of 2 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable RF AMP Switch to ON Verify 15 1 Vdc with DMM at drain of A3A2Q3 and ground f incorrect troubleshoot A3A2U2 and associated circuitry fig FO 21 Sheet 2 of 2 Connect 30 dB 10 W Attenuator to A3A2J5 Connect Power Meter to unused port on 30 dB 10 W Attenuator Reconnect coaxial cables to A3A2J1 A3A2J2 and A3A2J3 A3A2J4 Connect Signal Generator to A3A1J1 Set Signal Generator for 35 MHz at 0 dBm Verify indication is gt 6 dBm with Power Meter If incorrect perform Steps 17 18 If correct perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure para 2 116 Connect RF Probe to Spec
321. ss ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 W Press ENTER Key Verify O V 11 mV with DMM Adjust A14A1R18 as required Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 2 W Press ENTER Key 2 207 2 113 20 TM 11 6625 3245 40 POWER METER ADJUSTMENT Continued Set Signal Generator RF output to ON Adjust Signal Generator RF output level until reading on Measuring Receiver is equal to calculated power level in Step 7 for 2000 mW Verify 4 025 V f0 025 V with DMM and 2 0 W 2 W on CRT Adjust A14A1R58 as required Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 W Press ENTER Key Adjust Signal Generator RF output level until reading on Measuring Receiver is equal to calculated power level in Step 7 for 10000 mW Verify 10 W 1 W on CRT Adjust A14A1R46 as required Perform Steps 15 24 until no further adjustments are required Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Power Meter Press ENTER Key Press Range Fl to select 20 mW with AR Off Set Signal Generator RF output to OFF press Zero F2 and verify Power Meter Zero raw data Zero value is momentarily displayed Press Range Fl to select 20 W Press Zero F2 and verify Power Meter Zero raw data Zero value is momentarily displayed Press Range Fl to select 2 W Adjust Signal Generator RF output level until reading on Measuring Receiver is equal to calculated power level in St
322. t Panel 4 on 78A1A1 Chassis 5 3 Install 8 screws 3 4 Reconnect wire cable connector 2 5 Install nut 1 Torque to 120 in lbs FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 128 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 50 REPLACE 78A1A17JIA 78AIA17JIB DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Remove 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 Remove 78A2 Top Casel para 2 22 Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78 17 Front Panel para 2 49 REMOVE T Remove nut and lock washer 1 2 Remove 78A1A17J1A 78A1A17JI1B 2 INSTALL 1 Install 78A1 A17J1 A 78A1 17 1 2 2 Install nut and lock washer 1 with Loctite 290 BACK SIDE CE2FO142 FOLLOW ON MAINTENANCE Install 78AIA17 Front Panel para 2 49 Install 78A3 Bottom Case para 2 23 Install 78A2 Top Case para 2 22 Install 83A1 Test Adapter para 2 21 END OF TASK 2 129 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 51 REPLACE 78A1A17J2A 78A1A17J2B DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Remove Install INITIAL SETUP PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES e Remove 83A1 Test Adapter 2 21 Remove 7842 Top Casel para 2 22 e Remove 78A3 Bottom Casel para 2 23 Remove 78A1A17 Front Panel 2 49 REMOVE 1 Remove nut and lock washer 1 2 Remove 78A1 Al7J2A 78A1 A17J2B
323. te A13 Generator fig FO P Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 2 5 1 with DMM at A13W1P1 Pin 4 fig e If incorrect perform Steps 17 19 2 46 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 14 SELF TEST FAILURE TEST Continued 16 POWER METER Continued 8 Disconnect W13 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 A13 Generator IF FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 Receiver to W14 fig FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 20 dBm e lf incorrect replace A9 90 MHz Generator para 2 29 Reconnect W13 Disconnect W12 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W12 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 5 dBm e If incorrect replace A10 1st LO para 2 63 Reconnect W12 Disconnect W1 fig 2 Sheet 2 of 5 from A13 Generator IF fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 connect Measuring Receiver to W1 fig FO P Sheet 2 of 5 and verify gt 4 dBm e If incorrect replace All 2nd LO 2 62 Locate A28 Attenuator fig FO P Sheet 1 of 5 and verify 0 00 5 Vdc with DMM at 28 fig FO 17 Location If incorrect A28AT1 Pin 1 Remove A28 Attenuator para 2 70 and troubleshoot A28U2 A28AT1 Pin 2 Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 A28AT1 Pin 4 Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 A28AT1 Pin 8 Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot A28U1 A28AT1 Pin 16 Remove A28 Attenuator and troubleshoot 2801 A28AT1 Pin 32
324. te A22 RF I O Sheet 1 of 5 Pull up A22 RF I O press POWER Switch and verify 1 Beep e If incorrect replace A22 RF 2 34 If correct replace A16 Power Supply para 2 48 1 BEEP Locate A16 Power Supply fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Press POWER Switch and verify voltages with DMM at 16 4 fig FO 14 A1644 Pin 1 5 Vdc 0 5 Vdc A16J4 Pin 3 15 2 A1644 Pin 5 15 Vdc 2 Vac e reading is incorrect replace A16 Power 2 48 e f all readings are correct perform Power Faults Test para 2 10 1 BEEP CONTINUOUSLY LOOPING 1 Pull up following assemblies fig FO 2 SheetS1 of 5 Install assemblies one at a time press POWER Switch and verify 1 Beep Continuously looping Remove assembly if 1 Beep Continuously looping is not present If 1 Beep Continuously looping replace A20 Memory A20 Memory A23 Counter A23 Counter A22 RF 1 O A22 RF A25 Digitizer A25 Digitizer A24 Function Generator A24 Function Generator para 2 33 A26 Monitor Control A26 Monitor Control A27 External A27 External 2 Install assemblies in groups and fault isolate 1 Beep Continuously looping Replace faulty assemblies 2 BEEPS 1 Pull up following assemblies fig FO 2 Sheet 1 of 5 Install assemblies one at a time press POWER Switch and verify 2 Beeps Remove assembly if 2 Beeps is not present If 2 Beeps replace A23 Counter A22 RF A22
325. the Phase Meter for the Receive function 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Set Signal Generator output for 121 100000 MHz at 0 dBM with 6 kHz of deviation and 1 kHz rate Set Measuring Receiver Measurement to M Phase Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select PM Press ENTER Key Verify phase reading is within 3 1 Count of reading on Measuring Receiver If out of tolerance perform Steps 6 15 If in tolerance perform Steps 11 15 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 9 Phase Meter Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 Set Signal Generator output for 8 5 kHz deviation Set Measuring Receiver Detector to RMS Press MTRS MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 13 Phase Meter RMS Press ENTER Key Verify Phase Meter RMS matches Measuring Receiver 10 11 count If out of tolerance perform Steps 16 21 If in tolerance perform Step 21 Press SETUP Key and AUX F6 Press ENTER Key to access Calibration Menu Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Phase Meter RMS Press ENTER Key Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Press
326. tion Menu Press ENTER Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 1 Defaulted Manufacturer Set Press ENTER Key to select ON 40 41 Press AUX F6 Install top cover on A15 CRT para 2 43 Step 4 Install A15 CRT 2 42 2 116 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION This procedure is used after repair of A3 RF Amplifier to adjust the A3 RF Amplifier filters and output levels 1 Remove RF Amplifie para 2 77 Remove cover from RF Amplifier para 2 77 Step 1 2 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to LO and RF Amplifier Test Cable RF AMP Switch to OFF Activate Power Supply Verify voltage with DMM at following locations fig FO 21 A3A2R57 50 f7 A3A2TP3 5 11 2 4 50 f7 If any voltage is incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 4 5 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to HI Verify voltage with DMM at following locations fig FO 21 A3A2TP3 5 1 ABA2TP4 50 f7 If any voltage is incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 2 213 2 116 TM 11 6625 3245 40 RF AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to LO Set DMM to measure 15 Verify 0 with DMM at of 2 and ground If incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Set RF A
327. tion the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your requirements Change 2 B 1 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section Il EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST 1 2 3 4 5 ITEM LEVEL NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION U M NUMBER NUMBER 1 6810 01 382 2904 Alcohol Isopropyl 1 01 Fluid BX oz Bottle ASTM D 770 81346 2 O 8305 00 818 4567 Cloth Cheesecloth Cotton YD Lintless CCC C 440 Type 2 Class 1 81348 3 Detergent Mild Liquid OZ 4 Swab Cotton BX 5 H Adhesive Loctite 290 OZ 6 H Sealer Non Conductive OZ Q Dope 7 H Conformal Coating OZ 8 H Aluminum Tape IN 9 H Thermal Compound OZ 10 H Permabond OZ 11 H Torque Seal OZ B 2 Change 2 TM 11 6625 3245 40 APPENDIX C FABRICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MONITOR MONITOR CONTROL EXTENDED RIBBON CABLE NOMENCLATURE PARTNO VENDOR QUANTITY CONNECTOR 50 PIN 3425 6606 3M 2 EA RIBBON CABLE 50 CONDUCTOR 3302 50 3M 14 IN PULL TAB 3490 5 3M 2EA Assemble Connectors and Cable as shown compressing Connectors until locked H PIN 1 NI 93 8 9 Agag BROWN WIRE Iz 5 5 2 5 2 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 s s e 8 5 800088000008 5 E 2 5 s 5 5 5 9 s 8 5 s 000 5 e 5 EJ 5 5 5 5 E s 2 5 9 5 8 8 9 5 CONNECTOR N CABLE Roll Connectors on
328. to Cable and attach Pull Tabs as shown r CONNECTOR CABLE PULL TAB Seaton C 1 C 2 blank TM 11 6625 3245 40 INDEX Subject Page 78A1A1A1 Motherboard Gireuit Schem atie FO 3 Sheet lr aaa atar FP 15 Locator Diagram FO 3 Sheet 1 FP 13 2 155 78A1A2 Rear Panel Replace Proce cure ete HU RN eee to eco 2 137 78A1A3 Monitor Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 18 1 37 Functional Description Guri are Henning 1 36 LocatorDiagraMi FO Aid A aedi eee rueda FP 17 Replace Procedure ici iau e e Ert Ii teat ie i eiit 2 106 78A1A4 Analyzer Log IF Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 0 1 41 Functional Description osse E ORIG UR eR ea RIGIDIS dro 1 40 Locator Diagram EQ 4 A eue e mv dg en de ea FP 17 Replace Procedure d Td 2 101 78A1A5 Analyzer RF Functional Block Diagram Figure 1 19 ee nn 1 39 Functional Description 2 1 el dida 1 38 Locator Diagram FQs4 25 2 irte iei ei enda rb eed gae ero PY ui Lr aaa Eg abr ugue pad FP 17 Replace Procedure e suba eie miei Date b 2 102 78A1A6 Receiver Functional Block Diagram 1 7 1 35 Functional Descriptions nose raei m 1 34 Locator Diagram FQ 4 i aa la i
329. tor DEMOD OUT Connector and MIC ACC IN OUT Connector The MIC ACC IN OUT Connector allows connection of a microphone or other peripheral device The DUPLEX OUT Connector is a BNC type connector providing an RF path for the signal generated during duplex operation This connector is the alternative for generating out the T R Connector during Duplex Operation The DUPLEX OUT Connector is connected to the A14 Power Termination The ANTENNA IN Connector provides RF path for receiving signals during Receive and Duplex Operation The ANTENNA IN Connector is connected to the Receive IF Assembly During Duplex Operation the alternative connector for receiving RF is the T R Connector The SCOPE IN Connector provides direct access to the Oscilloscope Function bypassing all other routings and filters The SCOPE IN Connector is aBNC Connector The Speaker provides audio for the operator The Speaker is connected to the A17A2 Keyboard Signals provided for the speaker include SPEAKER and SPEAKER RETURN The INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment is a potentiometer that allows the operator to set the intensity level of the A15 CRT The potentiometer is configured with the INT POT TOP signal tied to one leg the INTENSITY signal tied to the center tap and the second leg left floating Signals for the INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment originate the A15 CRT 1 22 1749 MOTHERBOARD A17J4 DIN ES EXT MO JM MP EN A17J5 ER IN
330. tput and also is used as a status signal to pass back to the A19 Processor 1 30 A11W1P1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY MULTIPLIER TCXO PWR A11W2J1 TCXO A11J10 GENERATOR IF TCXO PWR MULTIPLIER F 1129 10 MHz RECEIVE IF INT EXT REF SELECT 10 MHz A11J12 1st LO i 10 MHz 10 MHz 8 A11J13 1st LO ANB A11Ja COUNTER 10 MHz 114 ANALYZER RF A11J5 Brd LO 1 MHz EXTERNAL FREQUENCY TCXO STANDARD ENABLE DIVIDER A117 DETECT 10 90 MHz GENERATOR A11J8 RECEIVER Figure 1 15 All 2nd LO Functional Block Diagram 1 31 TM 11 6625 3245 40 TM 11 6625 3245 40 14 78A1A7 3rd 1 16 The output for the A7 3rd LO is a 77 3 79 3 MHz Signal to the A12 Receive IF and A5 Analyzer RF The inputs for the A7 3rd LO include the 1 MHz Standard from the All 1 2nd LO and frequency data from the A22 RF The data from the 22 RF 1 0 is initiated in the A19 Processor The A22 RF I O receives the data from the A19 Processor through the NAT BUS and converts the data from parallel format to serial format and passes the data to the A7 3rd LO The internal mechanism of the A7 3rd LO consists of three major loops The first loop is the 780 125 800 MHz Coarse Loop The 780 800 MHz VCO is pretuned by the data passed by the A22 RF This data is converted by a D A Converter to an analog voltage and passed to the 780 800 MHz VCO The same analog voltage is used to p
331. trum Analyzer Verify level is 30 dBm 3 dB with Spectrum Analyzer and RF Probe at A3A1E5 If incorrect troubleshoot and replace defective A3A1U1 Verify voltage is lt 10 and gt 0 5 with DMM at A3A2TP5 e If incorrect 2 10 Vdc troubleshoot A3A2Q1 and 202 If incorrect 0 5 Vdc troubleshoot A3A2DC1 A3A2U3 and A3A2U5 f correct perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure para 2 116 Change 1 2 65 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Section IV MAINTENANCE 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST DESCRIPTION This procedure covers Intensity Contrast Keyboard Data Scroll Spinner Squelch AF Gen 1 Frequency and Level AF Gen 1 Distortion Threshold Speaker Speaker Control AF Gen 2 Frequency And Level AF Gen 2 Distortion Threshold External Modulation MIC ACC IN OUT Connector Modulation RF Gen Level Flatness RF Gen Frequency Accuracy RF Gen Level Accuracy RF Gen AM RF Gen FM RF Gen AM Test RF Gen FM Test RF Gen Harmonic Non Harmonic Level Frequency Frequency Error Meter Receiver Sensitivity Test Receiver Selectivity Test Antenna In Connector Overload Protection Duplex Out Connector Overload Protection BER Meter Duplex Out Connector Level DMM Power Meter High Power Oscilloscope Vertical Accuracy DC Power RF Amplifier Test Adapter Test Plug NOTE Performance Test must be performed in order shown Allow 30 minute warm up period
332. trum Analyzer Center Frequency to 88 MHz Set 1 dB point of filter knee to 87 93 MHz by adjustment of windings on A3A2L13 and A3A2L1 4 Set Spectrum Analyzer MHz Division to 5 Verify filter flatness is 1 dB If incorrect adjust windings on A3A2L13 and A3A2L14 Perform Steps 5 13 Using Permabond Appendix item 10 seal A3A2L13 and 21 14 Reconnect A3W1P2 and A3W2P1 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to LO 2 214 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 116 83A1A3 RF AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Continued 28 33 34 35 Connect 30 dB 10 W Attenuator to A3A2J5 Connect Spectrum Analyzer to 30 dB 10 W Attenuator Connect Signal Generator to A3A1J1 Set Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency to 50 MHz Attenuator to 40 dB and MHz Div to 5 Set Signal Generator for 35 MHz signal at 5 dBm with no modulation Adjust 2 5 or A3A2R6 to null second harmonic at 70 MHz to lt 30 dBc Set RF Generator to 40 MHz at 0 dBm Connect Power Meter to 30 dB 10 W Attenuator Adjust A3A2R32 for 36 5 dBm minus true attenuation of 30 dB Pad 5 to 8 dBm Using DMM on A3A2TP5 step RF Generator through 31 51 MHz Verify output level is constant 1 dB and leveler voltage does not rail to 10 or 6 If incorrect adjust A3A2DC1 to flatten band output level If incorrect perform 83A1A3 RF Amplifier Test para 2 18 Set RF Amplifier Test Cable BAND Switch to HI Using DMM on A3A2TP5 step RF Generator through 51 88 MHz
333. ulation with no modulation 600 MHz signal at 0 dB 600 MHz signal at 0 dB Frequency Count Readout 300 Hz with no modulation with no modulation 800 MHz signal at 0 dB 800 MHz signal at 0 dB Frequency Count Readout 400 Hz with no modulation with no modulation 8 Disconnect external test equipment AGC 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Connect external test equipment as shown ANTENNA IN SIGNAL 0000 oUo GENERATOR oo 0 DO 0000 C o 0000000 0000000 00 0000000 00 ee 0000000000 FUNCTION GENERATOR CE2FO166 4 Set Signal Generator for 100 MHz signal at 30 dBm Select External AM Modulation at 50 5 Set Function Generator for 1 kHz square wave 2 78 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued AGC Continued 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 100 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MOD Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select AM2 Press ENTER Key Press MORE F6 until DISP F1 appears Press DISP Fl Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 4 Full Scope Press ENTER Key Press Input F3 Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Rcvr iF Press ENTER Key Press SETUP Key Use FIELD SELECT Key
334. ursor to 8 DC Press ENTER Key Verify trace is on second major division above center i2 minor divisions Disconnect external test equipment DC POWER Press POWER Switch to Off Disconnect AC Power Cable from AC LINE IN Connector Set DC Power Source for 24 Vdc Connect Power Cord from DC Power Source to External DC Power Source Connector Red is White is Green is Black is Press POWER Switch to On Rotate INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment fully cw and verify IFR Logo Screen is displayed as shown YELLOW GREEN WHITE FIWAM 1600 Copyright c 1992 IFR Systems Inc Rights Reserved BLUE LIGHT BLUE 2 89 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued DC POWER Continued 6 Verify Fan is operating 7 Press POWER Switch to Off 8 Set DC Power Source to OFF and disconnect DC Power Cable 9 Connect Power Cable to AC LINE IN Connector 10 Press POWER Switch to On RF AMPLIFIER 1 Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key 2 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice 3 Press RCVR MODE Key 4 Press More F6 until Sp Tst F5 appears Press Sp Tst F5 5 Press OPER Fl 6 Press More F6 until 7238 F1 appears Press 7238 Fl Press ENTER Key 7 Press ENTER Key for next five operator instruction screens and wait for Debug screen to appear OO 0000 oo oooo D OO 0000 O 0000000 OO 0000000
335. value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press Key and ENTER Key Press Range F1 to set Range to 50 kHz Set Signal Generator output for 40 kHz deviation Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press Key and ENTER Key 2 192 TM 11 6625 3245 40 2 104 DEVIATION METER ADJUSTMENT Continued 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Press Range F1 to set Range to 100 kHz Set Signal Generator output for 80 kHz deviation Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press ENTER Key Set Measuring Receiver Detector to Peak Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter value from Measuring Receiver Press Key and ENTER Key Press Ret F5 and AUX F6 Set Signal Generator output for 11 kHz deviation Set Measuring Receiver Detector to RMS Press MTRS MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 12 Dev Meter RMS Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 10 kHz Press ENTER Key Verify Deviation Meter RMS matches Measuring Receiver 10 i1 count If out of tolerance pe
336. ve lead to ABA2TP3 Press POWER Switch to On and allow 5 minute warm up period Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use Field Select Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press MTRS MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Digital Multimeter DMM field Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Ohm Press ENTER Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 KO Press ENTER Key 12 Verify 1 000 Vdc i0 05 Vdc with DMM Adjust ABA2R13 as required 13 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select DCV Press ENTER Key 14 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 20 V Press ENTER Key 15 Verify 100 mV 40 5 mV with DMM Adjust A8A2R16 as required 16 Connect DMM V 9Z Connector to Calibrator Set Calibrator to 100 17 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to MULTIMETER Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select Ohm Press ENTER Key 18 Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RANGE Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 200 KO Press ENTER Key 19 Verify 100 10 KO on Digital Multimeter Adjust A8A2R8 as required 20 Set Calibrator to 1 kQ 21 Press ENTER Key Use DATA SCROLL Keys to select 2 Press ENTER Key
337. ween A1A1W2P1 Pins 10 and 11 FO 3 Sheet 1 of 2 when INTENSITY Contrast Adjustment is rotated otated cw e If incorrect remove A17 Front Panel para 2 49 and replace A17R1 fig FO 15 Sheet 1 of 2 e f correct perform A15 CRT 7005 7840 600 Test para 2 16 or A15 CRT 7005 8644 300 Test para 2 17 2 10 TM 11 6625 3245 40 Table 2 1 Troubleshooting Continued MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 8 CRT Error Messages are displayed Inactive Func Gen Board Replace A24 Function Generator para 2 33 Inactive RF I O Board Replace A22 RF I O para 2 34 Inactive Counter Board Replace A23 Counter para 2 25 Inactive Monitor Cntl Board e Replace A26 Monitor Control para 2 32 Inactive SCSI Interface Replace A27 External I O para 2 38 Input or Overload on Ant or Duplex Port Locate A14W1 FO 2 Sheet 2 of 5 disconnect A14W1P1 fig FO 11 press POWER Switch and verify error message If incorrect replace A14 Power Termination If correct replace A12 Receive IA para 2 66 Overload on T R Port Locate A14W1 Sheet 2 of 5 disconnect A14W1P1 fig FO 11 press POWER Switch and verify error message lf incorrect replace A14 Power Termination para 2 71 e If correct replace Monitor para 2 31 Power Term Overload Remove A26 Monitor Control and install on PC Board Assembly Extender Tool Code 6 in Appendix B of TM 11 6625 3245 12 in Test S
338. ypad to enter 100 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Verify Harmonics are lt 26 dBc and Non Harmonics are lt 50 dBc Disconnect external test equipment FREQUENCY FREQUENCY ERROR METER RD o Press MTRS MODE Key AUX F6 and RCL Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to 10 Factory Defaults and press ENTER Key twice Press RCVR MODE Key Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to ANT Press ENTER Key to select T R Use FIELD SELECT Keys to move cursor to RF Press ENTER Key Use DATA ENTRY Keypad to enter 50 0000 MHz Press ENTER Key Connect external test equipment as shown O 0000 oo 0 50000 O o agoaooa 0000000 OO 0000000 00 D se 0000000000 SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER POWER SPLITTER 2 77 TM 11 5826 313 13 2 19 PERFORMANCE TEST Continued FREQUENCY FREQUENCY ERROR METER Continued 7 Set Signal Generator and Radio Test Set for following signals and verify readings match Frequency Counter readings Signal Generator for Radio Test Set for Matches Frequency Counter Reading 50 MHZ signal at 0 dB 50 MHz signal at 0 dB Frequency Count Readout 25 Hz with no modulation with no modulation 200 MHz signal at 0 dB 200 MHz signal at 0 dB Frequency Count Readout 100 Hz with no modulation with no modulation 400 MHz signal at 0 dB 400 MHz signal at 0 dB Frequency Count Readout 200 Hz with no mod

TM 11-6625-3245-40 HEADQUARTERS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents